Pioneer Elite PRO-1120HD Operating Instructions
PLASMA DISPLA Y SYSTEM PRO-1 120HD PRO-920HD Operating Instructions Register Y our Product on www .pioneerelectronics.com
Read these instructions. K eep these instructions. Heed all warnings. F ollow all instructions. Do not use this apparatus near water . Clean only with dr y cloth. Do not bloc k any v entilation openings. Install in accordance with the manuf acturerâ s instructions. Do not install near any heat sources such as r adiators, heat registers , stov es, or other apparatus (including amplifiers) that produce heat. Do not def eat the safety purpose of the polarized or g rounding-type plug. A polarized plug has two b lades with one wider than the other . A grounding type plug has two b lades and a third grounding prong. The wide blade or the third prong are provided f or your safety . If the provided plug does not fit into your outlet, consult an electrician f or replacement of the obsolete outlet. Protect the power cord from being w alked on or pinched par ticularly at plugs, conv enience receptacles, and the point where the y exit from the apparatus. 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) 6) 7) 8) 9) 10) Only use attachments/accessories specified by the manuf acturer . Use only with the car t, stand, tripod, bracket, or table specified b y the manuf acturer , or sold with the apparatus. When a cart is used, use caution when moving the cart/apparatus combination to av oid injur y from tip-ov er . Unplug this apparatus during lightning stor ms or when unused f or long periods of time. Ref er all ser vicing to qualified ser vice personnel. Ser vicing is required when the apparatus has been damaged in any w ay , such as power-supply cord or plug is damaged, liquid has been spilled or objects hav e fallen into the apparatus , the apparatus has been e xposed to rain or moisture, does not operate normally , or has been dropped. 11) 12) 13) 14) Note to CA TV system installer . This reminder is pr ovided to call the CA TV system installerâ s attention to Article 820-40 of the NEC that provides guidelines for proper gr ounding and, in particular , specifies that the cable groundâÂÂshall be connected to the grounding system of the building, as close to the point of cable entry as practical.
English CAUTION: This product satisfies FCC regulations when shielded cables and connectors are used to connect the unit to other equipment. T o prevent electromagnetic inter fer- ence with electric appliances such as radios and televi- sions, use shielded cables and connectors for connec- tions. FEDERAL COMMUNICA TIONS COMMISSION DECLARA TION OF CONFORMITY This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Op- eration is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful inter ference, and (2) this device must accept any inter ference received, including inter ference that may cause undesired operation. P roduct Name: Plasma Display System (Plasma Display) (Media Receiver) Model Number: PRO-1120HD PRO-920HD (PRO-505PU) (PRO-435PU) (PRO-R05U) (PRO-R05U) P roduct Categor y : Class B Personal Computers & P eriph- erals R esponsible P arty Name: PIONEER ELECTRONICS (USA), INC., Customer Support Div . Address: P .O. BO X 1760, LONG BEACH , CA., 90801-1760 U.S.A. Phone: (800) 421-1625 F or Business Customer URL http://www .PioneerUSA.com IMPORT ANT NOTICE: The serial number for this equipment is located on the rear panel. Please write this serial number on your enclosed warranty card and keep it in a secure area. This is for your security . W ARNING: Be sure to plug this equipment into a grounding-type AC outlet. W ARNING: THE APP ARA TUS IS NOT W A TER- PROOFS, TO PREVENT FIRE OR SHOCK HAZARD, DO NOT EXPOSE THIS APPLIANCE TO RAIN OR MOISTURE AND DO NOT PUT ANY W A TER SOURCE NEAR THIS APP ARA TUS, SUCH AS V ASE, FL OWER POT , COSMET - ICS CONT AINER AND MEDICINE BOT TLE ETC. W ARNING: Handling the cord on this product or cords associated with accessories sold with the prod- uct will expose you to lead, a chemical known to the State of California and other governmental entities to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm. W ash hands after handling . NOTE: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a class B digital device, pur - suant to P art 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are de- signed to provide reasonable protection against harmful inter ference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful inter ference to radio communications. However , there is no guarantee that inter ference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful inter ference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turn- ing the equipment off and on , the user is encouraged to tr y to correct the inter ference by one or more of the fol- lowing measures: â Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. â Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver . â Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. â Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV tech- nician for help. Information to User Alteration or modifications carried out without appro- priate authorization may invalidate the user âÂÂs right to operate the equipment. [For Canadian model] This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003.
4 En Contents Thank you for buying this P ioneer product. Please read through these operating instructions so you will know how to operate your model properly . After you have finished reading the instructions, put them away in a safe place for future reference. In some countries or regions, the shape of the power plug and power outlet may sometimes differ from that shown in the explana- tor y drawings. However the method of connecting and operating the unit is the same. 01 Important User Guidance Information 02 Safety Precautions 03 Operational Precautions 04 Supplied Accessories Plasma Display ................................................................... 11 Media Receiver .................................................................... 11 05 Part Names Plasma Display ................................................................... 12 Media Receiver .................................................................... 12 R emote control unit ............................................................ 14 06 Preparation Installing the Plasma Display ............................................ 15 Installing the Media Receiver ............................................ 16 Installing the Media Receiver vertically ...................... 16 Connecting the system cable ............................................ 18 R outing cables .................................................................... 19 P reparing the remote control unit ..................................... 20 Inserting batteries ......................................................... 20 Cautions regarding batteries ....................................... 20 Allowed operation range of the remote control unit .................................................................... 20 Cautions regarding the remote control unit .............. 20 Cable connections for watching digital and/or conventional TV channels .................................................. 21 Connecting VHF/UHF antennas and a Cable Converter ....................................................................... 21 Cable connections for watching digital TV channels over air (VHF/UHF) ........................................ 21 Connecting VHF/UHF antennas .................................. 21 Switching between antenna A and B ............................... 22 Inserting the cable card ..................................................... 22 Connecting the power cord ............................................... 23 07 Basic Operations T urning on the power (Standby) ........................................ 24 T urning off the power (Standby) ........................................ 24 W atching TV channels ........................................................ 25 Selecting the antenna .................................................. 25 Changing channels ...................................................... 25 Changing the volume and sound ................................ 26 V iewing a channel banner ........................................... 26 Using the POD ser vice ................................................. 27 Changing the language ................................................ 27 Setting MTS/SAP mode ............................................... 27 Using the multiscreen functions ....................................... 28 Splitting the screen ...................................................... 28 F reezing images ............................................................ 29 08 Menu Setup Menu configuration ............................................................ 30 AV mode menus ............................................................ 30 PC mode menus ........................................................... 30 Menu operations ................................................................. 30 09 T uner Setup Setting up TV channels ...................................................... 31 Using Auto Channel P reset ......................................... 31 Setting for skipping unwanted channels .................... 31 Setting up TV channels manually ............................... 31 Naming TV channels .................................................... 32 Checking signal strength ............................................. 32 Checking the Cable Card ID ........................................ 32 Enabling data acquisition ............................................ 32 P arental Control .................................................................. 33 Changing the password ............................................... 33 Clearing the password ................................................. 34 Activating the P arental Control ................................... 34 Setting the voluntar y movie rating system (MP AA) .......................................................................... 34 Setting the TV ratings ................................................... 35 Setting the TV P arental Guidelines (TV Guidelines) ... 35 Blocking Not Rated TV programs ................................ 35 Canadian rating systems ............................................. 36 Setting Canadian English ratings ............................... 36 Setting Canadian F rench ratings ................................ 37 T emporarily deactivating the P arental Control ........... 37 Setting your favorite channels ........................................... 37 Setting up closed captions ................................................ 37 Activating the closed caption ...................................... 38 Selecting the type of conventional closed captions .. 38 Selecting digital closed captions ................................ 38 Selecting digital closed caption parameters ............. 38 Clock Setting ....................................................................... 39
Contents English 5 En 10 Adjustments and Settings Sleep Timer .......................................................................... 40 AV Selection ........................................................................ 40 P icture adjustments ........................................................... 41 P ro Adjust ...................................................................... 41 Color Management ....................................................... 42 Sound adjustments ............................................................ 43 FOCUS ........................................................................... 43 F ront Surround .............................................................. 43 P ower Control ...................................................................... 44 Energy Save ................................................................... 44 No Signal off (A V mode only) ....................................... 44 No Operation off (A V mode only) ................................. 44 P ower Management (PC mode only) .......................... 44 Adjusting image positions (A V mode only) ...................... 45 Adjusting image positions and clock automatically (PC mode only) .................................................................... 45 Adjusting image positions and clock manually (PC mode only) .................................................................... 45 Selecting a screen size ....................................................... 46 Changing the brightness at both sides of the screen (Side Mask) .......................................................................... 47 Language setting ................................................................ 47 11 Timer Presetting P resetting TV programs using the timer ........................... 48 P riority rules for overlapped presettings ........................... 49 12 Enjoying through External Equipment W atching a DVD image ...................................................... 50 Connecting a DVD player ............................................. 50 Displaying a DVD image .............................................. 50 W atching a VCR image ...................................................... 50 Connecting a VCR ........................................................ 50 Displaying a VCR image ............................................... 50 Using HDMI Input ............................................................... 51 Connecting HDMI equipment ..................................... 51 Enjoying a game console or watching camcorder images ................................................................................. 52 Connecting a game console or camcorder ................ 52 Displaying an image of the game console or camcorder ..................................................................... 52 Recording digital TV programs using a VCR or DVD recorder ....................................................................... 52 Avoiding unwanted feedback ...................................... 52 Connecting a recorder ................................................. 53 Connecting other audio equipment .................................. 53 Connecting an A V receiver .......................................... 53 W atching a D - VHS image ................................................... 54 What is i.LINK? .............................................................. 54 Which i.LINK devices are connectable? ..................... 54 What can be recorded through i.LINK? ...................... 54 Connecting D- VHS recorders ...................................... 54 When connecting a single D- VHS recorder ............... 54 When connecting two D- VHS recorders ..................... 54 Displaying a D- VHS image ................................................. 55 Useful and important notification ............................... 55 Setting up for controlling a D- VHS recorder .............. 56 Editing the i.LINK list .................................................... 56 Setting up for i.LINK standby ....................................... 57 Operating the control panel screen ............................ 57 W atching an image from a personal computer ............... 58 Connecting a personal computer ............................... 58 Displaying an image from a personal computer ....... 58 Computer compatibility chart ............................................ 58 Connecting the VCR controller .......................................... 59 The lists of controllable recording equipment manufactures ............................................ 60 Connecting control cords .................................................. 61 About SR .................................................................... 61 13 Useful Remote Control Featur es Learning function of the remote control unit ................... 62 Using the learning function ......................................... 62 P resetting manufacture codes .................................... 62 Manufacture codes ...................................................... 63 Using the remote control unit to control other devices ................................................................................. 64 R eceiver control buttons .............................................. 64 Cable control buttons ................................................... 65 SA T control buttons ...................................................... 66 VCR control buttons ..................................................... 67 DVD/DVR control buttons ............................................ 68 14 Appendix T roubleshooting .................................................................. 69 Specifications ...................................................................... 79
01 Important User Guidance Information 6 En In order to obtain maximum enjoyment from this P ioneer P ureVision PRO-1120HD/PRO-920HD Plasma Display System, please first read this information carefully . With the P ioneer PureV ision PRO -1120HD/PRO -920HD, you can be assured of a high quality Plasma Display System with long- life and high reliability . T o achieve images of exceptional quality , this P ioneer Plasma Display System incorporates state-of-the- art design and construction, as well as very precise and highly advanced technology . The P ioneer P ureVision PRO-1120HD/PRO-920HD incorporates the latest in color filter technology â 1 st Sur face P ure Color F ilter . This improves the color / picture reproduction of these models as compared to previous models. It also eliminates the need for a physical glass panel to be placed in front of the plasma panel, which furthers P ioneer âÂÂs continued goal of reducing environmental waste in consumer electronics, now during the manufacturing process and in the future during the recycling process. Over the course of its lifetime, the luminosity of the P ioneer PRO-1120HD/PRO -920HD Plasma Display System will diminish ver y slowly , such as with all phosphor-based screens (for example, a traditional tube-type television). T o enjoy beautiful and bright images on your P ioneer Plasma Display System for many years to come, please carefully read and follow the usage guidelines below . Usage guidelines All phosphor-based screens (including conventional tube-type televisions) can be affected by displaying static images for a prolonged period. Plasma Display Systems are no exception to this rule. After-image and permanent effects on the screen can be avoided by taking some basic precautions. By following the recommendations listed below , you can ensure longer and satisfactor y results from your plasma: ⢠Whenever possible, avoid frequently displaying the same image or virtually still moving pictures (e.g. closed-captioned images or video game images which have static portions). ⢠Avoid viewing the On Screen Display for extended periods, from a DVD player , VCR , and all other components. ⢠Do not leave the same picture freeze-framed or paused continuously over a long period of time, when using the still picture mode from a TV , VCR , DVD player or any other component. ⢠Images which have both very bright areas and ver y dark areas side by side should not be displayed for a prolonged period of time. ⢠When playing a game, the âÂÂGAMEâ mode setting within â A V Selectionâ is strongly recommended. However , please limit its use to less than 2 hours at a time. â¢A f ter playing a game, or displaying a PC image or any still image, it is best to view a normal moving picture in the âÂÂWIDEâ or âÂÂFULL â screen setting for over 3 times longer than the previous still/moving image. â¢A f ter using the Plasma Display System, always switch the display to âÂÂST ANDBYâ mode. Installation guidelines The P ioneer P ureVision PRO-1120HD/PRO-920HD Plasma Display System incorporates a ver y thin design. T o ensure safety , please take the proper measures to mount or install the Plasma Display , in order to prevent the unit from tipping over in the event of vibration or accidental movement. This product should be installed by using only parts and accessories designed by PIONEER . Use of accessories other than the PIONEER stand or installation bracket may result in instability , and could cause injur y. F or custom installation, please consult the dealer where the unit was purchased. T o ensure correct installation, experienced and qualified experts must install the unit. PIONEER will not be held responsible for accident or damage caused by the use of parts and accessories manufactured by other companies. To avoid malfunction and overheating when installing, make sure that the vents on the main unit are not blocked. T o ensure proper heat emission: ⢠Distance the unit slightly from other equipment, walls, etc. F or the minimum space required around the unit, see pages 15 to 16. ⢠Do not fit the unit inside narrow spaces where ventilation is poor . ⢠Do not cover with a cloth, etc. ⢠Clean the vents on the sides and rear of the unit to remove dust build-up by using a vacuum cleaner set to its lowest suction setting. ⢠Do not place the product on a carpet or blanket. ⢠Do not leave the product tilted over except the case of vertical installation of the Media Receiver . ⢠Do not reverse the product. Using the unit without proper ventilation may cause the internal temperature to rise, and could result in possible malfunction. When the surrounding or internal temperature exceeds a certain degree, the display will automatically power off in order to cool the internal electronics and prevent a hazardous occurrence. Malfunction can be caused by many factors: inappropriate installation site, improper assembly/installation/mounting, improper operation of or modifications made to this product. However , PIONEER cannot be held responsible for accidents or malfunction caused by the above. The following are typical effects and characteristics of a phosphor-based matrix display and as such, are not covered by the manufacturer âÂÂs limited warranties: â¢P ermanent residual images upon the phosphors of the panel. ⢠The existence of a minute number of inactive light cells. â¢P anel generated sounds, examples: F an motor noise, and electrical circuit humming / glass panel buzzing
01 Important User Guidance Information English 7 En Panel sticking and after-image lag ⢠Displaying the same images such as still images for a long time may cause after-image lagging. This may occur in the following two cases. 1. A f ter-image lagging due to r emaining electric load When image patterns with ver y high peak luminance are displayed more than 1 minute, after-image lagging may occur due to the remaining electric load. The after-images remaining on the screen will disappear when moving images are displayed. The time for the after-images to disappear depends on the luminance of the still images and the time they had been displayed. 2. A f ter-image (lag image) due to bur ning Avoid displaying the same image on the Plasma Display continuously over a long period of time. If the same image is displayed continuously for several hours, or for shorter periods of time over several days, a permanent after-image may remain on the screen due to burning of the fluorescent materials. Such images may become less noticeable if moving images are later displayed, but they will not disappear completely . ⢠The Energy save function can be set to help prevent damage from screen burning (see page 44). About operations through i.LINK PIONEER shall not always assure normal video/audio recording or playback when a D- VHS is operated through i.LINK. DO NOT PLACE THIS PRODUCT ON AN UNST ABLE CART , ST AND, TRIPOD, BRACKET , OR T ABLE. THE PRODUCT MA Y F ALL, CAUSING SERIOUS PERSONAL INJURY AND SERIOUS DAMAGE TO THE PRODUCT . USE ONL Y WITH A CART , ST AND, TRIPOD, BRACKET , OR T ABLE RECOMMENDED BY THE MANUF ACTURER , OR SOLD WITH THE PRODUCT . FOLLOW THE MANUF ACTUREâÂÂS INSTRUCTIONS WHEN INST ALLING THE PRODUCT AND USE MOUNTING ACCESSORIES RECOMMENDED BY THE MANUF ACTURER. A PRODUCT AND CART COMBINA TION SHOULD BE MOVED WITH THE CARE. QUICK STOPS, EXCESSIVE FORCE, AND UNEVEN SURF ACES MA Y CAUSE THE PRODUCT AND CART COMBINA TION TO OVERTURN.
02 Safety Precautions 8 En Electricity is used to perform many useful functions, but it can also cause personal injuries and property damage if improperly handled. This product has been engineered and manufactured with the highest priority on safety . However , improper use can result in electric shock and/or fire. In order to prevent potential danger , please obser ve the following instructions when install- ing, operating and cleaning the product. T o ensure your safety and prolong the ser vice life of your product, please read the following precautions carefully before using the product. 1. Read instructionsâÂÂAll operating instructions must be read and understood before the product is operated. 2. Keep this manual in a safe placeâÂÂThese safety and operating instructions must be kept in a safe place for future reference. 3. Obser ve warningsâÂÂAll warnings on the product and in the instructions must be obser ved closely . 4. F ollow instructionsâÂÂAll operating instructions must be followed. 5. CleaningâÂÂUnplug the power cord from the AC outlet before cleaning the product. Use a damp cloth to clean the product. Do not use liquid cleaners or aerosol cleaners. 6. AttachmentsâÂÂDo not use attachments not recommended by the manufacturer . Use of inadequate attachments can result in accidents. 7. W ater and moistureâÂÂDo not use the product near water , such as bathtub, washbasin, kitchen sink and laundry tub, swimming pool and in a wet basement. 8. StandâÂÂDo not place the product on an unstable cart, stand, tripod or table. Placing the product on an unstable base can cause the product to fall, resulting in serious personal injuries as well as damage to the product. Use only a cart, stand, tripod, bracket or table recommended by the manufacturer or sold with the product. When mounting the product on a wall, be sure to follow the manufacturer âÂÂs instructions. Use only the mounting hardware recommended by the manufacturer . 9. When relocating the product placed on a cart, it must be moved with utmost care. Sudden stops, excessive force and uneven floor sur face can cause the product to fall from the cart. 10. V entilationâÂÂThe vents and other openings in the cabinet are designed for ventilation. Do not cover or block these vents and openings since insufficient ventilation can cause overheating and/or shorten the life of the product. Do not place the product on a bed, sofa, rug or other similar sur face, since they can block ventilation openings. This product is not designed for built-in installation; do not place the product in an enclosed place such as a bookcase or rack, unless proper ventilation is provided or the manufacturer âÂÂs instructions are followed. 11. P ower sourceâÂÂThis product must operate on a power source specified on the specification label. If you are not sure of the type of power supply used in your home, consult your dealer or local power company . 12. P ower cord protectionâÂÂThe power cords must be routed properly to prevent people from stepping on them or objects from resting on them. Check the cords at the plugs and product. 13. The plasma Display used in this product is made of glass. Therefore, it can break when the product is dropped or applied with impact. Be careful not to be injured by broken glass pieces in case the plasma Display breaks. 14. OverloadingâÂÂDo not overload AC outlets or extension cords. Overloading can cause fire or electric shock. 15. Entering of objects and liquidsâÂÂNever insert an object into the product through vents or openings. High voltage flows in the product, and inserting an object can cause electric shock and/or short internal parts. F or the same reason, do not spill water or liquid on the product. 16. ServicingâÂÂDo not attempt to ser vice the product yourself . R emoving covers can expose you to high voltage and other dangerous conditions. Request a qualified service person to per form ser vicing. 17. R epairâÂÂIf any of the following conditions occurs, unplug the power cord from the AC outlet, and request a qualified ser vice person to per form repairs. a. When the power cord or plug is damaged. b. When a liquid was spilled on the product or when objects have fallen into the product. c. When the product has been exposed to rain or water . d. When the product does not operate properly as de- scribed in the operating instructions. Do not touch the controls other than those described in the operating instructions. Improper adjustment of controls not described in the instructions can cause damage, which often requires extensive adjustment work by a qualified technician. e. When the product has been dropped or damaged. f. When the product displays an abnormal condition. Any noticeable abnormality in the product indicates that the product needs ser vicing. 18. R eplacement partsâÂÂIn case the product needs replace- ment parts, make sure that the ser vice person uses replacement parts specified by the manufacturer , or those with the same characteristics and per formance as the original parts. Use of unauthorized parts can result in fire, electric shock and/or other danger . 19. Safety checksâÂÂUpon completion of service or repair work, request the ser vice technician to per form safety checks to ensure that the product is in proper operating condition. 20. W all or ceiling mountingâÂÂWhen mounting the product on a wall or ceiling, be sure to install the product according to the method recommended by the manufacturer . 21. Heat sourcesâÂÂKeep the product away from heat sources such as radiators, heaters, stoves and other heat- generat- ing products (including amplifiers). 22. Unplug the power cord from the AC outlet before installing the speakers. 23. Never expose the screen of the Plasma Display to a strong impact, for example, by hitting it. The screen may be broken, resulting in fire or personal injury . 24. Do not expose the Plasma Display to direct sunlight for a long period of time. The optical characteristics of the front protection panel changes, resulting in discoloration or warp. 25. The Plasma Display weighs about 32.8 kg (72.3 lbs.) for the PRO-505PU and about 26.8 kg (59.1 lbs.) for the PRO- 435PU. Because it has small depth and is unstable, unpack, carr y , and install the product with one more person at least and use the handles.
02 Safety Precautions English 9 En ⢠Be sure to use four or more mounting holes symmetrical to the vertical and horizontal median lines. ⢠Use M8 screws, which go 12 to 18 mm (0.5 to 0.7 inches) in depth from the mounting surface of the Plasma Display . See the side view above. ⢠Be careful not to block the ventilation opening at the rear of the Plasma Display . ⢠Be sure to install the Plasma Display on a flat surface because it contains glass. ⢠The screw holes other than the above are to be used only for the specified products. Never use them for mounting non-specified products. ⢠Do not mount or remove the Plasma Display to or from the stand, with speakers attached. ⢠It is strongly recommended to use the optional PIONEER mounting products. ⢠PIONEER shall not be liable for any personal injury or product damage that results from the use of mounting items other than the optional PIONEER products. Installation Pr ecautions Obser ve the following precautions when installing with any items such as the optional stand. When using the optional stand, brack ets, or equivalent items ⢠Ask your dealer to perform the installation. ⢠Be sure to use the supplied bolts. â¢F or details, see the instruction manual that comes with the optional stand (or equivalent items). When using other items ⢠Consult your dealer . ⢠The following six mounting holes can be used for the installation: Median line Mounting hole Mounting hole R ear view Median line Side view Plasma Display Mounting sur face 12 to 18 mm (0.5 to 0.7 inches) M8 screw Mounting bracket (or equivalent item)
03 Operational Precautions 10 En PIONEER bears no responsibility for any damages arising from incorrect use of the product by you or other people, malfunctions when in use, other product related problems, and use of the product except in cases where the company must be liable. Plasma Display protection function When still images (such as photos and computer images) stay on the screen for an extended period of time, the screen will be slightly dimmed. This is because the protection function of the Plasma Display automatically adjusts the brightness to protect the screen when detecting still images; so this does not designate malfunction. The screen is dimmed when a still image is detected for about three minutes. Infrared rays The Plasma Display releases infrared rays because of its characteristics. Depending on how the Plasma Display is in use, the remote controls of nearby equipment may be adversely affected or wireless headphones using infrared rays are inter fered by noise. If this is the case, place that equipment at a location where its remote control sensor is not affected. R adio interfer ence While this product meets the required specifications, it emits a small amount of noise. If you place such equipment as an AM radio, personal computer , and VCR close to this product, that equipment may be interfered. If this happens, place that equipment far enough from this product. F an motor noise When ambient temperature of the Media Receiver becomes high, the rotation speed of the cooling fan motor increases. This may make you feel that the fan motor is noisy at such an occasion. The fan motor keeps running until the power cord of the Media R eceiver is removed from a wall outlet. Do not attach such items as labels and tape to the product. ⢠This may result in the discoloration or scratch of the cabinet. When not using the product for a long period of time ⢠If you do not use the product for a long period of time, the functions of the product may be adversely affected. Switch on and run the product occasionally . Condensation ⢠Condensation may take place on the surface or inside of the product when the product is rapidly moved from a cold place to a warm place or just after a heater is switched on in winter morning, for example. When condensation takes place, do not switch on the product and wait until condensation disappears. Using the product with condensation may result in malfunction. Cleaning the screen ⢠When cleaning the screen of this product, gently wipe it with a soft dr y cloth; the supplied cleaning cloth or other similar cloths (e.g., cotton and flannel). If you use a hard cloth or rub the screen hard, the surface of the screen will be scratched. ⢠If you clean the surface of the screen with a wet cloth, water droplets on the surface may enter into the product, resulting in malfunction. Cleaning the cabinet ⢠When cleaning the cabinet of this product, gently wipe it with a soft dr y cloth; the supplied cleaning cloth or other similar cloths (e.g., cotton and flannel). If you use a hard cloth or rub the cabinet hard, the surface of the cabinet will be scratched. ⢠The cabinet of this product is mostly composed of plastic. Do not use chemicals such as benzine or thinner to clean the cabinet. Using these chemicals may result in quality deterio- ration or coating removal. ⢠Do not expose the product to volatile gas or fluid such as pesticide. Do not make the product contact with rubber or vinyl products for a long period of time. The effect of plasticizer in the plastic may result in quality deterioration or coating removal. ⢠If you clean the surface of the cabinet with a wet cloth, water droplets on the surface may enter into the product, resulting in malfunction. Handles at the rear of the Plasma Display ⢠Do not remove the handles from the rear of the Plasma Display . ⢠When moving the Plasma Display , ask another person for help and use the handles attached to the rear of the Plasma Display . Do not move the Plasma Display by holding only a single handle. Use the handles as shown. ⢠Do not use the handles to hang the product when installing or carr ying the product, for example. Do not use the handles for the purpose of preventing the product from tilting over .
04 Supplied Accessories English 11 En Plasma Display Media Receiver Operating Instructions ⢠Always use the power cord supplied with the Plasma Display and the one supplied with the Media Receiver for each respective unit. P ower cord (2 m/6.6 feet) Cleaning cloth Speed clamp à3 Bead band à3 W arranty card P ower cord (2 m/6.6 feet) R emote control unit System cable (3 m/9.8 feet) AA size batter y à2 (Alkaline batter y) Stand Screw à4 (for stand) Screw hole cap à4 VCR controller (1.8 m/5.9 feet) Instruction guide
05 Part Names 12 En Plasma Display 1 button 2 ST ANDBY indicator Lights red when the unit is standby mode. (page 24) 3 POWER ON indicator Lights green when the Plasma Display is operating. (page 24) 4 R emote control sensor 5S T ANDBY/ON button 6 INPUT button 7 VOLUME / â buttons 8 CHANNEL / â buttons 4 5 6 7 8 (right view) R ear view Fr ont view 9 SYSTEM CABLE terminal (BLACK) 10 SYSTEM CABLE terminal (WHITE) 11 SPEAKER (right/left) terminals 12 AC INLET terminal The terminals have faced downward. Media Receiver Fr ont view POWER ON STANDBY REC TIMER DATA ACQUISITION COMPONENT VIDEO Y S - VIDEO VIDEO AUDIO PC INPUT 4 ANALOG RGB AUDIO ( STEREO ) LR C B /P B C R /P R 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 P ull this section to open the door . 1 POWER button 2 POWER ON indicator 3 ST ANDBY indicator 4 REC TIMER indicator 5 DA T A ACQUISITION indicator 6 INPUT 4 terminals (COMPONENT VIDEO: Y , C B /PB , CR /PR ) 7 INPUT 4 terminal (S- VIDEO) 8 INPUT 4 terminal (VIDEO) 9 INPUT 4 terminals (AUDIO) 10 PC INPUT terminal (AUDIO) 11 PC INPUT terminal (ANAL OG RGB) 9 10 11 12
05 Part Names English 13 En R ear view 1 CONTROL IN terminal 2 CONTROL OUT terminal 3 VCR CONTROL terminal 4 ANTENNA B IN terminal 5 ANTENNA/CABLE A IN terminal 6 INPUT 2 terminal (VIDEO) 7 INPUT 2 terminals (A UDIO) 8 i.LINK terminals 9 Cable CARD slot 10 INPUT 1 terminals (A UDIO) 11 DIGIT AL OUT terminal (OPTICAL) 12 INPUT 1 terminals (COMPONENT VIDEO: Y , C B /PB , CR /PR ) 13 AC IN terminal 14 RS-232C terminal (used for factor y setup) 15 ANTENNA B OUT terminal 16 INPUT 2 terminal (S- VIDEO) 17 MONITOR OUT terminal (S- VIDEO) 18 MONITOR OUT terminal (VIDEO) 19 MONITOR OUT terminals (A UDIO) 20 INPUT 1 terminal (VIDEO) 21 INPUT 1 terminal (S- VIDEO) 22 INPUT 3 terminals (AUDIO) 23 INPUT 3 terminals (COMPONENT VIDEO: Y , C B /PB , CR /PR ) 24 HDMI terminals (INPUT1/INPUT3) 25 SYSTEM CABLE terminal (WHITE) 26 SYSTEM CABLE terminal (BLACK) MONITOR OUT INPUT 1 INPUT 2 VCR CONTROL INPUT 3 ANTENNA B CONTROL IN OUT S-VIDEO S-VIDEO VIDEO VIDEO R-AUDIO-L R-AUDIO-L COMPONENT VIDEO Y Y C B /P B C B /P B C R /P R C R /P R S-VIDEO R-AUDIO-L R-AUDIO-L VIDEO S400 INPUT 1 INPUT 3 HDMI DIGIT AL OUT OPTICAL SERVICE ONL Y AC IN BLACK WHITE SYSTEM CABLE ANTENNA/ CABLE A IN INPUT 2 INPUT 1 IN OUT Cable CARD Cable CARD (TS) INPUT 3 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 9 10 11 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 25 26 24 12 8
05 Part Names 14 En Remote control unit With the mode switch set to TV 1 TV : T urns on the power to the Plasma Display or places it into standby mode. 2 T ransmission confirmation LED 3 INP UT : Selects an input source of the Plasma Display . (INPUT 1, INPUT 2, INPUT 3, INPUT 4, PC, i.LINK) 4 â¢(dot) : Enters a dot. 5 CH RETURN : Returns to the previous chan- nel. Mode switch (with âÂÂT Vâ selected) 6 CH /â : Selects the channel. 7 RETURN : Returns to the previous menu screen. 8 / / / : Selects a desired item on the menu screen. 9 DTV INFO : Shows more information on DTV programs. 10 SPLIT : Switches the screen mode among 2- screen, picture-in-picture, and single-screen . 11 FREEZE : F reezes a frame from a moving image. P ress again to cancel the function. 12 SWAP : Switches between the two screens when in the 2-screen or picture-in-picture mode. 13 SHIFT : Moves the location of the small screen when in the picture-in-picture mode. 14 : When pressed, all buttons on the remote control unit will light. The lighting will turn off if no operations are performed within about 5 seconds. This button is used for per forming operations in dark places. 15 ANT : Selects the antenna (A, B). See pages 21 and 22 for details. 16 MTS : Selects the MTS/SAP . 17 0 â 9 : Selects the channel. 18 CH ENTER : Executes a channel number . 19 VOL /â : Sets the volume. 20 MUTING : Mutes the sound. 21 HOME MENU : Displays the menu screen . 22 ENTER : Executes a command. 23 F A VORITE CH (A, B, C, D ): Selects any of the four preset channels. See page 37 for details to set the F A VORITE CH . While watching, you can toggle the set chan- nels by pressing A , B , C and D . 24 SCREEN SIZE : Selects the screen size. 25 DISPLA Y : Displays the channel information . 26 A V SELECTION : Selects audio and video settings. (A V mode: ST ANDARD, DYNAMIC, MOVIE, GAME, USER . PC mode: ST ANDARD, USER .) 27 SLEEP : Sets the sleep timer . ⢠When using the remote control unit, point it at the Plasma Display . ⢠See pages 62 to 68 for operating buttons not listed on this page. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 13 12 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
06 Pr eparation English 15 En Installing the Plasma Display L ocating ⢠Avoid direct sunlight. Maintain adequate ventilation . ⢠The length of the system cable used to connect the Plasma Display and the Media Receiver is about 3 m (9.8 feet). ⢠Because the Plasma Display is heavy , be sure to have someone help you when moving it. ⢠If you place anything on the top of the Media R eceiver it will not receive enough ventilation and will not operate properly . ⢠Allow enough space around the upper and back parts when installing to ensure ventilation around the backside. Using the optional PIONEER stand F or details on installation, refer to the instruction manual supplied with the stand. ⢠This product may be used only with model PDK -1012 stand. Use with other stands may result in instability causing possible injur y . Using the optional PIONEER speakers F or details on installation, refer to the instruction manual supplied with the speaker . Operating Envir onment Operating environment temperature and humidity : 0ðC to 40ðC ( 32ðF to 104ðF); less than 85% RH (cooling vents not blocked) Avoid installing at the following locations: ⢠Under direct exposure to sunlight ⢠Under strong artificial light ⢠In high humidity â¢P oorly ventilated Over 50 cm (19 11 / 16 inches) Over 10 cm (3 15 / 16 inches )
06 Pr eparation 16 En Right side Installing the Media Receiver vertically Y ou can use the supplied stand to install the Media Receiver vertically . 1. Insert the stand into the side of the Media R eceiver . 2. Secure the stand with the supplied scr ews. Screws POWER ON STANDBY REC TIMER DATA ACQUISITION POWER ON STANDBY REC TIMER DATA ACQUISITION Installing the Media Receiver POWER ON STANDBY REC TIMER DATA ACQUISITION Plasma Display Media Receiver (vertical installation) (horizontal installation) System cable (approx. 3 m/9.8 feet) ⢠Do not place a VCR or any other device on the top of the Media Receiver . ⢠When installing, allow enough space on the sides and above the Media Receiver . ⢠Do not block the side cooling vents or the r ear ventila- tion fan opening of the Media Receiver . Over 10 cm (3 15 /16 inches) Over 5 cm (2 inches) Over 5 cm (2 inches) POWER ON STANDBY REC TIMER DATA ACQUISITION Over 5 cm (2 inches) Over 5 cm (2 inches) Over 5 cm (2 inches) Over 5 cm (2 inches) Over 10 cm (3 15 /16 inches)
06 Pr eparation English 17 En Shock absorbing pad 3. Remove the shock absorbing pads. Keep the shock absorbing pads and screws. They are required when you place the Media Receiver in the horizontal position . 4. Plug the screw holes using the supplied caps. ⢠When you have installed the Media R eceiver vertically , be sure to use the supplied stand. If you place the unit directly on the floor , the cooling vents will be blocked, r esulting in mechanical failur e. R emove the separation sheet. Screw hole cap Align with the hole and attach.
06 Pr eparation 18 En BLACK WHITE SYSTEM CABLE MONITOR OUT VCR CONTROL Cable CARD ANTENNA/ CABLE A IN ANTENNA B CONTROL IN OUT S-VIDEO INPUT 2 INPUT 3 S-VIDEO VIDEO VIDEO R-AUDIO-L R-AUDIO-L COMPONENT VIDEO Y Y C B /P B C B /P B C R /P R C R /P R S-VIDEO R-AUDIO-L R-AUDIO-L VIDEO S400 INPUT 1 INPUT 3 HDMI DIGITAL OUT OPTICAL SERVICE ONL Y AC IN INPUT 3 INPUT 1 IN OUT Cable CARD (TS) Connecting the system cable Connecting the system cable to the Plasma Display ⢠THESE SPEAKER TERMINALS CAN BE APPLIED WITH HAZARDOUS VOL T AGE WHEN YOU CONNECT OR DIS- CONNECT THE SPEAKER CABLES. TO PREVENT THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT TOUCH UNINSULA TED P ARTS BEFORE DISCONNECTING THE POWER CORD. Connecting the system cable to the Media R eceiver F or details on optional PIONEER speaker installation, refer to the instruction manual that came with the speaker . Plasma Display (rear view) (WHITE) (BLACK) System cable Media Receiver (r ear view) (WHITE) (BLACK)
06 Pr eparation English 19 En Routing cables Speed clamps and bead bands are supplied for bunching cables. Once properly bunched, follow the steps below to route the cables. When the speakers ar e installed on the sides (rear view) Speaker cable A ttaching speed clamps to the main unit Attach the speed clamps using the 4 holes marked with below , depending on your routing system. A ttaching and r emoving speed clamps Insert [1] into an appropriate hole on the rear of the Plasma Display and snap [2] into the back of [1] to lock the clamp. Speed clamps are designed to be difficult to undo once in place. Please attach them carefully . Use pliers to twist the clamp 90ð, pulling outward. The clamp may deteriorate over time and become damaged if removed. 2 1 Speaker cable Speed clamps Cable binders (supplied with the stand)* * Cable binder Using the cable binders supplied with the stand, put the speaker and system cables together so that the cables are invisible from the front. At that time be careful not to apply any force to the connection sections of the cables.
06 Pr eparation 20 En Preparing the r emote control unit Inserting batteries 1 Open the batter y cover . 2 Insert the supplied two AA size batteries. ⢠The battery polarities must correspond with the ( ) and (âÂÂ) indicators in the batter y compartment. 3 Close the batter y cover . Cautions regar ding batteries ⢠The remote control unit cannot operate the system if the batteries in the unit are empty . When this happens, replace the batteries with new ones. ⢠Do not use manganese batteries. When you replace the batteries, use alkaline ones. ⢠Do not mix batteries of different types. Different types of batteries have different characteristics. ⢠Do not mix old and new batteries. Mixing old and new batteries can shorten the life of new batteries or cause chemical leakage in old batteries. ⢠Do not leave dead batteries in the remote control unit; chemical leakage will occur . If you find any chemical leakage, wipe thoroughly with a cloth. ⢠The batteries supplied with this product may have a shorter life expectancy due to storage conditions. ⢠If you will not use the remote control unit for an extended period of time, remove the batteries from it. ⢠WHEN DISPOSING OF USED BA TTERIES, BE SURE TO COMPL Y WITH GOVERNMENT REGULA TIONS AND ENVIRONMENT AL PROTECTION GUIDELINES THA T APPL Y IN Y OUR COUNTRY OR AREA. Allowed operation range of the remote contr ol unit Operate the remote control unit while pointing it toward the remote control sensor located at the bottom right of the front panel of the Plasma Display . The distance from the remote control sensor must be within 7 m (23 feet) and the angle relative to the sensor must be within 30 degrees in the right or left direction. 30 ð Remote control sensor 7 m (23 feet) 30 ð Cautions regar ding the remote control unit ⢠Do not expose the remote control unit to shock, liquid, or high humidity . ⢠Do not place the remote control unit under direct sunlight; the unit may deform. ⢠The remote control unit may not work properly if the remote sensor window of the Plasma Display is under direct sunlight or strong lighting. In such case, change the angle of the lighting or Plasma Display , or operate the remote control unit closer to the remote sensor window . ⢠When any obstacle exists between the remote control unit and the remote control sensor , the remote control unit may not function. ⢠As the batteries become empty , the remote control unit can function within a shorter distance from the remote control sensor . Replace the batteries with new ones if necessary . ⢠The Plasma Display emits very weak infrared rays from its screen. If you place such equipment operated through infrared remote control as a VCR nearby , that equipment may not receive commands from its remote control unit properly or entirely . If this is the case, place that equipment at a location far enough from the Plasma Display . ⢠Depending on the installation environment, infrared rays from the Plasma Display may not allow this system to properly receive commands from the remote control unit or may shorten allowable distances between the remote control unit and the remote control sensor . The strength of infrared rays emitted from the screen differs, depending on images displayed on the screen.
06 Pr eparation English 21 En Cable connections for watching digital and/or conventional TV channels This system is equipped with two terminals for inputting TV broadcasting signals: ANTENNA/CABLE A IN and ANTENNA B. The ANTENNA/CABLE A IN terminal accepts both digital and conventional TV broadcasting signals while the ANTENNA B terminal accepts only conventional TV broadcasting signals. When using a cable TV to watch digital and/or conventional TV channels, connect to the ANTENNA/CABLE A IN terminal as shown. In addition , you may connect an antenna to the ANTENNA B terminal as shown; use an outdoor antenna to enjoy clearer pictures. If your outdoor uses a 75-ohm coaxial cable with an F-type connector , plug it into the antenna terminal at the rear of the Media Receiver . Connecting VHF/UHF antennas and a Cable Converter ⢠Be sure to connect coaxial cables as shown above. Signal reception may fail if not properly connected. ANTENNA B IN OUT ANTENNA/ CABLE A IN Media Receiver (r ear) Cable TV Cable Converter Cable connections for watching digital TV channels over air (VHF/UHF) If using VHF and UHF antennas to watch digital TV channels, connect the coaxial cables as shown. Connecting VHF/UHF antennas ANTENNA B IN OUT ANTENNA/ CABLE A IN VHF antenna UHF antenna U/V mixer Media Receiver (rear) Media Receiver (r ear) ⢠Be sure to connect coaxial cables as shown above. Signal reception may fail if not properly connected. Splitter Splitter
06 Pr eparation 22 En Switching between antenna A and B To watch broadcasts via the two antennas, you can select it by pressing ANT on the remote control unit. ⢠While watching a broadcast, press ANT to view the image received from the other antenna. â¢P ressing ANT while watching in the 2-screen mode (TV image and video image) with TV selected will display the TV image of the other antenna. â¢P ressing ANT while watching in the 2-screen mode with two TV images displayed will not have any effect. â¢P ressing ANT while watching in the 2-screen mode with two video images displayed will switch the selected screen to a TV image. Inserting the cable card The Media Receiver is equipped with a slot for inserting a cable card. When you are watching digital and/or High Definition TV channels over cable, the card allows you to use the POD ser vice provided by the cable TV company ; the POD stands for P oint of Deployment. This ser vice presents various types of useful information, using HTML text. 1 Confirm that the ANTENNA/CABLE A IN terminal has been connected with the coaxial cable from the Cable Converter . See page 21. 2 Hold the tab of the slot cover on the rear of the Media R eceiver , and remove the cover while releasing the tabâÂÂs latch. Cable CARD A UDIO-L COMPONENT VIDEO Y C B /P B C R / P R C R /P R R-AUDIO-L VIDEO S400 INPUT 1 DIGIT AL OUT OPTICAL (TS) INPUT 1 Ta b 3 Insert the specified cable card into the Cable CARD slot as far as it goes. Cable CARD INPUT 3 ANTENNA/ CABLE A IN VI DEO VIDEO R-AUDIO-L R-AUDIO-L COMPONENT VIDEO Y Y C B /P B C B /P B C R /P R C R /P R S-VIDEO R-AUDIO-L R-AUDIO-L VIDEO S400 INPUT 1 H DIGIT AL OUT OPTICAL (TS) N PUT 2 ⢠Be sure to insert only the specified cable card. ⢠Do not insert a PCMCIA card.
06 Pr eparation English 23 En P ower cord P ower cord ⢠Use only the supplied power cor d. ⢠Be sur e to use the specified power supply voltage; neglecting this can result in fir e or electric shock. â¢F or the Plasma Display System, a three-core power cor d with a ground ter minal is used for efficiency protection. Always connect the power cord to a thr ee-pronged outlet and make sur e that the cord is pr operly grounded. ⢠Always turn off the power of the Plasma Display and Media R eceiver when connecting the power cords. ⢠Disconnect the power cord from the power outlet when the Plasma Display System is not going to be used for a long period of time. ANTENNA/ CABLE A IN MONITOR OUT INPUT 2 VCR CONTROL INPUT 3 ANTENNA B CONTROL IN OUT S-VIDEO S-VIDEO VIDEO VIDEO R-AUDIO-L R-AUDIO-L COMPONENT VIDEO Y Y C B /PB C B /P B C R /P R C R /P R S-VIDEO R-AUDIO-L R-AUDIO-L VIDEO INPUT 1 INPUT 3 HDMI DIGITAL OUT OPTICAL SERVICE ONLY AC INLET BLACK WHITE SYSTEM CABLE AC IN INPUT 2 INPUT 3 INPUT 3 INPUT 1 Cable CARD S400 Cable CARD (TS) IN OUT AC IN Connecting the power cord Connect the power cord after all component connections have been completed. Plasma Display (rear view) Media Receiver (r ear view) Noise filter P artially eliminates noise caused by the power source. Noise filter P artially eliminates noise caused by the power source.
07 Basic Operations 24 En Plasma Display POWER ON indicator button ST ANDBY indicator Media Receiver POWER ON indicator POWER button ST ANDBY/ ON button POWER ON STANDBY REC TIMER DATA ACQUISITION ST ANDBY indicator (right view) Tu r ning on the power (Standby) 1 P ress on the Plasma Display if the ST ANDBY indicator is off . ⢠The ST ANDBY indicator on the Plasma Display lights up red. 2 Confirm that the ST ANDBY indicators light up red, and then press TV on the remote control unit or ST ANDBY/ON on the Plasma Display or POWER on the Media R eceiver to turn the system on. ⢠The POWER ON indicators on the Plasma Display and Media R eceiver light up green. ⢠In this manual, âÂÂsystemâ means the Plasma Display P anel and Media R eceiver . Tu r ning off the power (Standby) 1 P ress TV on the remote control unit or ST ANDBY/ON on the Plasma Display or POWER on the Media R eceiver . ⢠The system enters the standby mode and the image on the screen disappears. ⢠Both ST ANDBY indicators light up red. ⢠It is recommended to place the system into the standby mode by pressing TV on the remote control unit. This allows the system to automatically receive digital TV program information in the standby mode. ⢠If you are not going to use this system for a long period of time, press on the Plasma Display and remove the power cord from the power outlet. Plasma Display/Media Receiver status indicators Indicat or Status Sy stem St atus Plasma Displa y Media R eceiver PO WER ON S T ANDB Y PO WER ON S T ANDB Y Po w er to the Pla sma Displa y and Media Receiv er is off. Or the pow er cords ha ve been disconnect ed. Po w er to the s yst em is on. The s yst em is in the standb y mode. The pow er cord has been disconnect ed from the Media R eceiver . Po w er to the Pla sma Displa y is off. Or the po wer cord ha s been disconnect ed from the Pla sma Display . F or other than the above, see âÂÂT roubleshootingâ on page 69. Flashing Flashing
07 Basic Operations English 25 En Plasma Display (right view) Channel banner DTV 2 ⢠1002.102 A XXXXXXXXXX 12:30pm â 2:00pm 12:33pm CHANNEL /â W atching TV channels Unless you set up TV channels that you can watch under the current conditions, you cannot tune in those channels. F or the procedure, see âÂÂSetting up TV channelsâ on page 31. ⢠When watching a digital TV program, you may see emergency alert messages scrolling at the top of the screen. Those messages are broadcasted by TV stations as necessar y when in emergency situations. Selecting the antenna After confirming that the Mode switch on the remote control unit has been set to âÂÂTV âÂÂ, press ANT on the remote control unit to select antenna A or B. ⢠Make this selection depending on the connections to the antenna input terminals on the Media Receiver (page 21). Changing channels To increase the channel number , press CH on the remote control unit. T o decrease the channel number , press CH âÂÂ. ⢠CHANNEL /â on the Plasma Display operates the same as CH /â on the remote control unit. â¢P ress CH RETURN to switch the currently tuned channel to the previously tuned channel. P ress CH RETURN again to restore the currently tuned channel. Using 0 â 9 and ⢠(dot) on the r emote control unit Select channels directly by pressing buttons 0 to 9. T o select subchannels, also use the ⢠(dot) button. EXAMPLE â¢T o select channel 5 (1-digit channel), press 5 . â¢T o select channel 25 (2-digit channel), press 2 then 5 . â¢T o select channel 125 (3-digit channel), press 1 , 2, then 5 . â¢T o select subchannel 10.01, press 1 , 0, ⢠(dot), 0, then 1 . â¢T o select subchannel 10.001 (for the cable TV), press 1 , 0 , ⢠(dot), 0 , 0, then 1 . â¢A f ter entering a channel or subchannel number , you may press CH ENTER to tune in the channel more quickly . ⢠Each time you change a channel, such a channel banner appears that shows information about the currently selected channel. T o clear the channel banner , press DTV INFO. F or more information about the channel banner , see âÂÂViewing a channel banner â on page 26.
07 Basic Operations 26 En Changing the volume and sound To increase the volume, press VOL on the remote control unit. T o decrease the volume, press VOL â . ⢠VOL UME /â on the Plasma Display operates the same as VOL /â on the remote control unit. â¢T o mute the sound output, press MUTING. â â appears on the screen. T o quit muting, press MUTING again. P ressing VOL also quits muting. Plasma Display (right view) V olume adjustment Muting V iewing a channel banner While watching a digital TV program, pressing DTV INFO causes the following banner to appear . P ressing DTV INFO again causes the banner to disappear . 12:30pm â 2:00pm WXCD ⢠1000 Ant. A XXXXXXXXXX ******************************************************** ********************************************* ****************************************** 12:33pm 1 2 3 5 6 7 4 1 Station name 2 Current time 3 Channel number 4 Input (Ant. A or Ant. B) 5 P rogram time schedule 6 P rogram title 7 TV rating and program description (This may be unavailable for some programs.) ⢠The above information is not displayed if not included in broadcast signals. ⢠If â â is shown at the bottom right of the channel banner containing program description, press / to scroll the program description. VOLUME /âÂÂ
07 Basic Operations English 27 En Setting MTS/SAP mode When watching conventional TV programs, you may enjoy stereo sound and/or Secondar y Audio P rograms (SAP), using the Multi-channel T elevision Sound (MTS) function. ⢠Ster eo broadcasts Y ou can enjoy , for example, sports, shows, and concerts in dynamic stereo sound. ⢠SAP br oadcasts MAIN sound: The normal program soundtrack (either in mono or stereo). SAP sound: Listen to second language, supplementar y commentar y and other information. (SAP is mono sound.) ⢠Conventional TV channels in this manual designate TV channels that are received through the conventional VHF/UHF frequencies or conventional cable TV channels. ⢠When stereo sound is difficult to hear , you may manually switch to the MONO mode to obtain clearer sound. ⢠Once the MONO mode is selected, the Plasma Display System sound remains mono even if the system receives a stereo broadcast. Y ou must reselect the STEREO mode if you want to hear stereo sound again. ⢠Selecting MTS while the input source is INPUT 1 to 4 or PC does not change the type of sound. In this case, sound is determined by the video source. Each time you press MTS, MTS toggles as shown below . STEREO STEREO mode SAP SAP mode MONO MONO mode ⢠In each of the MTS/SAP modes selected using the MTS button , the display changes depending on broadcasting signals being received. Using the POD service If you have watched digital and/or High Definition TV channels over cable, you can use the POD ser vice provided by the cable TV company . This ser vice presents various types of useful information, using HTML text. P ress HOME MENU, 9, 9 , then 9 to view the POD display . ⢠If you have enabled data acquisition using the menu, POD information is automatically acquired even when the system is in the standby mode. See page 32. Changing the language If you have selected a digital TV program that provides multi- language ser vices, you can switch among the languages by pressing MTS on the remote control unit. Each time you press MTS, the language switches. ⢠Switchable languages differ depending on the current broadcast. ⢠If the language selected through language setting is available when the channel or program is changed, you will hear that language.
07 Basic Operations 28 En Using the multiscreen functions Splitting the screen Use the following procedure to select the 2-screen or picture-in- picture mode. 2-screen P icture-in-picture 1 P ress SPLIT to select the display mode. ⢠Each time you press SPLIT , the display mode is switched among 2-screen, picture-in-picture, and single-screen. When receiving STEREO sound signals A 125 STEREO In STEREO mode In SAP mode In MONO mode A 125 STEREO A 125 MONO When receiving MAIN SAP sound signals In STEREO mode In SAP mode In MONO mode A 125 MAIN (SAP) A 125 SAP (MAIN) A 125 MONO (SAP) When receiving STEREO SAP sound signals In STEREO mode In SAP mode In MONO mode A 125 STEREO (SAP) A 125 SAP (STEREO) A 125 MONO (SAP) When receiving MONO sound signals In STEREO mode In SAP mode In MONO mode A 125 MONO A 125 MONO A 125 MONO
07 Basic Operations English 29 En â¢I n 2-screen or picture-in-picture mode, press SW AP to switch the position of the 2 screens shown . Left screen is the active screen which will be indicated by â âÂÂ. The user is allowed to operate picture and sound. ⢠In 2-screen mode, press S CREEN SIZE to change the size of the left screen. â¢I n picture-in-picture mode, press SHIFT to move the position of the small screen in anti-clockwise. 2 To select the desired input source, press the appropriate input source button. ⢠If watching TV programs, press CH / â to change the channel. ⢠The multiscreen function cannot display images from the same input source at the same time. If you make such an attempt, a warning message appears. ⢠When you press HOME MENU or DTV INFO, the single-screen mode is restored and the corresponding menu is displayed. ⢠When the two screens show the same analog broadcasting coming through antenna A and B, the picture quality may differ between the two screens. Freezing images Use the following procedure to capture and freeze one frame from a moving image that you are watching. Normal image Still image 1 P ress FREEZE. â¢A still image appears on the right screen while a moving image is shown on the left screen. 2 P ress FREEZE again to cancel the function. â¢W ith the screen split, any image cannot be frozen. ⢠When this function is not available, a warning message appears.
08 Menu Setup 30 En Menu operations The following describes the typical procedure for setting up the menus. F or the actual procedures, see the appropriate pages that describe individual functions. 1 P ress HOME MENU. 2 P ress / to select a menu item, and then press ENTER. 3 R epeat step 2 until you access the desired submenu item. ⢠The number of menu layers differs depending on menu items. ⢠If you select âÂÂT uner Setupâ or âÂÂTimersâ , a menu bar appears at the bottom of the screen. T o select a submenu item on the bar , press / instead of / . 4 P ress / to select an option (or parameter), and then press ENTER . â¢F or some menu items, press / instead of / . 5 P ress HOME MENU to exit the menu. â¢Y ou can return to the upper menu levels by pressing RETURN . PC mode menus Menu configuration AV mode menus Home Menu It em P age Picture AV Selection 4 0 Contr ast 4 1 Brightness 4 1 Color 4 1 T int 4 1 Sharpness 4 1 Pro A djust 4 1 Res et 4 1 Sound Tr eble 4 3 Bass 4 3 Balance 4 3 Res et 4 3 F OCUS 4 3 Fr ont Surr ound 4 3 Po w er Contr ol Ener gy Sa ve 4 4 No Signal off 4 4 No Oper ation off 4 4 Sleep T imer âÂÂ4 0 Option P osition 4 5 Side Mask 4 7 HDMI Input 5 1, 5 2 Monit or Out 5 2, 5 3 Digital Audio Out 5 4 Language 4 7 T uner Setup Channel Setup 3 1, 3 2 Pa r ental Contr ol 3 3âÂÂ3 7 Fa v orites 3 7 Closed Captions 3 7âÂÂ3 9 R ecor der Setup 5 6âÂÂ5 7 Clock 3 9 Home Menu It em P age Picture AV Selection 4 0 Contr ast 4 1 Brightness 4 1 Red 4 1 Gr een 4 1 Blue 4 1 Res et 4 1 Sound Tr eble 4 3 Bass 4 3 Balance 4 3 Res et 4 3 F OCUS 4 3 Fr ont Surr ound 4 3 Po w er Contr ol Ener gy Sa ve 4 4 Po w er Management 44 Sleep T imer âÂÂ4 0 Option Aut o Setup 4 5 Manual Setup 4 5 T imers âÂÂ4 8, 4 9
09 T uner Setup English 31 En Setting up TV channels This section describes how to search and set up TV channels that you can watch under the current conditions. Unless you set up TV channels using Auto Channel P reset, you may not be able to tune in those channels. Using Auto Channel Preset Auto Channel P reset automatically searches and sets up TV channels. 1 P ress HOME MENU. 2 Select âÂÂT uner SetupâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER ) 3 Select âÂÂChannel SetupâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER) 4 Select â Ant. A â or â Ant. BâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER) 5 Select â Auto Channel PresetâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER ) 6 Select â Air â or âÂÂCableâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER ) Channel Setup Begin Preset Cancel Exit Ant. A Auto Ch. Preset Cable Air Cable Ant. A Auto Channel Preset 2.0 4.0 6.0 xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx Enter Home Menu D ⢠Channel search automatically starts. Channel Setup Cancel Exit Ant. A Auto Ch. Preset Cable Ant. A Auto Channel Preset ⢠Cable One Moment Please ⦠xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx Home Menu D â¢T o quit Auto Channel P reset half way , press D . 7 After Auto Channel Preset has been finished, press HOME MENU to exit the menu. ⢠When using the Cable Converter , you may need to manually add Cable Converter output channels. Setting for skipping unwanted channels F rom among TV channels searched and set up using Auto Channel P reset, you can select channels to be skipped when CH / â are operated. 1 P ress HOME MENU. 2 Select âÂÂT uner SetupâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER ) 3 Select âÂÂChannel SetupâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER) 4 Select â Ant. A â or â Ant. BâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER) 5 Select âÂÂChannel Keep/SkipâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER ) 6 Select a channel to be skipped. ( / then ENTER) Channel Setup Ant. A Channel Keep/Skip Ant. A Channel Keep/Skip 2.0 4.0 6.0 xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx Exit Home Menu â¢F or the skipped channel, a check mark disappears. 7 P ress HOME MENU to exit the menu. â¢T o restore skipped channels, use the above procedure except that you select a skipped channel in step 6. ⢠When using the Cable Converter , you may need to manually add Cable Converter output channels. Setting up TV channels manually This section describes how to manually set up TV channels that have not been set up by Auto Channel P reset. 1 P ress HOME MENU. 2 Select âÂÂT uner SetupâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER ) 3 Select âÂÂChannel SetupâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER) 4 Select â Ant. A â or â Ant. BâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER) 5 Select â Add ChannelâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER) 6 Select a channel number to be added. ( / then ENTER) â¢Y ou can also use buttons 0 â 9 to enter a channel number . Channel Setup Ant. A Add Channel 0000.000 Ant. A Add Channel xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx 1 Exit Home Menu â¢A f ter ENTER has been pressed, a confirmation screen appears. 7 P ress A to complete the setup processing. 8 P ress HOME MENU to exit the menu.
09 T uner Setup 32 En Naming TV channels Y ou can name TV channels that you have set up for antenna B. This may help you easily identify the channels during selections. 1 P ress HOME MENU. 2 Select âÂÂT uner SetupâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER ) 3 Select âÂÂChannel SetupâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER) 4 Select â Ant. BâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER) 5 Select âÂÂName ChannelâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER ) 6 Select a channel. ( / then ENTER) â¢Y ou can also use buttons 0 â 9 to enter a channel number . Channel Setup Ant. B Name Channel Ant. B Name Channel xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx Exit Home Menu 7 Enter up to 7 alphanumeric characters using / , / , and ENTER. â¢T o clear the last character , press B . Channel Setup Cancel Ant. B Name Channel A BCDE FGH I J KL M N O P Q R ST UV W X Y Z 1 2 3 4 56 78 90 . @ / ( ), â _ : ' & SP ACE Name: DTV2 Ant. B Name Channel xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx Clear Accept Exit Home Menu D B A 8 P ress A. 9 P ress HOME MENU to exit the menu. Checking signal strength When you have selected antenna A, you can check the current channelâÂÂs signal strength. Y ou may use this function when receiving a channel through a VHF/UHF antenna. 1 P ress HOME MENU. 2 Select âÂÂT uner SetupâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER ) 3 Select âÂÂChannel SetupâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER) 4 Select â Ant. A âÂÂ. ( / then ENTER) 5 Select âÂÂSignal StrengthâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER) Channel Setup Exit Ant. A Signal Strength Ant. A Current: 100 Maximum: 100 xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx Home Menu Signal Strength ⢠Adjust the direction of the antenna so that the current signal strength reaches as close to the maximum signal strength as possible. 6 P ress HOME MENU to exit the menu. Checking the Cable Card ID The Media Receiver has a slot for a cable card that is used for managing your information by the cable TV company . The following procedure allows you to check your Cable Card ID and the Host ID. 1 P ress HOME MENU. 2 Select âÂÂT uner SetupâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER ) 3 Select âÂÂChannel SetupâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER) 4 Select âÂÂPOD IDâÂÂ. ( / ) ⢠The Host ID and Cable Card ID appear . 5 P ress HOME MENU to exit the menu. Enabling data acquisition Use this function to enable the system to automatically acquire information about digital TV programs even when in the standby mode. 1 P ress HOME MENU. 2 Select âÂÂT uner SetupâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER ) 3 Select âÂÂChannel SetupâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER) 4 Select âÂÂData AcquâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER ) 5 Select âÂÂEnabledâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER ) 6 P ress HOME MENU to exit the menu. ⢠The DA T A ACQUISITION indicator on the front of the Media R eceiver lights while data is being acquired.
09 T uner Setup English 33 En Parental Contr ol W ith the P arental Control, parents can prevent their children from watching inappropriate TV programs, VCR or DVD contents. When an attempt is made to watch a program (or content) blocked by parents, the Plasma Display shows nothing but a message. The P arental Control functions for both conventional and digital TV channels. In the U.S. three rating systems have been provided: the TV ratings, TV P arental Guidelines, and movie ratings. Movie ratings are provided by the Motion P icture Association of America (MP AA) and are used for original movies not edited for television. F or the rating system in Canada, see pages 36 and 37. V oluntar y movie rating system (MP AA) Ra ting Description G General audience s. All ages admit ted. PG Pa r ental guidance suggest ed. Some mat erial ma y not be suit able for children. PG-1 3 Pa r ents str ongly cautioned. Some mat erial ma y be inappr opriat e for children under 1 3. Age-Base R Re stricted. Under 1 7 r equire s accompanying par ent or adult guardian (age v aries in some jurisdictions). NC-1 7 No one 1 7 and under admit ted. Adult A r ating that has no w been superseded b y NC-1 7 . NR Not r at ed. ⢠The voluntar y movie rating system only uses an age-based rating. TV ratings Ra ting Description TV - Y All children TV - Y7 Children 7 and abo ve Age-Base TV -G Gener al audiences TV -PG P arent al guidance sug gest ed TV -1 4 P ar ents strongl y cautioned TV -MA Ma ture audience s only TV Par ental Guidelines Cont ent FV V S L D Rating (F antas y (V iolence) (Se xual (Adult (Se xually violence) situations) language) suggestive dialog) TV - Y (All childr en) TV - Y7 (Dir ec t ed t o older children) X TV -G Age-Base (Gener al audience) TV -PG (P arental guidance suggest ed) X XXX TV -1 4 (P arent s strongl y cautioned) X XXX TV -MA (Matur e audience only) XXX X: Content rating can be set. Changing the password Using a password prevents other persons from changing P arental Control settings. A default password (1234) has been set before shipment. Use the following procedure to change the password. 1 P ress HOME MENU. 2 Select âÂÂT uner SetupâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER ) 3 Select âÂÂP arental ControlâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER) 4 Select âÂÂP asswordâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER ) 5 Select âÂÂChange P asswordâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER) Parental Control Password Change Password Password xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx Clear Password Exit Home Menu 6 Enter the current 4-digit password, using buttons 0 â 9 . 7 Enter a 4-digit password to be newly set, using buttons 0 â 9 . 8 Enter the same password that you have entered in step 7. â¢A confirmation screen appears. 9 P ress A. 10 P ress HOME MENU to exit the menu. â¢T ake a note of the newly set password and keep it handy .
09 T uner Setup 34 En Clearing the password Use the following procedure to clear the password. 1 P ress HOME MENU. 2 Select âÂÂT uner SetupâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER ) 3 Select âÂÂP arental ControlâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER) 4 Select âÂÂP asswordâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER ) 5 Select âÂÂClear P asswordâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER) Parental Control Password Change Password Password xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx Clear Password Exit Home Menu 6 Enter the current 4-digit password, using buttons 0 â 9 . â¢A confirmation screen appears. 7 P ress A. 8 P ress HOME MENU to exit the menu. ⢠The above procedure will reset the password to the factory default (1234). Activating the Parental Contr ol 1 P ress HOME MENU. 2 Select âÂÂT uner SetupâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER ) 3 Select âÂÂP arental ControlâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER) 4 Select âÂÂStatusâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER) 5 Select âÂÂOnâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER) ⢠The password entry screen appears. Enter your 4-digit password using buttons 0 â 9 . 6 P ress HOME MENU to exit the menu. ⢠If you select âÂÂOff â in step 5, then select âÂÂReset on Startupâ or âÂÂDonâÂÂt R esetâÂÂ. W ith âÂÂReset on Startupâ selected, the P arental Control is automatically activated when the power to the system is turned off and on. W ith âÂÂDonâÂÂt R esetâ selected, the P arental Control remains off when the power to the system is off and on. Setting the voluntary movie rating system (MP AA) 1 P ress HOME MENU. 2 Select âÂÂT uner SetupâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER ) 3 Select âÂÂP arental ControlâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER) 4 Select âÂÂMP AA RatingsâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER ) 5 Select the desired rating and change the setting. ( / then ENTER) Parental Control MPAA Ratings G MPAA Ratings Blocked MPAA Ratings G, PG, PG-13, R, NC-17, Adult, NR xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx PG PG-13 Exit Home Menu ⢠The password entry screen appears. Enter your 4-digit password using buttons 0 â 9 . ⢠Each time you press ENTER , the setting is switched. â¢A lock icon appears beside the block ed rating. ⢠All the ratings have been unblock ed before shipment. 6 P ress HOME MENU to exit the menu. ⢠Blocking a rating causes more severe ratings to be automatically blocked as well. Likewise, unblocking a rating causes less severe ratings to be automatically unblocked. We suggest you write down your password so you donâÂÂt forget it. PRO-1120HD/PRO -920HD Y our password No.: If you forget the passwor d When the message âÂÂEnter your P asswordâ is displayed in step 6 under âÂÂClearing the passwordâÂÂ, press the ENTER button on the remote control unit and hold it down for 3 seconds or longer . The password reverts to âÂÂ1234âÂÂ.
09 T uner Setup English 35 En Setting the TV ratings 1 P ress HOME MENU. 2 Select âÂÂT uner SetupâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER ) 3 Select âÂÂP arental ControlâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER) 4 Select âÂÂTV RatingsâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER) 5 Select the desired rating and change the setting. ( / then ENTER) TV Ratings TV-Y TV-Y7 TV Ratings Blocked TV Ratings xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx TV-G TV-PG Exit Home Menu Parental Control ⢠The password entry screen appears. Enter your 4-digit password using buttons 0 â 9 . ⢠Each time you press ENTER , the setting is switched. â¢A lock icon appears beside the block ed rating. ⢠All the ratings have been unblock ed before shipment. 6 P ress HOME MENU to exit the menu. ⢠Blocking a rating causes more severe ratings to be automatically blocked as well. Likewise, unblocking a rating causes less severe ratings to be automatically unblocked. Setting the TV Parental Guidelines (TV Guidelines) 1 P ress HOME MENU. 2 Select âÂÂT uner SetupâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER ) 3 Select âÂÂP arental ControlâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER) 4 Select âÂÂTV P arental GuidelinesâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER) 5 Select the desired rating and change the setting. ( / then ENTER) Parental Control TV Parental Guidelines Fantasy Violence TV Parental Guidelines Blocked TV Parental Guidelines xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx Violence Sexual Situations Exit Home Menu ⢠The password entry screen appears. Enter your 4-digit password using buttons 0 â 9 . ⢠Each time you press ENTER , the setting is switched. â¢A lock icon appears beside the block ed rating. ⢠All the ratings have been unblock ed before shipment. 6 P ress HOME MENU to exit the menu. ⢠Blocking a rating causes more severe ratings to be automatically blocked as well. Likewise, unblocking a rating causes less severe ratings to be automatically unblocked. Blocking Not Rated TV programs Use the following procedure to block TV programs whose rating information is unavailable. 1 P ress HOME MENU. 2 Select âÂÂT uner SetupâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER ) 3 Select âÂÂP arental ControlâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER) 4 Select âÂÂUnavailable RatingsâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER) 5 Select âÂÂBlockâ or âÂÂDonâÂÂt BlockâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER ) Unavailable Ratings xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx Unavailable Ratings Block DonâÂÂt Block Parental Control Exit Home Menu ⢠The password entry screen appears. Enter your 4-digit password using buttons 0 â 9 . ⢠T he factor y default is âÂÂDonâÂÂt BlockâÂÂ. 6 P ress HOME MENU to exit the menu.
09 T uner Setup 36 En Canadian rating systems In Canada you can choose the Canadian English ratings or the Canadian F rench ratings. These ratings are based on the Canadian Radio- T elevision and T elecommunications Commission (CRTC) policy . Canadian English ratings Ra ting Description E Exemp t: Includes ne ws, sports, document a- ries and other informa tion progr amming; talk show s, music videos, and variet y progr amming. C Childr en: Intended for y ounger children under the age of 8 year s. Pa ys car eful at t ention t o themes that could thr eat en their sense of securit y and well-being. C8 Children o ver 8 year s old: Contains no portr a y al of violence as the pr eferred, accept able, or only w a y t o resolv e conflict; nor encour age children t o imit at e dangerous acts which the y may see on the scr een. G Gener al: Considered accept able for all age groups. Appr opriat e viewing for the entir e family , contains v ery lit tle violence, phy sical, ve rbal or emotional. Age-Base PG Pa r ental Guidance: Int ended for a gener al audience, but ma y not be suit able for y ounger childr en (under the age of 8) because it could cont ain contro versial themes or issues. 14 Over 1 4 Y ears: Could cont ain themes wher e violence is one of the dominant elements of the st oryline, but it must be int egr al to the dev elopment of plot or char act er . Language usage could be pr ofane and nudit y present within the cont ext of the theme. 18 Adults: Int ended for view ers 1 8 year s and older and might cont ain depictions of violence, which while rela t ed t o the dev elop- ment of plot, char acter or theme s, are int ended for adult viewing. Could cont ain gr aphic language and portra yals of se x and n udit y . Canadian F rench ratings Ra ting Description E Exemp t progr amming. G Gener al: All ages and children, cont ains minimal dir ect violence, but ma y be int egr at ed into the plo t in a humorous or unr ealistic manner . 8ans Gener al but inadvisable for young childr en: Ma y be view ed by a wide public audience, but could contain scene s disturbing t o children under eight who canno t distinguish bet ween imaginary and r eal situations. R ecommended for vie wing with parent. Age-Base 1 3ans Over 1 3 year s: Could contain scenes of frequent violent scene s and therefor e r ecommended for vie wing with parent. 1 6ans Over 1 6 year s: Could contain fr equent violent scenes and int ense violence. 1 8ans Over 1 8 y ears: Onl y for adult viewing. Could contain fr equent violent scenes and e xtreme violence. Setting Canadian English ratings 1 P ress HOME MENU. 2 Select âÂÂT uner SetupâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER ) 3 Select âÂÂP arental ControlâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER) 4 Select âÂÂCanadian English RatingsâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER) 5 Select the desired rating and change the setting. ( / then ENTER) Parental Control Canadian English Ratings E Canadian English Ratings Blocked Canadian English Ratings xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx C C8 Exit Home Menu ⢠The password entry screen appears. Enter your 4-digit password using buttons 0 â 9 . ⢠Each time you press ENTER , the setting is switched. â¢A lock icon appears beside the block ed rating. ⢠All the ratings have been unblock ed before shipment. 6 P ress HOME MENU to exit the menu.
09 T uner Setup English 37 En Setting Canadian French ratings 1 P ress HOME MENU. 2 Select âÂÂT uner SetupâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER ) 3 Select âÂÂP arental ControlâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER) 4 Select âÂÂCanadian F rench RatingsâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER ) 5 Select the desired rating and change the setting. ( / then ENTER) Parental Control Canadian French Ratings E Canadian French Ratings Blocked Canadian French Ratings E, G, 8 ans , 13 ans , 16 ans , 18 ans xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx G 8 ans Exit Home Menu ⢠The password entry screen appears. Enter your 4-digit password using buttons 0 â 9 . ⢠Each time you press ENTER , the setting is switched. â¢A lock icon appears beside the block ed rating. ⢠All the ratings have been unblock ed before shipment. 6 P ress HOME MENU to exit the menu. T emporarily deactivating the Parental Contr ol When the P arental Control is working and censors a blocked TV program (or content), the Plasma Display shows nothing but a message. The method for temporarily deactivating the P arental Control differs, depending on the currently selected input source. Antenna A, antenna B, or i.LINK: P ress ENTER and then enter your 4-digit password. WWWWWWW 1000.0000 (Ant. B) xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx Parental Control Disable Parental Control Enter ⢠The password entry screen stays only for one minute. After the screen disappears, pressing ENTER causes it to appear again. Input 1 â 4: Enter your 4-digit password. Y ou need not press ENTER first, pressing ENTER causes the password entr y screen to disappear . Please Input Y our Password. ⢠The above password entry screen will also be shown during 2-screen mode, picture-in-picture, and while freezing an image. ⢠The password entry screen stays only for one minute. After the screen disappears, pressing ENTER causes it to appear again. Setting your favorite channels Set up to 10 TV channels to each of the four color buttons on the remote control unit (40 channels in total). Y ou can then quickly select from only your favorite channels. 1 P ress HOME MENU. 2 Select âÂÂT uner SetupâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER ) 3 Select âÂÂF avoritesâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER) 4 Select a color button (A, B, C, D). ( / then ENTER) 5 Select a TV channel to be registered. ( / then ENTER) Favorites Favorites Current Favorites A Line Up A4.0 A6.0 Favorites A 2.0 xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx A 4.0 A 6.0 A Exit Home Menu A â¢A star appears beside the favorite channels currently selected. â¢T o register another TV channel under the same color button, repeat step 5. T o register another TV channel under a different color button , repeat steps 4 and 5. 6 P ress HOME MENU to exit the menu. Setting up closed captions Y our Plasma Display System is equipped with an internal closed caption decoder . Closed caption allows you to view conversations, narration, and sound effects in TV programs and home videos as subtitles on your Plasma Display screen. Y ou may enjoy digital closed captions when watching digital TV programs. Digital closed captions allow you to change parameters such as fonts and colors. ⢠Not all programs and videos offer closed caption . Please look for the â â symbol to ensure that captions will be shown .
09 T uner Setup 38 En Activating the closed caption 1 P ress HOME MENU. 2 Select âÂÂT uner SetupâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER ) 3 Select âÂÂClosed CaptionsâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER) 4 Select âÂÂStatusâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER) 5 Select âÂÂOnâ or âÂÂOn If MuteâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER) Closed Captions Status Status xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx On On If Mute Off Exit Home Menu It em De scription Off Does not sho w closed captions. (factory default) On Alwa ys sho ws closed captions. On If Mut e Show s closed captions only while sound is being mut ed. 6 P ress HOME MENU to exit the menu. â¢F or MONITOR OUT , only conventional closed caption signals are output; digital closed caption signals are not output. Selecting the type of conventional closed captions Select the type of conventional closed captions that you will watch after tuning to a conventional TV channel. This selection also becomes effective when a selected digital TV program provides only conventional closed captions. ⢠âÂÂCC1âÂÂ, âÂÂCC2âÂÂ, âÂÂCC3âÂÂ, or âÂÂCC4â displays subtitles of TV dramas and news programs while allowing a full view of the picture. â¢â T ext1âÂÂ, â T ext2âÂÂ, â T ext3âÂÂ, or â T ext4â superimposes on the picture other information (e.g. TV guide, weather) that is independent of the TV in progress. 1 P ress HOME MENU. 2 Select âÂÂT uner SetupâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER ) 3 Select âÂÂClosed CaptionsâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER) 4 Select â Analog SettingsâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER) 5 Select the desired closed caption . ( / then ENTER) Analog Settings xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx Closed Captions Analog Settings CC3 CC2 CC1 T ext 1 CC4 Exit Home Menu ⢠The factory default is âÂÂCC1âÂÂ. 6 P ress HOME MENU to exit the menu. Selecting digital closed captions Use the following procedure to select digital closed captions. 1 P ress HOME MENU. 2 Select âÂÂT uner SetupâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER ) 3 Select âÂÂClosed CaptionsâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER) 4 Select âÂÂDigital SettingsâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER) 5 Select âÂÂDigital Ser viceâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER) 6 Select the desired closed caption . ( / then ENTER) Digital Settings Digital Settings Digital Service xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx Closed Captions Digital Service Service 3 Service 4 Service 5 Service 2 Service 1 Exit Home Menu ⢠The factory default is âÂÂSer vice 1âÂÂ. 7 P ress HOME MENU to exit the menu. ⢠The P rimar y Caption Ser vice is usually offered for Ser vice 1, and the Secondar y Language Ser vice is usually offered for Ser vice 2 if these ser vices are available. Selecting digital closed caption parameters Use the following procedure to change such parameters of digital closed captions as font size, font type, foreground and background colors. 1 P ress HOME MENU. 2 Select âÂÂT uner SetupâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER ) 3 Select âÂÂClosed CaptionsâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER) 4 Select âÂÂDigital SettingsâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER) 5 Select âÂÂF ont SizeâÂÂ, âÂÂF ontâÂÂ, or any other item. ( / then ENTER ) 6 Select the desired parameter . ( / then ENTER) Digital Settings Digital Settings Font Size xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx Closed Captions Font Size Small Standard Large Exit Home Menu 7 R epeat steps 5 and 6 as necessar y . ( , / ) 8 P ress HOME MENU to exit the menu.
09 T uner Setup English 39 En The following table shows the parameters selectable for each item. It em Selection F ont Size Auto/ Lar ge/ Standar d / Small F ont 1 Aut o/ F ont 1/ F ont 2/ F ont 3 / F ont 4/ F ont 5/ F ont 6/ F ont 7 F ont Color Aut o/ Black/ Whit e / Red/ Gr een/ Blue/ Y ellow/ Magent a/ Cyan F ont Opacit y Aut o/ Solid / T r ansparent/ T r anslucent/ Flashing Background C olor Aut o/ Black / Whit e/ Red/ Gr een/ Blue/ Y ellow/ Magent a/ Cyan Background Opacit y Aut o/ Solid / T r anspar ent/ T r anslucent 1 F ont 1 (monospaced with serifs)/ Font 2 (proportionally spaced with serifs)/ F ont 3 (monospaced without serifs)/ F ont 4 (proportionally spaced without serifs)/ F ont 5 (casual font)/ F ont 6 (cursive font)/ F ont 7 (small capitals font) W ith â Autoâ selected, parameters specified by the provider are used; if not specified by the provider , the bolded default parameters are used. If you select parameters other than â AutoâÂÂ, the selected parameters are used regardless of provider âÂÂs specifications. Clock Setting W ith â Auto Setâ selected for Clock Setting, the system acquires and sets time information automatically . Y ou can also manually set the correct time. If you disconnect the power cord from the power outlet or power blackout occurs, the set time is cleared. 1 P ress HOME MENU. 2 Select âÂÂT uner SetupâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER ) 3 Select âÂÂClockâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER) 4 Select âÂÂTime ZoneâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER ) 5 Select a time zone for your area. ( / then ENTER) Clock Time Zone Atlantic Eastern Time Zone xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx Central Mountain Exit Home Menu Current Time: 9:55 pm EDT Monday 05/17/04 6 Select âÂÂD.S.T .â ( , / , then ENTER ) 7 Select â Appliesâ or âÂÂDoes Not Apply âÂÂ. ( / then ENTER) ⢠Mak e this selection, depending on whether summer time is employed in your area. Clock Daylight Savings Time Applies D.S.T . xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx Does Not Apply Exit Home Menu Current Time: 9:56 pm EDT Monday 05/17/04 8 Select â Auto/Manual SetâÂÂ. ( , / , then ENTER ) 9 Select â Auto Setâ or âÂÂManual SetâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER) 10 If you select â Auto SetâÂÂ, select an antenna (A or B) and a channel number using / and ENTER. Auto/Manual Set Clock Set Channel Ant. A Auto/Manual Set â¢Auto Set 2.0 xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx Clock Exit Home Menu Current Time: 11:58 pm PDT Monday 05/17/04 ⢠The date and time will be automatically corrected using data from the selected channel. If you select âÂÂManual SetâÂÂ, manually set the date and time using / , / and ENTER. Auto/Manual Set Date and Time 3 /17/04 Auto/Manual Set â¢Manual Set 11:58pm xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx Clock 5 4 3 6 Exit Home Menu Current Time: 11:58 pm PDT Monday 05/17/04 11 P ress HOME MENU to exit the menu. ⢠When the time has not been set, the REC TIMER indicator on the front of the Media Receiver blinks. ⢠When the time has not yet been set, you cannot view channel banner information, use auto channel select, and preset TV programs for recording.
10 Adjustments and Settings 40 En Y ou can also use the menu to change the options. 1 P ress HOME MENU. 2 Select âÂÂP ictureâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER) 3 Select â AV Selection âÂÂ. ( / then ENTER) 4 Select the desired option. ( / then ENTER ) AV Selection ST ANDARD DYNAMIC MOVIE GAME USER F or A V source It em De scription ST AND ARD F or a highly defined image in a normally bright room D YNAMIC F or a very sharp image with the maximum contr ast This mode does no t allow manual image qualit y adjustment. MO VIE F or a movie G AME Low ers image brightness for ea sier viewing. USER Allo ws the user t o customize se t tings as desir ed. Y ou can set the mode for each input sour ce. F or PC sour ce It em De scription ST AND ARD F or a highly defined image in a normally (factory default) bright room USER Allo ws the user t o customize se t tings as desir ed. Y ou can set the mode for each input sour ce. 5 P ress HOME MENU to exit the menu. Sleep Timer When the selected time elapses, the Sleep Timer automatically places the system into the standby mode. P ress SLEEP to select the desired time. ⢠The timer starts counting. ⢠Each time you press SLEEP , the selection is switched as below : (cancel) 30 60 90 120 Off (minutes) ⢠The factory default is âÂÂOff âÂÂ. â¢T o cancel the Sleep Timer , select âÂÂOff â by pressing SLEEP . â¢F ive minutes before the selected time elapses, the remaining time appears ever y minute. Y ou can also use the menu to set the Sleep Timer . 1 P ress HOME MENU. 2 Select âÂÂSleep Timer âÂÂ. ( / then ENTER ) 3 Select the desired time. ( / then ENTER) 4 P ress HOME MENU to exit the menu. AV Selection Select from the five viewing options, depending on the current environment (e.g., room brightness), the type of the current TV program, or the type of images input from external equipment. 1 P ress AV SELECTION. ⢠The current A V Selection mode appears. 2 P ress AV SELECTION again before the displayed mode disappears. â¢F or AV source, the mode is switched in the order ; ST ANDARD, DYNAMIC, MOVIE, GAME, then USER . â¢F or PC source, the mode is switched between ST ANDARD and USER .
10 Adjustments and Settings English 41 En Picture adjustments Adjust the picture to your preference for the chosen A V Selection option (except DYNAMIC). 1 P ress HOME MENU. 2 Select âÂÂP ictureâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER) 3 Select an item to be adjusted. ( / then ENTER) Picture AV Selection Contrast Brightness Color Tint Sharpness Pro Adjust Reset ST AND ARD 40 0 0 0 0 F or PC source, the following screen appears: Picture AV Selection Contrast Brightness Red Green Blue Reset ST AND ARD 40 0 0 0 0 4 Select the desired level. ( / then ENTER ) Contrast 40 ⢠When an adjustment screen is in display , you can also change an item to be adjusted, by pressing / . 5 P ress HOME MENU to exit the menu. F or A V source It em but ton butt on C ontr ast F or less contr ast F or more contr ast Brightness F or less brightness F or more brightness C olor F or less color int ensit y F or more color int ensit y T int Skin t ones become Skin tones become purplish gr eenish Sharpness F or less sharpness F or more sharpne ss F or PC sour ce It em but ton butt on Co ntrast F or less contr ast F or more contr ast Brightness F or less brightness F or more brightness Re d F or weak er red F or stronger r ed Gr een F or weak er green F or stronger gr een Blue F or weak er blue F or stronger blue â¢T o make settings for âÂÂP ureCinemaâÂÂ, âÂÂColor T empâÂÂ, âÂÂMPEG NRâÂÂ, âÂÂDNRâÂÂ, âÂÂCTIâÂÂ, and âÂÂDREâÂÂ, select âÂÂP ro Adjustâ in step 3, and then press ENTER . F or the subsequent procedures, see âÂÂP ro AdjustâÂÂ. â¢T o restore the factor y defaults for all the items, press / to select âÂÂResetâ in step 3, and then press ENTER. A confirmation screen appears. P ress / to select âÂÂY esâÂÂ, and then press ENTER . Pro Adjust This system provides various advanced functions for optimizing the picture quality . 1 P ress HOME MENU. 2 Select âÂÂP ictureâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER) 3 Select âÂÂP ro AdjustâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER) 4 Select an item to be adjusted. ( / then ENTER) â¢Y ou can select âÂÂP ureCinemaâÂÂ, âÂÂColor T empâÂÂ, âÂÂMPEG NRâÂÂ, âÂÂDNRâÂÂ, âÂÂCTIâÂÂ, or âÂÂDREâÂÂ. 5 Select the desired parameter . ( / then ENTER) â¢F or the selectable parameters, see the table. Pur eCinema Automatically detects a film-based source (originally encoded at 24 frames/second), analyzes it, then recreates each still film frame for high-definition picture quality . Selections Off Deactiv at es the PureCinema. St andard Produce s smooth and vivid mo ving images (film specific) b y aut omatically de t ecting recor ded image information when displa ying D VD or 1 08 0i HD TV images (e.g., movie s) ha ving 2 4 fr ames per second. AD V Produce s smooth and qualit y moving images (as sho wn on theater screens) b y conv erting to 7 2 Hz when displa ying D VD images (e.g., movie s) ha ving 2 4 fr ames per second. R emark Y ou cannot select âÂÂSt andardâ when 4 80p or 7 2 0p signals ar e being input.
10 Adjustments and Settings 42 En C olor T emp Adjusts the color temperature, resulting in a better white balance. Selections High Whit e with bluish tone Mid-High Int ermediat e tone bet ween High and Mid Mid Natur al t one Mid-Low Int ermediat e t one bet ween High and Low Low Whit e with reddish t oneMid-Low Manual Allow s you t o manually adjust the color t emper ature. Use the follo wing procedur e. 1 Select âÂÂManualâÂÂ, and then press and hold ENTER for more than three seconds to display the manual adjustment screen. 2 Select an item to be adjusted. ( / then ENTER) 3 Select the desired level. ( / then ENTER ) It em but ton but t on R High F or weak er red F or stronger r ed G High F or weak er green F or stronger green B High F or weaker blue F or stronger blue R Low F or weak er red F or stronger r ed G Low F or weak er green F or stronger green B Low F or weak er blue F or stronger blue â¢T o per form adjustment for another item, press RETURN, and then repeat steps 2 and 3 . â¢Y ou may press / to immediately change an item to be adjusted. 4 P ress HOME MENU to exit the menu. MPEG NR Eliminates mosquito noise from video images when a digital TV channel is watched or a DVD is played, resulting in noise-free images. Selections Off Deactiv at es the MPEG NR. High Enhanced MPEG NR Mid Standar d MPEG NR Low Moder at e MPEG NR DNR Eliminates video noise for clean crisp images. The DNR stands for Digital Noise Reduction . Selections Off Deactiv at es the DNR. High Enhanced DNR Mid Standar d DNR Low Moder at e DNR CTI P rovides images with clearer color contours. The CTI stands for Color T ransient Improvement. Selections Off Deactiv at es the CTI. On Activ at es the CTI. DRE Adjusts dark and bright portions on images so that the contrast between brightness and darkness becomes clearer . Selections Off Deactiv at es the DRE. High Enhanced DRE Mid Standar d DRE Low Moder at e DRE Color Management Adjusts the hue for each basic color . Use the following procedure. 1 Select an item to be adjusted. ( / then ENTER) 2 Select the desired level. ( / ) It em but ton but ton Re d Closer to magent a Closer to y ellow Y ellow Closer t o red Closer t o green Gr een Closer t o yello w Closer t o cyan Cyan Closer t o green Closer to blue Blue Closer t o cy an Closer t o magenta Magenta Closer to blue Closer to r ed â¢T o perform adjustment for another item, press RETURN , and then repeat steps 1 and 2 . â¢Y ou may press / to immediately change an item to be adjusted. 3 P ress HOME MENU to exit the menu.
10 Adjustments and Settings English 43 En Sound adjustments Adjust the sound to your preference for the chosen A V Selection option. See page 40. 1 P ress HOME MENU. 2 Select âÂÂSoundâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER) 3 Select an item to be adjusted. ( / ) 4 Select the desired level. ( / ) Bass Balance T reble Reset FOCUS Front Surr ound 0 0 Off Off 2 Sound ST AND ARD It em butt on butt on Tr eble F or weak er treble F or stronger tr eble Bass F or weak er bass F or stronger bass Balance Decrease s audio from Decr eases audio from the right speaker the left speaker 5 P ress HOME MENU to exit the menu. â¢T o restore the factor y defaults for all the items, press / to select âÂÂResetâ in step 3, and then press ENTER. A confirmation screen appears. P ress / to select â Y esâÂÂ, and then press ENTER . FOCUS This shifts the sound coming direction (sound images) upward and produces clear sound contours. 1 P ress HOME MENU. 2 Select âÂÂSoundâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER) 3 Select âÂÂFOCUSâÂÂ. ( / ) 4 Select the desired parameter . ( / ) It em Descrip tion Off Deactiva t es the FOCUS. (factory default) On Activat es the FOCUS. 5 P ress HOME MENU to exit the menu. Front Surr ound This provides three-dimensional sound effects and/or deep, rich bass. 1 P ress HOME MENU. 2 Select âÂÂSoundâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER) 3 Select âÂÂF ront SurroundâÂÂ. ( / ) 4 Select the desired parameter . ( / ) It em Descrip tion Off Deactiva t es both the SR S and T ruBass. SRS R eproduce s highly effectiv e three- dimensional sound. T ruBass Pro vides deep, rich bass using a ne w (factory default) technology . T ruBass SR S Pro vides both T ruBass and SRS effects. 5 P ress HOME MENU to exit the menu. ⢠(WOW) designates a status where the FOCUS is on and T ruBass SRS has been selected for Front Surround. ⢠is a trademark of SRS Labs, Inc. ⢠WOW technology is incorporated under license from SRS Labs, Inc.
10 Adjustments and Settings 44 En Power Control P ower Control provides convenient functions for power saving. Energy Save Y ou can save power consumption by decreasing the picture brightness. When you need not watch the screen and want to enjoy only audio, you can also deactivate the screen . 1 P ress HOME MENU. 2 Select âÂÂP ower ControlâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER) 3 Select âÂÂEnergy SaveâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER ) 4 Select âÂÂSaveâ or âÂÂP icture Off âÂÂ. ( / then ENTER) It em De scription Standar d Does not decr ease picture brightne ss. (factory default) Sa ve Decr eases pictur e brightness t o sav e pow er . Picture Off Deactiva t es the scr een to sa ve po wer . T o re stor e the screen displa y , press an y but t on o ther than V OL /â and MUTING . This set ting is not memorized b y the sy stem. 5 P ress HOME MENU to exit the menu. â¢Y ou can also select this function using the Home menu when the input source is a PC. No Signal off (A V mode only) The system will be automatically placed into the standby mode if no signal is received for 15 minutes. 1 P ress HOME MENU. 2 Select âÂÂP ower ControlâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER) 3 Select âÂÂNo Signal off âÂÂ. ( / then ENTER ) 4 Select âÂÂEnableâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER) It em De scription Disable Does no t place the sy stem int o the (factory default) standb y mode. Enable Places the s yst em int o the standb y mode if no signal is receiv ed for 1 5 minut es. 5 P ress HOME MENU to exit the menu. â¢F ive minutes before the system is placed into the standby mode, a message appears ever y minute. ⢠The system may not be placed into the standby mode when noise signals are present at the Media Receiver after a TV program finishes. No Operation off (A V mode only) The system will be automatically placed into the standby mode when no operation is per formed for three hours. 1 P ress HOME MENU. 2 Select âÂÂP ower ControlâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER) 3 Select âÂÂNo Operation off âÂÂ. ( / then ENTER) 4 Select âÂÂEnableâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER) It em De scription Disable Does no t place the sy stem int o the (factory default) standb y mode. Enable Places the s yst em int o the standb y mode if no oper ation is performed for three hour s. 5 P ress HOME MENU to exit the menu. â¢F ive minutes before the system is placed into the standby mode, a message appears ever y minute. Power Management (PC mode only) The system will be automatically placed into the standby mode when no signal is received from the personal computer . 1 P ress HOME MENU. 2 Select âÂÂP ower ControlâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER) 3 Select âÂÂP ower ManagementâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER) 4 Select âÂÂMode1â or âÂÂMode2âÂÂ. ( / then ENTER) It em De scription Off No pow er management (factory default) Mode1 ⢠Places the s y st em into the st andby mode when no signal is r eceived fr om the personal comput er for eight minut es. ⢠Even when y ou start using the comput er and a signal is r eceived again, the s y stem sta ys off . ⢠The s yst em is switched on again by pr essing ST ANDB Y/ON on the Plasma Displa y or TV on the r emot e control unit. Mode2 ⢠Places the s y st em into the st andby mode when no signal is r eceived for eight seconds. ⢠When you st art using the computer and a signal is receiv ed again, the sy stem is switched on. ⢠The s yst em is switched on again by pr essing ST ANDB Y/ON on the Plasma Displa y or TV on the r emot e control unit. 5 P ress HOME MENU to exit the menu.
10 Adjustments and Settings English 45 En Adjusting image positions (A V mode only) Adjust the horizontal and vertical positions of images on the Plasma Display . 1 P ress HOME MENU. 2 Select âÂÂOptionâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER) 3 Select âÂÂP ositionâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER) 4 Select âÂÂH/V P osition AdjustâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER) P osition H/V P osition Adjust Reset 5 Adjust the vertical position ( / ) or horizontal position ( / ). 6 P ress HOME MENU to exit the menu. â¢T o restore the factor y defaults for all the items, press / to select âÂÂResetâ in step 4, and then press ENTER. A confirmation screen appears. P ress / to select â Y esâÂÂ, and then press ENTER . ⢠Adjustments are stored separately according to input source. Adjusting image positions and clock automatically (PC mode only) Use Auto Setup to automatically adjust positions and clock of images coming from a personal computer . 1 P ress HOME MENU. 2 Select âÂÂOptionâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER) 3 Select â Auto SetupâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER) Option Auto Setup Manual Setup ⢠Auto Setup starts. 4 P ress HOME MENU to exit the menu. ⢠When Auto Setup is finished, â Auto Setup completed.â appears. ⢠Even when â Auto Setup completed.â appears, Auto Setup may have failed, depending on conditions. ⢠Auto Setup may fail with a PC image composed of similar patterns or monochrome. If not successful, change the PC image and try again. ⢠Be sure to connect the computer to the Media R eceiver and switch it on before starting Auto Setup. Adjusting image positions and clock manually (PC mode only) Usually you can easily adjust the positions and clock of images using Auto Setup. Use Manual Setup to optimize the positions and clock of images when necessar y . 1 P ress HOME MENU. 2 Select âÂÂOptionâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER) 3 Select âÂÂManual SetupâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER) 4 Select an item to be adjusted. ( / then ENTER) Manual Setup H/V Position Adjust Clock Phase Reset 0 0 5 Pe r form adjustment. ( / and / ) ⢠Use / only when you adjust the vertical position after selecting âÂÂH/V P osition AdjustâÂÂ. 6 P ress HOME MENU to exit the menu. â¢T o restore the factor y defaults for all the items, press / to select âÂÂResetâ in step 4, and then press ENTER. A confirmation screen appears. P ress / to select âÂÂY esâÂÂ, and then press ENTER .
10 Adjustments and Settings 46 En AV mode 4:3 WIDE FULL CINEMA ZOOM PC mode ex cept for XGA signals 4:3 Dot by Dot FULL PC mode for XGA signals 4:3 FULL2 FULL1 Selecting a scr een size In single-screen mode, press S CREEN SIZE to change the size of the screen from among the selectable options for the type of video signals currently received. ⢠The selectable screen sizes differ depending on the types of input signals. AV mode It em Description 4:3 F or 4:3 âÂÂstandar dâ pictures. A side bar appear s on each side. FULL F or 1 6:9 squeeze pictures. ZOOM F or 1 6:9 let terbo x pictures. Bar s ma y appear on the t op and bot tom with some pr ograms. CINEMA F or 1 4:9 let terbo x picture s. Bars ma y appear on the t op and bot tom on some pr ograms. WIDE In this mode picture s are progr essivel y stre tched to wa rd each side of the screen. PC mode ex cept for XGA signals It em Description 4:3 F ills the screen without alt ering the input signal a spect r atio. FULL F ull 1 6:9 screen displa y Dot by Dot Matches input signal with same n umber of screen pix els. PC mode for XGA signals (Ex. 1024 à768 input at PRO-1120HD) It em Description 4:3 Ma tches input signal with the same number of screen pix els. Optimized for 1 02 4 à7 6 8 display FULL1 F ull 1 6:9 scr een displa y Optimized for 1 02 4 à7 6 8 display FULL2 F or wide signal displa y Use when displa ying 1 2 80 à7 6 8 signal resolution. ⢠In 2-screen mode, press S CREEN SIZE to change the size of lef t screen. ⢠The PC mode above is for the PRO-1120HD. For the PRO-920HD the number of panel pixels is different, so signal processing and actual viewing conditions will var y slightly . ⢠While watching High Definition TV broadcasting, pressing S CREEN SIZE switches between FULL and WIDE. ⢠If you watch High Definition TV broadcasting with WIDE selected, part of the screen (e.g., images, graphic interface) can be missed. If this is the case, select FULL.
10 Adjustments and Settings English 47 En Changing the brightness at both sides of the scr een (Side Mask) W ith the 4:3 screen size selected for the A V mode, you can change the brightness of the gray side masks that appear at both sides of the screen. 1 P ress HOME MENU. 2 Select âÂÂOptionâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER) 3 Select âÂÂSide MaskâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER) 4 Select the desired parameter . ( / then ENTER) It em Description Fixed Alwa ys se ts the same brightness for the (factory default) gra y side masks. Aut o A djust s the brightness of the gr a y side masks according t o the brightness of images. 5 P ress HOME MENU to exit the menu. Language setting Y ou can select a language to be used for on-screen display such as menus from among three languages: English, F rench, and Spanish. 1 P ress HOME MENU. 2 Select âÂÂOptionâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER) 3 Select âÂÂLanguageâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER) 4 Select a language. ( / ) Language Menu English 5 P ress HOME MENU to exit the menu.
11 Timer Pr esetting 48 En 7 Specify a channel number . ( / then ENTER for each digit) Day(s) Start/End Times Recording Device â¢1 Wed 5/19 3:58p - 10:58p A 2.0 None xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx Clear Timer Suspend Timer New Timer Exit Home Menu D B A Timers Channel 8 Select a recording device. ( / then ENTER ) â¢T o preset for auto channel select, select âÂÂNoneâÂÂ. Day(s) Start/End Times Channel â¢1 T ue. 5/18 12:03a - 1:03a A 2.0 D-VHS xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx Clear Timer Suspend Timer New Timer Exit Home Menu D B A Name Advantz Recording Device Timers 9 P ress HOME MENU to exit the menu. An alarm screen appears slightly before the preset timer is activated. If watching a TV channel through antenna A or B in a single-screen mode, the screen allows you to cancel the presetting by pressing D . Timer Alert The Following timer is about to begin: Sun. 1/0 12:00 am â 12:00 am Ant. A 0.0 Cancel Timer Accept D A The icons beside the list numbers have the following meanings. Icon Meaning REC Pre set for r ecording; no conflict s with other timers exist. Pre set for aut o channel select; no conflicts with o ther timer s exist. REC Pre set for r ecording; conflict s with other timer s exist. Pre set for aut o channel select; conflicts with other timers e xist. REC Pre set for r ecording; the timer st art has been dela yed. Pre set for aut o channel select; the timer start has been dela yed. Presetting TV pr ograms using the timer Using the menu, you can easily preset TV programs for watching later (auto channel select), recording with a D- VHS recorder , or recording via the supplied VCR controller . W ith the power to the system left on, the Auto Channel P reset automatically selects the preset TV program when its on-air time comes. Then you will not miss an important TV program when you are enjoying another TV program. F or the connections with a D- VHS recorder , see pages 54 and 55. F or the connections with the supplied VCR controller , see page 59. â¢Y ou can make up to 32 presettings in total. ⢠In steps 4 to 8, you can also press / to move the cursor . 1 P ress HOME MENU. 2 Select âÂÂTimersâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER) 3 Select a list number . ( / then ENTER) Day(s) Start/End Times Channel Recording Device Timers â¢1 Mon 5/17 9:58p - 10:58p A 2.0 None xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx Clear Timer Suspend Timer New Timer Exit Home Menu D B A Timers 4 Specify a date. ( / then ENTER) ⢠The selections include the days of the week (e.g., Mondays), âÂÂWeekdaysâÂÂ, âÂÂW eekendsâÂÂ, and âÂÂEveryday âÂÂ. Selecting one of these will cause the timer to activate periodically . Start/End Times Channel Recording Device â¢1 Wed. 5/19 9:58p - 10:58p A 2.0 None xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx Clear Timer Suspend Timer New Timer Exit Home Menu D B A Timers T ue. 5/18 Mon. 5/17 Thu. 5/20 Fri. 5/21 Day(s) 5 Specify the start and end times. ( / then ENTER for each field) Day(s) Channel Recording Device â¢1 Wed 5/19 3:58p - 10:58p A 2.0 None xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx Clear Timer Suspend Timer New Timer Exit Home Menu D B A 2 1 4 5 Timers Start/End Times 6 Select antenna A or B. ( / then ENTER ) Day(s) Start/End Times Recording Device â¢1 Wed 5/19 3:58p - 10:58p A 2.0 None xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx Clear Timer Suspend Timer New Timer Exit Home Menu D B A Timers Channel
11 Timer Presetting English 49 En ⢠If you set a timer to record a future digital program on a VCR , you must first turn off P arental Control. Other wise, you will record only a black screen. See âÂÂT emporarily deactivating the Parental Controlâ on page 37. â¢T o change the TV program presetting, repeat the above procedure. T o cancel the presetting, press D after selecting a list number in step 4. ⢠Switch on the recording equipment at least 30 seconds before the start of the preset program; otherwise recording will not be executed. ⢠When presetting for recording, finish the operations two minutes (one minute for auto channel select) before the start of the program; otherwise presetting may fail. ⢠Auto channel select is not executed when the system is in the standby mode. â¢R ecording is not executed if recordable D - VHS tape is not present in the D-VHS recorder when the preset program starts. This is also true when a specified D- VHS recorder is not in connection. â¢F or recording with a VCR , confirm that the video output terminals on the Media Receiver have been connected to the signal input terminals on the VCR . â¢P resettings become ineffective if the start time and the end time are identical. Priority rules for overlapped pr esettings When preset TV programs are overlapped, the following three rules are used to determine a higher priority . If more than one of the three rules are met, the rules are applied in the order; 1, 2, then 3. R ule 1: P resetting for recording is given a higher priority over presetting for auto channel select. P resetting for recording P resetting for auto channel select The shaded area is not executed. R ule 2: If two presettings are overlapped, presetting with earlier start time is given a higher priority . If two presettings are sequential, the last portion of the first program may not be recorded for 60 seconds (or less) because recording of the second program is started at the exact start time. P rogram A P rogram B The shaded area is not executed. R ule 3: If presettings at the same start time are overlapped, presetting with a higher list number is given a higher priority .
12 Enjoying thr ough Exter nal Equipment 50 En Y ou can connect many types of external equipment to your Plasma Display System, like a DVD player , VCR, personal computer , game console, and camcorder . To view images coming from external equipment, select the input source using the INPUT buttons on the remote control (page 14) or the INPUT button on the Plasma Display . â¢T o protect all equipment, always turn off the system before connecting to a DVD player , VCR , personal computer , game console, camcorder , or other external equipment. â¢R efer to the relevant instruction manual (DVD player , personal computer , etc.) carefully before making connections. W atching a DVD image Connecting a DVD player Use the INPUT 1 terminals when connecting a DVD player and other audiovisual equipment. Cable CARD ANTENNA/ CABLE A IN NPUT 2 VIDEO VIDEO R-AUDIO-L R-AUDIO-L COMPONENT VIDEO Y Y C B /P B C B /P B C R /P R C R /P R S-VIDEO R-AUDIO-L R-AUDIO-L VIDEO INPUT 1 HDMI DIGITAL OUT OPTICAL S400 INPUT 3 INPUT 1 Cable CARD (TS) Media Receiver (rear view) AV cable (commercially available) Component Video cable (commercially available) S- Video cable (commercially available) DVD player Displaying a DVD image To watch a DVD image, press INP UT 1 on the remote control unit or press INPUT on the Plasma Display to select INPUT1. â¢R efer to your DVD player instruction manual for the signal type. ⢠The INPUT 1 terminals are checked for cable connections in the order where; 1) Component Video , 2) S- Video , 3) Video. ⢠Connect external equipment to only terminals that are to be actually used. â¢Y ou can also use the INPUT 3 terminals when connecting only with the Component Video output terminals on a DVD player . W atching a VCR image Connecting a VCR Use the INPUT 2 terminals when connecting a VCR and other audiovisual equipment. MONITOR OUT VCR CONTROL Cable CARD ANTENNA/ CABLE A IN ANTENNA B CONTROL IN OUT S-VIDEO INPUT 2 INPUT 3 S-VIDEO VIDEO VIDEO R-AUDIO-L R-AUDIO-L COMPONENT VIDEO Y Y C B /P B C B /P B C R /P R C R /P R S-VIDEO R-AUDIO-L R-AUDIO-L VIDEO S400 INPUT 1 INPU T HDMI DIGITAL OUT OPTICAL SERVICE ONL Y INPUT 3 INPUT 1 IN OUT Cable CARD (TS) Media Receiver (r ear view) AV cable (commercially available) S- Video cable (commercially available) VCR Displaying a VCR image To watch a VCR image, press INPUT 2 on the remote control unit or press INPUT on the Plasma Display to select INPUT2. ⢠The INPUT 2 terminals are checked for cable connections in the order where; 1) S- Video, 2) Video . ⢠Connect external equipment to only terminals that are to be actually used.
12 Enjoying thr ough Exter nal Equipment English 51 En Using HDMI Input The INPUT 1 and INPUT 3 terminals include HDMI terminals to which digital video and audio signals can be input. T o use the HDMI terminal, activate the terminal and specify the types of video and audio signals to be received from the connected equipment. F or the types of these signals, see the operation manual that came with the connected equipment. Before starting the menu, press INPUT 1 (or INP UT 3) on the remote control unit or press INPUT on the Plasma Display to select INPUT 1 (or INPUT 3). Input signal corr elation table 19 2 0 â 1 08 0i@5 9.94/6 0Hz 720 â 48 0p@5 9.9 4/6 0Hz 12 8 0 â 72 0p@5 9.9 4/6 0Hz 72 0(1 4 4 0) â 48 0i@5 9.94/6 0Hz ⢠PC signals are not supported. Connecting HDMI equipment INPUT 3 COMPONENT VIDEO Y Y C B /P B C B /P B C R /P R C R /P R S-VIDEO R-AUDIO-L R-AUDIO-L VIDEO S400 INPUT 1 INPUT 3 HDMI DIGITAL OUT OPTICAL INPUT 3 INPUT 1 (TS) Audio cable (commercially available) Make this connection when inputting analog audio signals. Media Receiver (r ear view) HDMI cable (commercially available) HDMI equipment To activate the HDMI terminal: 1 P ress HOME MENU. 2 Select âÂÂOptionâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER) 3 Select âÂÂHDMI InputâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER) 4 Select âÂÂSettingâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER) 5 Select âÂÂEnableâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER ) It em Description Disable Deactiva t es the HDMI t erminal. (factory default) Enable Activa te s the HDMI t erminal. 6 P ress HOME MENU to exit the menu. To specif y the type of digital video signals: 1 P ress HOME MENU. 2 Select âÂÂOptionâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER) 3 Select âÂÂHDMI InputâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER) 4 Select âÂÂVideoâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER ) 5 Select the type of digital video signals. ( / then ENTER ) ⢠If you select â AutoâÂÂ, an attempt will be made to identify the type of digital video signals when digital video signals are received. It em Description Aut o Automa tically identifie s input digital video (factory default) signals. Color -1 Digital Component V ideo signals (4:2:2) locked Color -2 Digital Component V ideo signals (4:4:4) locked Color -3 Digital R GB signals locked 6 P ress HOME MENU to exit the menu. ⢠If you select a parameter other than â AutoâÂÂ, make such a setting that results in natural color . ⢠If no image appears, specify another digital video signal type. â¢F or the digital video signal types to be specified, check the operation manual that came with the connected equipment. To specif y the type of audio signals: 1 P ress HOME MENU. 2 Select âÂÂOptionâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER) 3 Select âÂÂHDMI InputâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER) 4 Select â AudioâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER) 5 Select the type of audio signals. ( / then ENTER) ⢠If you select â AutoâÂÂ, an attempt will be made to identify the type of audio signals when audio signals are received.
12 Enjoying thr ough Exter nal Equipment 52 En It em Description Aut o Automa tically identifie s input audio (factory default) signals. Digital Accept s digital audio signals. Analog Accepts analog audio signals. 6 P ress HOME MENU to exit the menu. ⢠If no sound is output, specify another audio signal type. â¢F or the audio signal types to be specified, check the operation manual that came with the connected equipment. ⢠Depending on the equipment to be connected, you also need to connect analog audio cables. Enjoying a game console or watching camcorder images Connecting a game console or camcorder Use the INPUT 4 terminals to connect a game console, camcorder and other audiovisual equipment. COMPONENT VIDEO Y S - VIDEO VIDEO AUDIO PC INPUT 4 ANALOG RGB AUDIO ( STEREO ) LR C B /P B CR /P R Media Receiver (fr ont view) AV cable (commercially available) S- Video cable (commercially available) Component Video cable (commercially available) Game console/Camcorder ⢠The INPUT 4 terminals are checked for cable connections in the order where; 1) Component Video , 2) S- Video , 3) Video. ⢠Connect external equipment to only terminals that are to be actually used. Displaying an image of the game console or camcorder To watch an image coming from the game console or camcorder , press INPUT 4 on the remote control unit or press INPUT on the Plasma Display to select INPUT4. Recording digital TV pr ograms using a VCR or DVD recor der If you connect recording equipment such as a VCR or DVD recorder to the MONITOR OUT terminals on the rear of the Media Receiver , you can record, for example, digital TV programs using the recording equipment. Y ou can also record digital TV programs more easily by using the supplied VCR controller . Connect the VCR controller to the VCR control terminal on the rear of the Media Receiver and then position the controller so that its light emitting section faces the remote control sensor on the recording equipment. F or more information, see page 59. A voiding unwanted feedback Y ou can prevent unwanted feedback from adversely affecting the quality of images. Specify the output terminal whose output is to be inhibited. 1 P ress HOME MENU. 2 Select âÂÂOptionâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER) 3 Select âÂÂMonitor OutâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER) 4 Select âÂÂINPUT1 P rohibitâÂÂ, âÂÂINPUT2 P rohibitâÂÂ, âÂÂINPUT3 P rohibitâÂÂ, or âÂÂINPUT4 P rohibitâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER) 5 P ress HOME MENU to exit the menu.
12 Enjoying thr ough Exter nal Equipment English 53 En Connecting a recor der VCR CONTROL Cable CARD ANTENNA/ CABLE A IN ANTENNA B CONTROL IN OUT S-VIDEO INPUT 2 INPUT 3 S-VIDEO VIDEO VIDEO R-AUDIO-L R-AUDIO-L COMPONENT VIDEO Y Y C B /P B C B /P B C R /P R C R /P R S-VIDEO R-AUDIO-L R-AUDIO-L VIDEO S400 INPUT 1 HD M DIGITAL OUT OPTICAL SERVICE ONL Y INPUT 3 INPUT 1 IN OUT Cable CARD (TS) MONITOR OUT VCR controller (for presetting digital TV programs for recording) Media Receiver (r ear view) AV cable (commercially available) S- Video cable (commercially available) VCR or DVD recor der ⢠About the MONITOR OUT terminals The MONITOR OUT terminals cannot output the following signals: 1 V ideo signals input from the COMPONENT VIDEO terminal 2 V ideo signals from a personal computer 3 S- Video signals when a conventional TV channel is being received 4 S- Video signals when V ideo signals (INPUT 1, 2, and 4) are being input 5 Digital video and audio signals from the HDMI terminals ⢠When watching images played back on a VCR or DVD recorder connected to the MONITOR OUT terminals, select an input source (e.g., TV channel reception) on the recording equipment other than external input sources. Selecting an external input source may result in distorted images or noise. ⢠Analog broadcasting signals are not sent to the MONITOR OUT (S- VIDEO) terminal. This is also true of composite signals coming from INPUT 1, 2, or 4. Connecting other audio equipment The digital audio output terminal (optical) on this system can output Dolby Digital signals. Using an optical digital cable, connect an A V receiver to the digital audio output terminal (optical) on the rear of the Media Receiver . This allows audio such as digital TV broadcasting to be played in high quality . If your A V receiver does not have a digital audio input terminal (optical), connect the MONITOR OUT terminals (AUDIO) on the rear of the Media Receiver to the audio input terminals on the AV receiver . ⢠When using the digital audio output terminal (optical), you need to make settings depending on your A V receiver . For more information , see the instruction manual that came with the A V receiver . Connecting an A V receiver MONITOR OUT VCR CONTROL Cable CARD ANTENNA/ CABLE A IN ANTENNA B CONTROL IN OUT S-VIDEO INPUT 2 INPUT 1 S-VIDEO VIDEO VIDEO R-AUDIO-L R-AUDIO-L COMPONENT VIDEO Y Y C B /P B C B /P B C R /P R C R /P R S-VIDEO R-AUDIO-L R-AUDIO-L VIDEO S400 INPUT 1 H DIGITAL OUT OPTICAL SERVICE ONL Y INPUT 3 IN OUT Cable CARD (TS) Media Receiver (r ear view) Audio cable (commercially available) Optical digital cable (commercially available) AV receiver
12 Enjoying thr ough Exter nal Equipment 54 En Switching the optical audio signal type Set up for the DIGIT AL AUDIO output terminal (OPTICAL), depending on your A V receiver . 1 P ress HOME MENU. 2 Select âÂÂOptionâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER) 3 Select âÂÂDigital Audio OutâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER) 4 Select âÂÂDolby Digitalâ or âÂÂPCMâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER) It em Description PCM Alwa y s outputs in the PCM format (factory default) r egar dless of the t ypes of signals. Dolby Digit al F or Dolby Digit al encoded signals, outputs in the Dolb y Digital forma t. F or PCM encoded signals, outputs in the PCM forma t. 5 P ress HOME MENU to exit the menu. W atching a D-VHS image What is i.LINK? i.LINK is a digital serial inter face for handling digital video, digital audio, and other data in two directions. i.LINK is SonyâÂÂs term for the IEEE 1394 data transport bus. Digital A V equipment compatible with i.LINK can be connected using a single i.LINK cable. The i.LINK interface allows this PDP system to control one of up to two i.LINK compatible devices (in connection) that can be identified. Which i.LINK devices are connectable? F or i.LINK devices, this system supports only D- VHS recorders. The i.LINK terminals on this system cannot be connected with other equipment such as DVD recorders, digital video cameras, personal computers, and PC peripheral devices because of differences in the specifications. What can be recor ded through i.LINK? W ith D- VHS recorders connected to this system through i.LINK, you can record only digital TV programs. Y ou cannot record conventional TV channels nor contents coming from external input sources and personal computers. Connecting D-VHS recor ders Use the i.LINK terminals when connecting D- VHS recorders. When connecting a single D-VHS recor der I TOR OUT C R CONTROL Cable CARD ANTENNA/ CABLE A IN S-VIDEO INPUT 2 S-VIDEO VIDEO VIDEO R-AUDIO-L R-AUDIO-L COMPONENT VIDEO Y Y C B /P B C B /P B C R /P R C R /P R S-VIDEO R-AUDIO-L R-AUDIO-L VIDEO INPUT 1 IN HDMI DIGITAL OUT OPTICAL S400 INPUT 3 INPUT 1 IN OUT Cable CARD (TS) D- VHS recorder Media Receiver (r ear view) (The function and per formance are the same for both terminals.) i.LINK cable (commercially available) To use i.LINK, you need to connect only an i.LINK cable; you need not connect cables to the video and audio terminals. When connecting two D-VHS recor ders Y ou can connect two D-VHS recorders directly to the i.LINK terminals on the rear of the Media Receiver . Media Receiver D- VHS recorder D- VHS recorder i.LINK cables POWER ON STANDBY REC TIMER DATA ACQUISITION
12 Enjoying thr ough Exter nal Equipment English 55 En Using i.LINK cables you can also connect up to two D- VHS recorders in a daisy chain. Media Receiver i.LINK cable D- VHS recorder D- VHS recorder POWER ON STANDBY REC TIMER DATA ACQUISITION Precautions about i.LINK connections ⢠Use S400 i.LINK cables that have 4-pin plugs and are shorter than 3.5 m (11.48 feet). ⢠Some i.LINK devices cannot relay data when their power is off . ⢠Do not make the following loop connections: Media Receiver D- VHS recorder D- VHS recorder POWER ON STANDBY REC TIMER DATA ACQUISITION Media Receiver D- VHS recorder POWER ON STANDBY REC TIMER DATA ACQUISITION Displaying a D-VHS image To watch a D-VHS image, press i.LINK on the remote control unit or press INPUT on the Plasma Display to select i.LINK. Useful and important notification Useful information â¢D - VHS recorders connected through i.LINK can play back digital TV programs recorded using this system. â¢D - VHS recorders connected through i.LINK can record only digital TV programs. Using i.LINK, those recorders cannot record conventional TV channels nor contents coming from external input sources. ⢠This system can be simultaneously connected with up to two D- VHS recorders that support i.LINK. Y ou can control one of these D- VHS recorders (basic functions only). ⢠Some D- VHS recorders connected through i.LINK may not allow this system to control through the control panel screen or to display images and output sound. â¢T o record digital TV programs using connected D- VHS recorders, use D- VHS tape. Y ou cannot use VHS tape nor S- VHS tape. ⢠Some D- VHS recorders connected though i.LINK may not allow this system to play back images and sound recorded on VHS tape, S- VHS tape, or (if with analog signals) D - VHS tape. If this is the case, connect the analog output terminals on the D- VHS recorder to INPUT 1, 2, 3, or 4 terminals on this system. See page 50. ⢠This system supports the Digital T ransmission Content P rotection (DTCP) technology . The DTCP is a copy protection technology that presents data coding and device authentication. ⢠i.LINK may not allow copy-restricted video , audio, and other data to be copied from one i.LINK device to another . It also may not allow video, audio , and other data to be transferred with equipment that does not support the DTCP . Precautions ⢠While one D- VHS recorder connected through i.LINK is recording or playing back, do not switch on or off the other connected D-VHS recorder (not in use) or do not connect or disconnect the i.LINK cable from that D- VHS recorder . Doing so can result in image and sound interruption. ⢠Some D- VHS recorders that support i.LINK cannot relay data when their power is off . Check the instruction manual that came with your D- VHS recorder . This system allows you to change the setting for data relay in the standby mode. See âÂÂSetting up for i.LINK standbyâ on page 57.
12 Enjoying thr ough Exter nal Equipment 56 En Setting up for controlling a D-VHS r ecorder Y ou can operate the connected D-VHS recorder from the Plasma Display that shows the control panel screen. After making the connections, use the menu to specify the model of the D- VHS recorder to be operated. Y ou can operate only a single D- VHS recorder from the Plasma Display . 1 P ress HOME MENU. 2 Select âÂÂT uner SetupâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER ) 3 Select âÂÂR ecorder SetupâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER) 4 Select âÂÂi.LINK SetupâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER) 5 Select âÂÂi.LINK ListâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER) 6 Select the D- VHS recorder model to be operated. ( / then ENTER) Recorder Setup i.LINK Setup i.LINK List i.LINK Setup i.LINK List D-VHS XXXX XXXX Control --- --- xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx Move Delete Rename Connect Exit Home Menu D C B A 7 P ress A to select âÂÂConnectâÂÂ. 8 P ress HOME MENU to exit the menu. ⢠The following information appears at the right end of the i.LINK list to indicate the connection status of the D- VHS recorders: Control: Data connection with the D - VHS recorder has been established and the recorder is ready for control. Link: The D - VHS recorder has been physically con- nected, and can be controlled if it is selected for control. âÂÂ: Currently not physically connected ⢠When connected to any device other than a D- VHS, the device is not listed in the i.LINK List. Editing the i.LINK list The i.LINK list shows all devices connected through i.LINK inter faces. In this list, you can change the name or order of devices or delete device information. 1 P ress HOME MENU. 2 Select âÂÂT uner SetupâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER ) 3 Select âÂÂR ecorder SetupâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER) 4 Select âÂÂi.LINK SetupâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER) 5 Select âÂÂi.LINK ListâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER) 6 Select the desired device. ( / ) Recorder Setup i.LINK Setup i.LINK List i.LINK Setup i.LINK List xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx Exit Home Menu Move Delete Rename Connect D C B A D-VHS XXXX XXXX Control --- --- The following procedure differs depending on what you want to per form. To change the name of a device: 7 P ress B to select âÂÂR enameâÂÂ. 8 Enter up to 7 characters using / , / , and ENTER. Recorder Setup i.LINK Setup i.LINK List Cancel A BCDE FGH I J KL M N O P Q R ST UV W X Y Z 1 2 3 4 56 78 90 . @ / ( ), â _ : ' & SP ACE New Name: D-VHS i.LINK Setup i.LINK List xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx Clear Accept Exit Home Menu D B A 9 P ress A. 10 P ress HOME MENU to exit the menu. To change the order of devices: 7 P ress C to select âÂÂMoveâÂÂ. 8 Select the new desired position. ( / then ENTER ) ⢠The selected device is moved to the selected position . 9 P ress HOME MENU to exit the menu. To delete information about a device: 7 P ress D to select âÂÂDeleteâÂÂ. â¢A confirmation message appears. â¢A warning message appears if the selected device has been preset for recording with the timer or if its power is on. If this is the case, you cannot delete the device that you have selected. 8 P ress A to execute the deletion . 9 P ress HOME MENU to exit the menu.
12 Enjoying thr ough Exter nal Equipment English 57 En Setting up for i.LINK standby Use the following procedure to enable data transfer between multiple i.LINK devices even when the system is in the standby mode. 1 P ress HOME MENU. 2 Select âÂÂT uner SetupâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER ) 3 Select âÂÂR ecorder SetupâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER ) 4 Select âÂÂi.LINK SetupâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER) 5 Select âÂÂi.LINK StandbyâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER ) 6 Select âÂÂEnableâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER) 7 P ress HOME MENU to exit the menu. â¢W ith âÂÂEnableâ selected, the system relays data between multiple i.LINK devices even when in the standby mode; the i.LINK circuits are energized in that mode. In standby mode i.LINK device Media Receiver i.LINK device POWER ON STANDBY REC TIMER DATA ACQUISITION No data relay Operating the control panel scr een The control panel screen appears when you press i.LINK. It disappears when you press i.LINK again. T o select a button on the control panel screen, press / or / , and then press ENTER on the remote control. D-VHS4 XXXXXXX XXX No1394 00:00:00 ⢠D-VHS4 i.LINK Setup A Device List ON/OFF REC 1 20 2 10 11 13 12 14 15 16 17 18 19 3 4 5 6 9 7 8 D 1 Shows the current status of the D- VHS recorder . 2 Shows the name of the currently selected device. 3 Shows counter time output by the D- VHS recorder . 4 Shows the manufacture name of the D- VHS recorder to be operated. 5 Shows the model name of the D- VHS recorder to be operated. 6 Shows the type of inserted video tape; D for D- VHS, S for S- VHS, and no display for VHS. 7 Appears when any tape has been inserted. 8 Appears when the inserted tape has been write protected. The inserted tape cannot be used for recording when this indicator appears. 9 Appears when the D- VHS recorder has been preset for recording and is in the standby mode. 10 Switches on and off the D - VHS recorder . 11 Starts recording. 12 Rewinds to the start of the current program. 13 R ewinds the tape. 14 P auses the tape. 15 Stops the current tape motion. 16 Starts playing back. 17 Fo r wards to the start of the next program. 18 Fo r wards the tape. 19 Exits the control panel screen and displays the i.LINK Setup menu. 20 Allows you to change the D - VHS recorder to be operated. After pressing this button, press / to select the desired model from the list, and then press ENTER . ⢠If no i.LINK device has been connected, âÂÂNo i.LINK devices are connected.â appears. If this is the case, connect i.LINK devices. ⢠If none of the connected equipment has been supported for control, you cannot execute control.
12 Enjoying thr ough Exter nal Equipment 58 En W atching an image from a personal computer Connecting a personal computer Use the PC terminals to connect a personal computer . ⢠The PC input terminals are DDC2B-compatible. ⢠Plug & Play may not correctly function , depending on personal computers in use. E C ER DATA ACQUISITION COMPONENT VIDEO Y S - VIDEO VIDEO AUDIO PC INPUT 4 ANALOG RGB AUDIO ( STEREO ) LR C B /P B CR /P R Media Receiver (fr ont view) RGB cable (commercially available) Personal computer ø 3.5 mm stereo mini- plug cable (commercially available) Displaying an image from a personal computer When connecting to a personal computer , the input signal type is automatically identified. If the personal computer image does not come in clearly , you may need to use Auto Setup in the menu. See page 45. To watch an image coming from the personal computer , press PC on the remote control unit or press INPUT on the Plasma Display to select âÂÂPCâÂÂ. ⢠The PC terminals cannot be used for audiovisual equipment. Signal names for 15-pin mini D -sub connecter 15 14 13 12 9 11 10 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 (front view) Pin No. Signal name 1 R 2 G 3 B 4 Not connect ed 5 Not connect ed 6 GND (ground) 7 GND (ground) 8 GND (ground) 9 5V 10 GND (ground) 11 Not connect ed 12 SD A 13 HD 14 VD 15 SCL â¢A Macintosh adaptor may be required for use with some Macintosh computers. Computer compatibility chart Re solution F requency Remarks 720 à4 00 7 0 Hz 640 à4 8 0 6 0 Hz 65 Hz Macintosh 1 3" (6 7 Hz) 72 H z 75 H z 8 00 à6 00 5 6 Hz 60 H z 72 H z 75 H z 832 à6 2 4 7 4.5 Hz Macint osh 1 6" 10 2 4 à7 6 8 6 0 Hz 70 H z 75 Hz Macint osh 1 9" 12 8 0 à7 6 8 5 6 Hz 60 H z 70 H z
12 Enjoying thr ough Exter nal Equipment English 59 En Connecting the VCR controller Connect the supplied VCR controller to the Media Receiver . This allows you to preset digital TV programs for recording; see page 48. When the specified time comes, the system in the standby mode is automatically switched on and the specified TV program is recorded using the connected VCR or DVD recorder . ⢠Make sure to leave the VCR power on when presetting TV programs for recording with the VCR controller . ⢠Be sure to firmly connect the VCR controller to the VCR control terminal on the rear of the Media Receiver . If you have mistakenly connected it to the CONTROL IN or CONTROL OUT terminal, remote control or other operations may be disabled. Media Receiver (r ear view) VCR or DVD recor der (Once you have positioned the VCR controller , secure with the supplied tape.) P osition the light emitting section on the VCR controller cable so that it faces the VCR . Remote control sensor VCR CONTROL MONITOR OUT VCR CONTROL Cable CARD ANTENNA/ CABLE A IN ANTENNA B CONTROL IN OUT S-VIDEO INPUT 2 INPUT 3 S-VIDEO VIDEO VIDEO R-AUDIO-L R-AUDIO-L COMPO N Y Y C B / C B / S-VIDEO R-AUDIO-L R-AUDIO-L VIDEO S400 DIGITAL O OPTIC A SERVICE ONL Y INPUT 3 INPUT 1 IN OUT Cable CARD (TS) Use the following procedure to set the manufacture of the recording equipment: 1 P ress HOME MENU. 2 Select âÂÂT uner SetupâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER ) 3 Select âÂÂR ecorder SetupâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER) 4 Select âÂÂVCR SetupâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER) 5 Select the manufacture of the recording equipment. ( / then ENTER) VCR Setup ⢠XXXXX VCR Setup xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx XXXXX XXXXX Exit Home Menu Recorder Setup ⢠The screen for recording test appears. 6 Check that the power to the recording equipment is on , and insert tape into the slot. ⢠Insert tape you think it all right to erase its contents. The contents will be erased because R ec and Stop codes are output in the test. ⢠Check that the light emitting section on the VCR controller cable faces the recording equipment. 7 P ress A to execute recording test. ⢠If the recording equipment fails to start and stop recording, check and change the specified recording equipment manufacture. 8 P ress A to select âÂÂY es, Store SettingâÂÂ. 9 P ress HOME MENU to exit the menu. . ⢠Even if you correctly specify the manufacture of the recording equipment, control of some models may be disabled. â¢P er form the recording test when the recording equipment is not in recording standby or is not recording. ⢠The recording test takes approximately 10 seconds. ⢠The PIONEER has been set as the factor y default.
12 Enjoying thr ough Exter nal Equipment 60 En The lists of controllable r ecording equipment manufactures Manufacture Admir al Adv antz Adventur a Aiko Aiwa Akai American High Asha Audiov ox Beaumark Bell & How ell Broksonic CCE Calix Canon Capehart Carver Ciner al Citizen Colt Cr aig Curtis Mathes Cybernex Daew oo Da ytr on Denon Dynat ech Electrohome Electrophonic Emer ex Emer son F isher F uji F unai GE Garr ard Go V ideo GoldSt ar Gr adiente Grundig HI-Q Manufacture Harle y Da vidson Harman/K ardon Harwood Headquart er Hit achi JVC Jensen KEC KLH Ke nw ood K odak LXI Llo yd's Logik MEI MG A MGN T echnology MTC Magnasonic Magna vo x Magnin Mar antz Marta Matsushit a Memore x Minolta Mitsubishi Mot orola Multit ech NAD NEC Nikko Nikon Noblex Olympus Optimus Opt onica Orion P anasonic P enney P entax Manufacture Philco Philips Pilot Pioneer Po r tland Profitr onic Proscan Pro t ec Pulsar Quarter Quartz Quasar RC A R adio Shack R adix Rande x R ealistic Ricoh R unco STS Salor a Samsung Sanky Sansui San yo Scot t Sears Semp Sharp Shint om Shogun Singer Son y S ylv ania Symphonic TMK Ta tung T eac T echnics T eknika Thomas Manufacture T oshiba To te vision Unit ech V ector V ector R esearch V ideo Concepts V ideosonic Wa r d s Whit e W estinghouse XR -1 000 Y amaha Zenith Some modes of the listed manufactures may not allow control through the VCR controller .
12 Enjoying thr ough Exter nal Equipment English 61 En Connecting control cor ds Connect control cords between the Media Receiver and other PIONEER equipment having the logo. Y ou can then operate the connected equipment by sending commands from its remote control unit to the remote control sensor on the Media R eceiver . After the CONTROL IN terminals have been connected, the remote control sensors on the connected equipment do not accept commands from the remote control units. F ace the remote control units to the remote control sensor on the Plasma Display when operating the connected equipment. ⢠Make sure that the power is turned off when making connections. ⢠Complete all component connections before making control cord connections. About SR The CONTROL OUT terminal on the rear of the Media Receiver supports SR that allows linked operations with a PIONEER AV receiver . SR presents functions such as the input switch linkage operation function and the DSP surround mode display function. F or more information, see the instruction manual that came with the PIONEER A V receiver supporting SR . ⢠While in connection through SR , the volume on this system is temporarily minimized. Media Receiver (r ear view) CONTROL IN OUT MONITOR OUT VCR CONTROL Cable CARD ANTENNA/ CABLE A IN ANTENNA B IN OUT S-VIDEO INPUT 2 INPUT 3 S-VIDEO VIDEO VIDEO R-AUDIO-L R-AUDIO-L COMPONENT VIDEO Y Y C B /P B C B /P B C R /P R C R /P R S-VIDEO R-AUDIO-L R-AUDIO-L VIDEO S400 INPUT 1 INPUT 3 HDMI DIGITAL OUT OPTICAL SERVICE ONL Y INPUT 3 INPUT 1 IN OUT Cable CARD (TS) CONTROL CONTROL IN OUT CONTROL IN OUT CONTROL IN OUT The control cables (commercially available) are mono sound cables with mini plugs (no resistance).
13 Useful Remote Contr ol Features 62 En Learning function of the remote control unit Y ou can operate the connected A V products (AV R eceiver , Cable Box, SA T tuner , VCR , DVD, DVD recorder , LD) using the learning function of your remote control unit. This remote control unit has a function that can memorize each remote control code. 2 to 5 cm (0.8 to 2.0 inches) R emote contr ol Remote contr ol of (Supplied accessory) AV pr oduct Using the learning function 1 Slide the Mode switch to match the device whose remote control signal you want to be learned. 2 P ress EDIT/LEARN and 2 at the same time. â¢The LED flashes. 3 P ress a button to be learned. ⢠The LED lights up. â¢F or the functions that can be learned, see pages 64 to 68. ⢠When learning is finished, the LED starts flashing again. 4 P ress EDIT/LEARN again to exit the Learn mode. â¢T o exit the Learn mode halfway , press EDIT/LEARN again. ⢠If the Mode switch selection is changed when in the Learn mode, the Learn mode is cancelled. ⢠If no operation is performed for more than one minute, the Learn mode is cancelled. ⢠It takes about 2 seconds to finish code transmission. Do not interrupt it halfway . W ait until the LED flashes again. â¢Y ou can reset all learned codes to the factory defaults. When not in the Learn mode, press and hold TV , and then press and VOL (RECEIVER section) at the same time. Presetting manufactur e codes 1 Slide the Mode switch to match the device to which you want to preset the remote control signal. 2 P ress EDIT/LEARN and 1 at the same time. ⢠The LED flashes. 3 P ress 0 â 9 to enter the manufacture code. See page 63. â¢P reset mode is finished once the LED no longer lights up. â¢T o exit the Edit mode halfway , press EDIT/LEARN again. ⢠If the Mode switch selection is changed when in the Edit mode, the Edit mode is cancelled. ⢠If no operation is performed for more than one minute, the Edit mode is cancelled. ⢠When you enter a code not listed, the LED flashes quickly . ⢠If the table on page 63 does not include your desired manufacturer or the remote control does not work, you can make the memory learn its signal by the Learn mode. ⢠The initial mode is âÂÂ000â (PIONEER).
13 Useful Remote Contr ol Features English 63 En Manufacture codes CABLE/S A T VCR D VD/D VR 000 PIONEER1(CABLE) PIONEER PIONEER(D VD) 00 1 PIONEER2(CABLE) FISHER P ANASONIC(D VD) 00 2 JERR OLD1(CABLE) FISHER2 SAMSUNG(D VD) 00 3 JERR OLD2(CABLE) FISHER3 SONY(D VD) 00 4 JERR OLD3(CABLE) GOLDS T AR T OSHIBA(D VD) 00 5 JERR OLD4(CABLE) HIT A CHI JVC(D VD) 00 6 JERR OLD5(CABLE) HIT A CHI2 PIONEER(D VD-RECORDER) 00 7 JERR OLD6(CABLE) HIT A CHI3 PIONEER2(D VD-RECORDER) 00 8 JERR OLD7(CABLE) MA GNAV O X2 PIONEER3(D VD-RECORDER) 00 9 JERR OLD8(CABLE) MITSUBISHI P ANASONIC(D VD-RECORDER) 01 0 JERR OLD9(CABLE) MITSUBISHI2 P ANASONIC2(D VD-RECORDER) 01 1 JERR OLD1 0(CABLE) MITSUBISHI3 P ANASONIC3(D VD-RECORDER) 01 2 S.A.1(CABLE) MITSUBISHI4 PHILIPS(D VD-RECORDER) 01 3 S.A.2(CABLE) MITSUBISHI5 SHARP(D VD-RECORDER) 01 4 S.A.3(CABLE) MITSUBISHI6 SHARP2(D VD-RECORDER) 01 5 S.A.4(CABLE) P ANASONIC T OSHIB A(D VD-RECORDER) 01 6 ZENITH1(CABLE) P ANASONIC2 T OSHIBA2(D VD-RECORDER) 01 7 ZENITH2(CABLE) P ANASONIC3 01 8 ZENITH3(CABLE) R CA 01 9 R CA2 020 PIONEER(S A T) R CA3 PIONEER(LD) 02 1R CA1(SA T) SANY O KENW OOD(LD) 02 2R CA2(SA T) SANY O2 P ANASONIC1(LD) 02 3 SONY(S A T) SANY O3 P ANASONIC2(LD) 02 4 SHARP PHILIPS(LD) 025 SHARP2 R CA(LD) 026 SHARP3 SONY(MDP) 027 SONY(BET A) SONY(LD) 028 SONY(VHS) 029 SONY(8mm) 03 0T OSHIB A 03 1 JVC 03 2 JVC2 03 3 JVC3 034 JVC4 035 JVC5 036 ZENITH 037 MITSUBISHI(J-3) 038 SHARP(J-2) 03 9P ANASONIC(J-3) 04 0T OSHIBA(J-3) 04 1G R ANDIENTE 04 2 AKAI 04 3 PIONEER2 044 S ANY O4 04 5M A TSUI 04 6 AIW A 04 7 ALBA8 1 04 8 B USH 04 9 THOMSON 05 0B AIRD 05 1 TELEFUNKEN 052 ALBA CABLE/S A T VCR D VD/D VR 053 Grundig1 054 Grundig2 05 5 Grundig3 056 SONY2 05 7 SONY3 058 SONY4 059 R CA4 060 PHILIPS 06 1 PHILIPS2 06 2 PHILIPS3 06 3 PHILIPS4 064 PHILIPS5 065 PHILIPS6 066 SA M SUNG 06 7S AMSUNG2 06 8S AMSUNG3 06 9S AMSUNG4 07 0S AMSUNG5 07 1S AMSUNG6 07 2M ARANTZ 073 MARANTZ2 07 4 G E 075 GE2 076 GE3 077 YA MAHA 07 8Y AMAHA2 07 9Y AMAHA3 08 0Y AMAHA4 08 1 CUR TIS_MA THIS 08 2 CUR TIS_MA THIS2 08 3 CUR TIS_MA THIS3 084 FUNAI 085 ADMIRAL 086 KENW OOD 08 7 KENWOOD2 088 KENW OOD3 089 NEC 090 NEC2 09 1 NEC3 092 NEC4 09 3W ARDS 09 4W ARDS2 09 5W ARDS3 09 6W ARDS4 09 7 MEMOREX 098 MEMOREX2 099 JC_PENNY 10 0 JC_PENNY2 10 1 JC_PENNY3 10 2 JC_PENNY4 10 3 JC_PENNY5 10 4 JC_PENNY6
13 Useful Remote Contr ol Features 64 En Using the r emote control unit to contr ol other devices 3 1 2 Receiver control buttons When a P ioneer receiver is connected to the display , the receiver can be operated using buttons 1 to 3 . When a non-P ioneer receiver is connected to the display , the signals for 1 to 3 must first be learned before operating. See page 62. 1 RECEIVER (ST ANDBY/ON) T urns the receiver power on and off . 2 RECEIVER INPUT Selects the input source connected to the receiver . 3 RECEIVER VOL / â Adjusts the receiver volume level. P ress VOL to increase the volume and VOL â to decrease it. ⢠(RECEIVER) MUTING Allows the remote control unit to learn receiver âÂÂs mute signal. Use this button when the mode switch is set to a position other than TV . ⢠The color-highlighted buttons on the remote control can learn the control signal from another deviceâÂÂs remote control. Mode switch (with âÂÂTV â selected)
13 Useful Remote Contr ol Features English 65 En 1 2 3 4 5 Cable control buttons When the Mode switch is set to CBL/SA T , the cable converter connected to the display can be operated using 1 to 5 . Cable converters made by other manufacturers and not preset can also be operated using the remote control unit if 1 to 5 have learned the functions. See page 62. 10 â 9 P ress a button (or buttons) that corresponds to the channel that you want to watch. 2 CH / â P ress CH or CH â to tune in a higher or lower channel. 3 SOURCE T urns the cable converter power on and off . 4 CH ENTER * F ix the selected channel with the direct channel selection buttons. 5 CH RETURN * P ress to switch between the current channel and the channel you were watching immediately before. * Some manufacturers do not preset CH ENTER and CH RETURN . Use these buttons to learn if necessar y . ⢠CABLE and SA T cannot be selected at the same time. ⢠The color-highlighted buttons on the remote control can learn the control signal from another deviceâÂÂs remote control. Mode switch (with âÂÂCBL/SA T â selected)
13 Useful Remote Contr ol Features 66 En 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 SA T control buttons When the SA T is preset by the learning function of the remote control, the remote control unit buttons will function as shown below . ⢠When the Mode switch is set to CBL/SA T , satellite broadcast tuners made by other manufacturers and not preset can also be operated with the remote control unit if 1 to 8 have learned the functions. See page 62. 10 â 9 P ress a button (or buttons) that corresponds to the channel that you wish to watch. 2 CH / â P ress CH or CH â to tune in a higher or lower channel. 3 ENTER, / / / ENTER: P ress to activate the selected function . / / / : P ress the button to select items on the SA T GUIDE screen or SA T MENU screen. 4S AT INFO When this button is pressed, information on satellite broadcasting will appear . ⢠Use this button to learn if necessary . 5 SOURCE T urns the Satellite broadcast tuner power on and off . 6 CH ENTER F ix the selected channel with the direct channel selection buttons. ⢠Use this button to learn if necessary . 7S AT MENU When this button is pressed, the satellite broadcasting menu screen will appear . 8S AT GUIDE When this button is pressed, the satellite broadcasting guide screen will appear . ⢠CABLE and SA T cannot be selected at the same time. ⢠The color-highlighted buttons on the remote control can learn the control signal from another deviceâÂÂs remote control. Mode switch (with âÂÂCBL/SA T â selected)
13 Useful Remote Contr ol Features English 67 En 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 VCR control buttons When the VCR is preset by the learning function of the remote control, the remote control unit buttons will function as follows when the Mode switch of the remote control unit is set to VCR . ⢠When the input selector button having the same number as the input terminal connecting the VCR is pressed, the VCR can be operated using 1 to 8 . ⢠VCR made by other manufacturers and not preset can also be operated using the remote control unit if 1 to 8 have learned the functions. See page 62. 1 CH / â P ress to select the channel of the TV tuner on the VCR . 2 î (PLA Y) Selects playback. 3 î (REW) R ewinds the tape and allows picture search. 4 SOURCE T urns the power of the VCR on and off . 5 î (P AUSE/STILL) Sets pauses and still pictures. 6 î (FF) Rapidly advances the tape and allows picture search. 7 î (REC) Starts recording. 8 î (STOP) Stop tape transport. ⢠The color-highlighted buttons on the remote control can learn the control signal from another deviceâÂÂs remote control. Mode switch (with â VCRâ selected)
13 Useful Remote Contr ol Features 68 En Mode switch (with âÂÂDVD/ DVRâ selected) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 DVD/DVR control buttons When the DVD/DVR is preset by the learning function of the remote control, the remote control unit buttons will function as follows when the Mode switch of the remote control unit is set to DVD/DVR . ⢠When the input selector button having the same number as the input terminal connecting a DVD player or DVD recorder is pressed, these players can be operated using 1 to 12 . ⢠DVD players or DVD recorders made by other manufacturers and not preset can also be operated using the remote control unit if 1 to 12 have learned the functions. See page 62. 1 CH / â (DVD r ecorder only) P ress to change the channel of the tuner built in the DVD recorder . 2 RETURN When the DVD menu is in display , press to restore the immediately previous screen . 3 î (PLA Y) Selects playback. 4 î (SCAN)/î (CHAPTER SEARCH) Continue pressing to go backward. P ressing quickly once takes you to the start of the chapter currently playing. Each time you press it, you move back to the start of the previous chapter . 5 SOURCE T urns the power of the DVD player or DVD recorder on and off . 6 î (P AUSE/STILL) Sets pauses and still pictures. 7S A T/DVD MENU (DVD, DVD recor der) When this button is pressed, the DVD menu will appear . 8 ENTER, / / / (DVD, DVD recor der) ENTER :P ress to activate the selected function . / / / :P ress the button to select items on the DVD MENU screen. 9 DVD TOP MENU (DVD, DVD r ecorder) When this button is pressed, the DVD top menu will appear . 10 î (SCAN)/î (CHAPTER SEARCH) Continue pressing for fast forward. P ressing quickly once takes you to the start of the next chapter . Each time you press it, you move ahead to the start of the next chapter . 11 î (REC) Starts recording. 12 î (STOP) Playback stops when pressing once. W ith some DVD players or DVD recorders, pressing the button twice may open the disc tray . 11, 12 REC STOP P ress and hold î , and then press this button to stop recording. This operation is true of only P ioneer DVD recorders. ⢠The DVD player or DVD recorder cannot be selected at the same time. ⢠The color-highlighted buttons on the remote control can learn the control signal from another deviceâÂÂs remote control.
14 Appendix English 69 En Problem P ossible Solution ⢠No po wer . â¢G r een and red r ectangles appear on the screen alt ernat ely . ⢠The s yst em cannot be oper at ed. â¢R emot e control unit doe s not oper ate. ⢠No image and audio is pr esent ed. ⢠No pictur e. ⢠Audio is output but no image is pre sent ed. ⢠Images ar e present ed but no audio is output. ⢠Sound is r ev ersed bet ween the right and left. ⢠Sound is output fr om only a single speaker . ⢠Pictur e is cut off. ⢠Str ange color , light color , dark or color misalignment. â¢P ow er is suddenly turned off . â¢P anel sounds / noises Tr oubleshooting Code Message Check SD0 4 P ow ering off. Int ernal temper atur e t oo high. Check if the ambient temper atur e of the Plasma Displa y is high. Check t emper atur e ar ound PDP . SD0 5 P ow ering off. Int ernal pro tection cir cuits activa ted, Check the speak er cable connections bet ween the Plasma Displa y Is ther e a short in speaker cable? and the speaker s. SD1 1 P ow ering off. Int ernal temper ature t oo high. Check if the ambient t emper atur e of the Media Receiv er is high. Check t emper atur e ar ound media receiv er . ⢠Mak e sure the Pla sma Displa y and the Media Receiv er are connect ed correctly . (See page 1 8.) ⢠Is the po wer cor d disconnected? (See page 2 3.) â¢H as the main pow er been turned on? (See page 2 4.) ⢠Check if y ou pre ssed TV on the r emot e control unit. (See page 2 4.) If the indicat or on the sy st em lights up r ed, pre ss TV . ⢠Check if the s yst em cable has been disconnect ed or almost disconnected? (See page 1 8.) ⢠Ext ernal influences such as lightning, st atic electricit y , etc., ma y cause improper oper ation. In this case, oper at e the s yst em after fir st turning the power of the Pla sma Displa y and the Media Receiv er , or unplug ging the pow er cord and r e-plug ging it in after 1or 2 min ut es. ⢠Is the Mode switch se t correctly? Slide it t o the TV set ting position. (See page 1 4.) â¢A re bat teries insert ed with polarit y ( , âÂÂ) aligned? (See page 2 0.) â¢A re bat teries w orn out? (Replace with ne w bat terie s.) (See page 2 0.) ⢠Oper at e the remo t e control unit while pointing it t ow ard the r emote contr ol sensor on the Plasma Displa y . (See page 2 0.) â¢A re you using it under str ong or fluorescent lighting? ⢠Is a fluor escent light illuminat ed near the remo te contr ol sensor? ⢠Check if the input sour ce for video or PC has been unint entionally select ed although you w ant t o wa tch a TV channel. (See page 2 5.) ⢠Check if y ou ha ve activ at ed the Par ental Contr ol function. (See page 3 3.) Ent er a passw ord t o tempor arily cancel the P arent al Control function. (See page 3 7 .) ⢠Is connection t o other components corr ect? (See pages 5 0 t o 5 8.) ⢠Is a non-compa tible PC signal being input? (See page 5 8.) ⢠Is picture adjustment corr ect? (See page 4 1.) ⢠Check if y ou ha ve select ed âÂÂPicture Off â for Ener gy Sav e. W ith this option select ed, the scr een is deactiva ted; onl y audio is output. T o re st ore the scr een display , pre ss any but t on other than V OL /â and MUTING . (See page 44.) ⢠Check if y ou ha ve select ed the minimum volume. (See page 2 6.) ⢠Check if y ou ha ve mut ed sound. (See page 2 6.) ⢠When using a video or PC input sour ce, check that the audio terminal is also in connection. (See pages 5 0 to 5 4 and 5 8.) ⢠Check if the speak er cable connections ha ve been r ever sed bet ween the right and left or if the speak er cable from either speak er has been disconnect ed. (See pages 1 2 and 1 8.) â¢H as the balance been corr ectly adjust ed? (See page 4 3.) ⢠Is the image position corr ect? (See page 4 5.) ⢠Has the corr ect screen size been select ed? (See page 4 6.) â¢A djust the picture t one. (See page 4 1.) ⢠Is the r oom too bright? The pictur e may look dark in a r oom that is t oo bright. ⢠Is the sleep timer set? (See page 4 0.) ⢠Check the po wer contr ol set ting. (See page 4 4.) ⢠The s y stemâ s internal t emper ature has incr eased. Remo ve an y objects blocking v ent or clean. (See pages 1 5 and 1 6.) â¢P anel genera ted sounds, e xamples: F an mot or noise, Electrical Circuit Humming / Glass P anel buzzing are normal oper ation of a phosphor -based matrix displa y .
14 Appendix 70 En The video program that you watch may be high definition (HD) or standard definition (SD). This Plasma Display is designed to sc ale to each type of definition properly . If the video programâÂÂs definition type changes while a menu window is displayed on the screen (for example: HD âÂÂSD or SD â HD), the menu size may temporarily shrink or enlarge until the scaling is completed. This may happen, for example, when you switch between television and an external digital video recorder (D- VHS), or when your recorded program switches between different definition types, while the on-screen menu is being shown . If this happens, the menu will return to its normal size after two to three seconds. This action is normal, and does not indicate a problem with your Plasma Display system.
14 Appendix English 71 En This product in part uses âÂÂOpenSSL â sof tware. To the e xtent the OpenSSL sof tware is being used, the following notification applies: Copyright (c) 1998-2004 The OpenSSL P roject. All rights reser ved. R edistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met: 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer . 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution. 3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following acknowledgment: âÂÂThis produc t includes software developed by the OpenSSL P roject for use in the OpenSSL T oolkit. (http://www .openssl.org/)â 4. The names âÂÂOpenSSL T oolkitâ and âÂÂOpenSSL P rojectâ must not be used to endorse or promote products derived from this sof tware without prior written permission. F or written permission, please contact openssl-core@openssl.org. 5. P roducts derived from this software may not be called âÂÂOpenSSL â nor may âÂÂOpenSSL â appear in their names without prior written permission of the OpenSSL P roject. 6. Redistributions of any form whatsoever must retain the following acknowledgment: âÂÂThis product includes software developed by the OpenSSL P roject for use in the OpenSSL T oolkit (http://www .openssl.org/)â THIS SOF TW ARE IS PROVIDED BY THE OpenSSL PROJECT â AS ISâ AND ANY EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED W ARRANTIES, INCL UDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO , THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANT ABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A P ARTICUL AR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE OpenSSL PROJECT OR ITS CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT , INDIRECT , INCIDENT AL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY , OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCL UDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO , PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; L OSS OF USE, DA T A, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY , WHETHER IN CONTRACT , STRICT LIABILITY , OR TORT (INCL UDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY W AY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. This product includes cr yptographic software written by Eric Y oung (eay@cr yptsof t.com). This product includes software written by T im Hudson (tjh@cryptsof t.com). Original SSLeay License Copyright (C) 1995-1998 Eric Y oung (eay@cr yptsoft.com) All rights reser ved. This package is an SSL implementation written by Eric Y oung (eay@cr yptsoft.com). The implementation was written so as to confor m with Netscapes SSL. This librar y is free for commercial and non-commercial use as long as the following conditions are aheared to. The following co nditions apply to all code found in this distribution, be it the RC4, RSA, lhash, DES, etc., code; not just the SSL code. The SSL docume ntation included with this distribution is covered by the same copyright terms except that the holder is T im Hudson (tjh@cr yptsof t.com) . Copyright remains Eric Y oungâÂÂs, and as such any Copyright notices in the code are not to be removed. If this package is used in a product, Eric Y oung should be given attribution as the author of the parts of the library used. This can be in the form of a te xtual message at program startup or in documentation (online or textual) provided with the package. R edistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met: 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer . 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution. 3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following acknowledgement: âÂÂThis produ ct includes cr yptographic software written by Eric Y oung (eay@cr yptsoft.com)â The word âÂÂcr yptographicâ can be lef t out if the roui nes from the librar y being used are not cr yptographic related :-). 4. If you include any W indows specific code (or a derivative thereof) from the apps director y (application code) you must include an acknowledgement: âÂÂThis product includes sof tware written by Tim Hudson (tjh@cryptsof t.com)â THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY ERIC Y OUNG â AS ISâ AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED W ARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO , THE IMPLIED W ARRANTIES OF MERCHANT ABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A P ARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT , INDIRECT , INCIDENT AL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY , OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCL UDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; L OSS OF USE, DA T A, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY , WHETHER IN CONTRACT , STRICT LIABILITY , OR TORT (INCL UDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY W A Y OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOF TW ARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. The licence and distribution terms for any publically available version or derivative of this code cannot be changed. i.e. this code cannot simply be copied and put under another distribution licence [including the GNU P ublic Licence.]
14 Appendix 72 En Linux Source Notice The P ioneer Plasma T elevision integrated with the Media Receiver in part is powered by utilizes the Linux operation system. The machine readable copy of the corresponding source code is available for the cost of distribution . T o obtain a copy , please visi t http://www .pioneerelectronics.com/ for more information. GNU General Public License V ersion 2, June 1991 Copyright (C) 1989, 1991 F ree Sof tware F oundation, Inc. 59 T emple Place - Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307, USA Ever yone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies of this license document, but changing it is not allowed. Preamble The licenses for most software are designed to take away your freedom to share and change it. By contrast, the GNU General P ubl ic License is intended to guarantee your freedom to share and change free softwareâÂÂto make sure the software is free for all its u sers. This General P ublic License applies to most of the F ree Sof tware Foundation âÂÂs sof tware and to any other program whose authors commit to using it. (Some other F ree Sof tware F oundation sof tware is covered by the GNU Librar y General P ublic License instead.) Y ou can apply it to your programs, too. When we speak of free software, we are referring to freedom, not price. Our General P ublic Licenses are designed to make sure t hat you have the freedom to distribute copies of free software (and charge for this ser vice if you wish), that you receive source code or can get it if you want it, that you can change the software or use pieces of it in new free programs; and that you know you can do these things. To protect your rights, we need to make restrictions that forbid anyone to deny you these rights or to ask you to surrender the rights. These restrictions translate to certain responsibilities for you if you distribute copies of the software, or if you modify it. F or example, if you distribute copies of such a program, whether gratis or for a fee, you must give the recipients all the rights that you have. Y ou must make sure that they , too, receive or can get the source code. And you must show them these terms so they know th eir rights. We protect your rights with two steps: (1) copyright the software, and (2) offer you this license which gives you legal permission to copy , distribute and/or modify the sof tware. Also, for each author âÂÂs protection and ours, we want to make certain that ever yone understands that there is no warranty for this free software. If the sof tware is modified by someone else and passed on, we want its recipients to know that what they have is not the original, so that any problems introduced by others will not reflect on the original authorsâ reputations. F inally , any free program is threatened constantly by sof tware patents. W e wish to avoid the danger that redistributors of a free program will individually obtain patent licenses, in effect making the program proprietar y . T o prevent this, we have made it clear that any patent must be licensed for ever yoneâÂÂs free use or not licensed at all. The precise terms and conditions for copying, distribution and modification follow . GNU General Public License TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR COPYING, DISTRIBUTION AND MODIFICA TION 0. This License applies to any program or other work which contains a notice placed by the copyright holder saying it may be dis tributed under the terms of this General P ublic License. The âÂÂProgramâÂÂ, below , refers to any such program or work, and a âÂÂwork based on the P rogramâ means either the P rogram or any derivative work under copyright law : that is to say , a work containing the Program or a portion of it, either verbatim or with modifications and/or translated into another language. (Hereinafter , translation is included without limitation in the term âÂÂmodificationâÂÂ.) Each licensee is addressed as âÂÂyouâÂÂ. Activities other than copying, distribution and modification are not covered by this License; they are outside its scope. The act of running the P rogram is not restricted, and the output from the P rogram is covered only if its contents constitute a work based on the P rogram (independent of having been made by running the P rogram). Whether that is true depends on what the Program does. 1. Y ou may copy and distribute verbatim copies of the P rogramâÂÂs source code as you receive it, in any medium, provided that you conspicuously and appropriately publish on each copy an appropriate copyright notice and disclaimer of warranty ; keep intact al l the notices that refer to this License and to the absence of any warranty ; and give any other recipients of the Program a copy of this License along with the P rogram. Y ou may charge a fee for the physical act of transferring a copy , and you may at your option offer warranty protection in excha nge for a fee. 2. Y ou may modify your copy or copies of the Program or any portion of it, thus forming a work based on the P rogram, and copy an d distribute such modifications or work under the terms of Section 1 above, provided that you also meet all of these conditions: a) Y ou must cause the modified files to carr y prominent notices stating that you changed the files and the date of any change. b) Y ou must cause any work that you distribute or publish, that in whole or in part contains or is derived from the Program or a ny part thereof , to be licensed as a whole at no charge to all third parties under the terms of this License. c) If the modified program normally reads commands interactively when run , you must cause it, when started running for such interactive use in the most ordinar y way , to print or display an announcement including an appropriate copyright notice and a notice that there is no warranty (or else, saying that you provide a warranty) and that users may redistribute the program unde r these conditions, and telling the user how to view a copy of this License.
14 Appendix English 73 En (Exception: if the P rogram itself is interactive but does not normally print such an announcement, your work based on the P rogr am is not required to print an announcement.) These requirements apply to the modified work as a whole. If identifiable sections of that work are not derived from the P rogra m, and can be reasonably considered independent and separate works in themselves, then this License, and its terms, do not apply t o those sections when you distribute them as separate works. But when you distribute the same sections as part of a whole which i s a work based on the P rogram, the distribution of the whole must be on the terms of this License, whose permissions for other licensees extend to the entire whole, and thus to each and ever y part regardless of who wrote it. Thus, it is not the intent of this section to claim rights or contest your rights to work written entirely by you; rather , the intent is to exercise the right to control the distribution of derivative or collective works based on the P rogram. In addition, mere aggregation of another work not based on the P rogram with the P rogram (or with a work based on the P rogram) on a volume of a storage or distribution medium does not bring the other work under the scope of this License. 3. Y ou may copy and distribute the P rogram (or a work based on it, under Section 2) in object code or executable form under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above provided that you also do one of the following: a) Accompany it with the complete corresponding machine-readable source code, which must be distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a medium customarily used for software interchange; or , b) Accompany it with a written offer , valid for at least three years, to give any third party , for a charge no more than your cost of physically per forming source distribution, a complete machine-readable copy of the corresponding source code, to be distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a medium customarily used for software interchange; or , c) Accompany it with the information you received as to the offer to distribute corresponding source code. (This alternative is allowed only for noncommercial distribution and only if you received the program in object code or executable form with such an offer , in accord with Subsection b above.) The source code for a work means the preferred form of the work for making modifications to it. F or an executable work, complet e source code means all the source code for all modules it contains, plus any associated interface definition files, plus the scr ipts used to control compilation and installation of the executable. However , as a special exception, the source code distributed ne ed not include anything that is normally distributed (in either source or binary form) with the major components (compiler , kernel, and so on) of the operating system on which the executable runs, unless that component itself accompanies the executable. If distribution of executable or object code is made by offering access to copy from a designated place, then offering equivale nt access to copy the source code from the same place counts as distribution of the source code, even though third parties are not compelled to copy the source along with the object code. 4. Y ou may not copy , modif y , sublicense, or distribute the Program except as expressly provided under this License. Any attempt otherwise to copy , modif y , sublicense or distribute the Program is void, and will automatically terminate your rights under thi s License. However , parties who have received copies, or rights, from you under this License will not have their licenses terminated so long as such parties remain in full compliance. 5. Y ou are not required to accept this License, since you have not signed it. However , nothing else grants you permission to modif y or distribute the P rogram or its derivative works. These actions are prohibited by law if you do not accept this License. Therefore, by modifying or distributing the Program (or any work based on the P rogram), you indicate your acceptance of this License to do so , and all its terms and conditions for copying, distributing or modifying the P rogram or works based on it. 6. Each time you redistribute the P rogram (or any work based on the P rogram), the recipient automatically receives a license from the original licensor to copy , distribute or modif y the P rogram subject to these terms and conditions. Y ou may not impose any furth er restrictions on the recipientsâ exercise of the rights granted herein. Y ou are not responsible for enforcing compliance by thir d parties to this License. 7. If , as a consequence of a court judgment or allegation of patent infringement or for any other reason (not limited to patent issues), conditions are imposed on you (whether by court order , agreement or other wise) that contradict the conditions of this License, they do not excuse you from the conditions of this License. If you cannot distribute so as to satisfy simultaneously your obligation s under this License and any other pertinent obligations, then as a consequence you may not distribute the P rogram at all. For example, if a patent license would not permit royalty-free redistribution of the P rogram by all those who receive copies directly or indirectly through you, then the only way you could satisfy both it and this License would be to refrain entirely from distribution of the P rogram. If any portion of this section is held invalid or unenforceable under any particular circumstance, the balance of the section i s intended to apply and the section as a whole is intended to apply in other circumstances. It is not the purpose of this section to induce you to infringe any patents or other property right claims or to contest validity of any such claims; this section has the sole purpose of protecting the integrity of the free software distribution system, which is i mplemented by public license practices. Many people have made generous contributions to the wide range of software distributed through tha t system in reliance on consistent application of that system; it is up to the author/donor to decide if he or she is willing to distribute software through any other system and a licensee cannot impose that choice. This section is intended to make thoroughly clear what is believed to be a consequence of the rest of this License. 8. If the distribution and/or use of the P rogram is restricted in certain countries either by patents or by copyrighted inter faces, the original copyright holder who places the P rogram under this License may add an explicit geographical distribution limitation excluding those countries, so that distribution is permitted only in or among countries not thus excluded. In such case, this License incorporates the limitation as if written in the body of this License.
14 Appendix 74 En 9. The F ree Sof tware F oundation may publish revised and/or new versions of the General P ublic License from time to time. Such ne w versions will be similar in spirit to the present version, but may differ in detail to address new problems or concerns. Each version is given a distinguishing version number . If the Program specifies a version number of this License which applies to it and âÂÂany later versionâÂÂ, you have the option of following the terms and conditions either of that version or of any later ve rsion published by the F ree Sof tware F oundation. If the P rogram does not specif y a version number of this License, you may choose any version ever published by the F ree Sof tware F oundation. 10. If you wish to incorporate parts of the P rogram into other free programs whose distribution conditions are different, write to the author to ask for permission. F or sof tware which is copyrighted by the F ree Sof tware F oundation, write to the F ree Software Fou ndation; we sometimes make exceptions for this. Our decision will be guided by the two goals of preserving the free status of all deriva tives of our free software and of promoting the sharing and reuse of sof tware generally . NO WARRANTY 11. BECA USE THE PROGRAM IS LICENSED FREE OF CHARGE, THERE IS NO W ARRANTY FOR THE PROGRAM, TO THE EXTENT PERMIT TED BY APPLICABLE LAW . EXCEPT WHEN OTHERWISE ST A TED IN WRITING THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND/OR OTHER P ARTIES PROVIDE THE PROGRAM â AS ISâ WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCL UDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO , THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANT ABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A P ARTICUL AR PURPOSE. THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QU ALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE PROGRAM IS WITH YOU. SHOULD THE PROGRAM PROVE DEFECTIVE, YOU ASSUME THE COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING, REP AIR OR CORRECTION. 12. IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LA W OR AGREED TO IN WRITING WILL ANY COPYRIGHT HOLDER , OR ANY OTHER P ARTY WHO MA Y MODIFY AND/OR REDISTRIBUTE THE PROGRAM AS PERMIT TED ABOVE, BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR DAMAGES, INCL UDING ANY GENERAL, SPECIAL, INCIDENT AL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE PROGRAM (INCL UDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOSS OF DA T A OR DA T A BEING RENDERED INACCURA TE OR L OSSES SUST AINED BY YOU OR THIRD P ARTIES OR A FAIL URE OF THE PROGRAM TO OPERA TE WITH ANY OTHER PROGRAMS), EVEN IF SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER P ARTY HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS How to Apply These T erms to Y our New Programs If you develop a new program, and you want it to be of the greatest possible use to the public, the best way to achieve this is to make it free software which ever yone can redistribute and change under these terms. To do so, attach the following notices to the program. It is safest to attach them to the start of each source file to most eff ectively convey the exclusion of warranty ; and each file should have at least the âÂÂcopyrightâ line and a pointer to where the full notice is found. <one line to give the programâÂÂs name and an idea of what it does.> Copyright (C) yyyy name of author This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modif y it under the terms of the GNU General P ublic License as pu blished by the F ree Sof tware F oundation; either version 2 of the License, or (at your option) any later version. This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but WITHOUT ANY W ARRANTY ; without even the implied warranty of MERCHANT ABILITY or FITNESS FOR A P ARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU General Public License for more details. Y ou should have received a copy of the GNU General P ublic License along with this program; if not, write to the F ree Software F oundation, Inc., 59 T emple Place - Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307, USA. Also add information on how to contact you by electronic and paper mail. If the program is interactive, make it output a short notice like this when it starts in an interactive mode: Gnomovision version 69, Copyright (C) year name of author Gnomovision comes with ABSOL UTEL Y NO WARRANTY ; for details type âÂÂshow w âÂÂ. This is free software, and you are welcome to redistribute it under certain conditions; type âÂÂshow câ for details. The hypothetical commands âÂÂshow wâ and âÂÂshow câ should show the appropriate parts of the General P ublic License. Of course, the commands you use may be called something other than âÂÂshow wâ and âÂÂshow câÂÂ; they could even be mouse-clicks or menu itemsâ whatever suits your program. Y ou should also get your employer (if you work as a programmer) or your school, if any , to sign a âÂÂcopyright disclaimer â for th e program, if necessar y . Here is a sample; alter the names: Y oyodyne, Inc., hereby disclaims all copyright interest in the program âÂÂGnomovisionâ (which makes passes at compilers) written by James Hacker . signature of T y Coon, 1 April 1989 Ty Coon, P resident of Vice This General P ublic License does not permit incorporating your program into proprietar y programs. If your program is a subrouti ne librar y , you may consider it more useful to permit linking proprietar y applications with the librar y . If this is what you want to do, use the GNU Lesser General P ublic License instead of this License.
14 Appendix English 75 En GNU Lesser General Public License V ersion 2.1, February 1999 Copyright (C) 1991, 1999 F ree Sof tware F oundation, Inc. 59 T emple Place, Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307, USA Ever yone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies of this license document, but changing it is not allowed. [This is the first released version of the Lesser GPL. It also counts as the successor of the GNU Library Public License, version 2, hence the version number 2.1.] Preamble The licenses for most software are designed to take away your freedom to share and change it. By contrast, the GNU General P ubl ic Licenses are intended to guarantee your freedom to share and change free softwareâÂÂto make sure the software is free for all its users. This license, the Lesser General P ublic License, applies to some specially designated software packagesâÂÂtypically librariesâÂÂof the F ree Sof tware Foundation and other authors who decide to use it. Y ou can use it too, but we suggest you first think carefully a bout whether this license or the ordinar y General P ublic License is the better strategy to use in any particular case, based on the explanations below . When we speak of free software, we are referring to freedom of use, not price. Our General P ublic Licenses are designed to make sure that you have the freedom to distribute copies of free software (and charge for this ser vice if you wish); that you receive source code or can get it if you want it; that you can change the software and use pieces of it in new free programs; and that you are informed that you can do these things. To protect your rights, we need to make restrictions that forbid distributors to deny you these rights or to ask you to surrender these rights. These restrictions translate to certain responsibilities for you if you distribute copies of the library or if you modi fy it. F or example, if you distribute copies of the librar y , whether gratis or for a fee, you must give the recipients all the rights that we gave you. Y ou must make sure that they , too, receive or can get the source code. If you link other code with the library , you must p rovide complete object files to the recipients, so that they can relink them with the library af ter making changes to the librar y and recompiling it. And you must show them these terms so they know their rights. We protect your rights with a two-step method: (1) we copyright the librar y, and (2) we offer you this license, which gives you legal permission to copy , distribute and/or modif y the librar y . To protect each distributor , we want to make it ver y clear that there is no warranty for the free librar y . Also, if the library is modified by someone else and passed on, the recipients should know that what they have is not the original version , so that the original au thor âÂÂs reputation will not be affected by problems that might be introduced by others. F inally , software patents pose a constant threat to the existence of any free program. W e wish to make sure that a company cann ot effectively restrict the users of a free program by obtaining a restrictive license from a patent holder . Therefore, we insist that any patent license obtained for a version of the library must be consistent with the full freedom of use specified in this license. Most GNU software, including some libraries, is covered by the ordinar y GNU General P ublic License. This license, the GNU Lesse r General P ublic License, applies to certain designated libraries, and is quite different from the ordinary General Public License. W e use this license for certain libraries in order to permit linking those libraries into non-free programs. When a program is linked with a librar y , whether statically or using a shared librar y , the combination of the two is legally speaking a combined work, a derivative of the original library. The ordinary General Public License therefore permits such linking only if the entire combination fits its criteria of freedom. The Lesser General P ublic License permits more lax criteria for linking other code with the librar y . We call this license the âÂÂLesser â General P ublic License because it does Less to protect the user âÂÂs freedom than the ordinar y G eneral P ublic License. It also provides other free software developers Less of an advantage over competing non-free programs. These disadvantages are the reason we use the ordinar y General P ublic License for many libraries. However , the Lesser license provide s advantages in certain special circumstances. F or example, on rare occasions, there may be a special need to encourage the widest possible use of a certain library, so that it becomes a de-facto standard. T o achieve this, non-free programs must be allowed to use the librar y . A more frequent case is that a free librar y does the same job as widely used non-free libraries. In this case, there is little to gain by limiting the free librar y to free software only , so we use the Lesser General P ublic License. In other cases, permission to use a particular librar y in non-free programs enables a greater number of people to use a large body of free software. For example, permission to use the GNU C Library in non-free programs enables many more people to use the whole GNU operating system, as well as its variant, the GNU/Linux operating system. Although the Lesser General P ublic License is Less protective of the usersâ freedom, it does ensure that the user of a program that is linked with the Librar y has the freedom and the wherewithal to run that program using a modified version of the Librar y . The precise terms and conditions for copying, distribution and modification follow . P ay close attention to the difference between a â work based on the librar y â and a â work that uses the librar y âÂÂ. The former contains code derived from the library, whereas the latter must be combined with the librar y in order to run.
14 Appendix 76 En GNU Lesser General Public License TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR COPYING, DISTRIBUTION AND MODIFICA TION 0. This License Agreement applies to any software librar y or other program which contains a notice placed by the copyright holder or other authorized party saying it may be distributed under the terms of this Lesser General P ublic License (also called âÂÂthis Li censeâÂÂ). Each licensee is addressed as âÂÂyouâÂÂ. A âÂÂlibrar yâ means a collection of sof tware functions and/or data prepared so as to be conveniently linked with application prog rams (which use some of those functions and data) to form executables. The âÂÂLibrar yâÂÂ, below , refers to any such sof tware librar y or work which has been distributed under these terms. A âÂÂwork based on the Librar y â means either the Librar y or any derivative work under copyright law : that is to say , a work containing the Librar y or a portion of it, either verbatim or with modifications and/or translated straightforwardly into another language. (Hereinaf ter , t ranslation is included without limitation in the term âÂÂmodificationâÂÂ.) âÂÂSource codeâ for a work means the preferred form of the work for making modifications to it. F or a librar y , complete source co de means all the source code for all modules it contains, plus any associated interface definition files, plus the scripts used to control compilation and installation of the librar y . Activities other than copying, distribution and modification are not covered by this License; they are outside its scope. The act of running a program using the Librar y is not restricted, and output from such a program is covered only if its contents constitute a work based on the Librar y (independent of the use of the Librar y in a tool for writing it). Whether that is true depends on what the Librar y does and what the program that uses the Librar y does. 1. Y ou may copy and distribute verbatim copies of the Librar yâÂÂs complete source code as you receive it, in any medium, provided that you conspicuously and appropriately publish on each copy an appropriate copyright notice and disclaimer of warranty ; keep intac t all the notices that refer to this License and to the absence of any warranty ; and distribute a copy of this License along with the Librar y . Y ou may charge a fee for the physical act of transferring a copy , and you may at your option offer warranty protection in excha nge for a fee. 2. Y ou may modify your copy or copies of the Librar y or any portion of it, thus forming a work based on the Librar y , and copy an d distribute such modifications or work under the terms of Section 1 above, provided that you also meet all of these conditions: a) The modified work must itself be a sof tware librar y . b) Y ou must cause the files modified to carr y prominent notices stating that you changed the files and the date of any change. c) Y ou must cause the whole of the work to be licensed at no charge to all third parties under the terms of this License. d) If a facility in the modified Library refers to a function or a table of data to be supplied by an application program that uses the facility , other than as an argument passed when the facility is invoked, then you must make a good faith effort to ensure that, in the event an application does not supply such function or table, the facility still operates, and performs whatever part of its purpose remains meaningful. (F or example, a function in a librar y to compute square roots has a purpose that is entirely well-defined independent of the ap plication. Therefore, Subsection 2d requires that any application-supplied function or table used by this function must be optional: if th e application does not supply it, the square root function must still compute square roots.) These requirements apply to the modi fied work as a whole. If identifiable sections of that work are not derived from the Library , and can be reasonably considered indep endent and separate works in themselves, then this License, and its terms, do not apply to those sections when you distribute them as separate works. But when you distribute the same sections as part of a whole which is a work based on the Library , the distribu tion of the whole must be on the terms of this License, whose permissions for other licensees extend to the entire whole, and thus t o each and ever y part regardless of who wrote it. Thus, it is not the intent of this section to claim rights or contest your rights to work written entirely by you; rather , the intent is to exercise the right to control the distribution of derivative or collective works based on the Library . In addition, mere aggregation of another work not based on the Library with the Librar y (or with a work based on the Librar y) on a volume of a storage or distribution medium does not bring the other work under the scope of this License. 3. Y ou may opt to apply the terms of the ordinar y GNU General P ublic License instead of this License to a given copy of the Libr ar y . T o do this, you must alter all the notices that refer to this License, so that they refer to the ordinary GNU General Public Licen se, version 2, instead of to this License. (If a newer version than version 2 of the ordinary GNU General Public License has appear ed, then you can specify that version instead if you wish.) Do not make any other change in these notices. Once this change is made in a given copy , it is irreversible for that copy , so the ordinar y GNU General P ublic License applies to all subsequent copies and derivative works made from that copy . This option is useful when you wish to copy part of the code of the Librar y into a program that is not a librar y . 4. Y ou may copy and distribute the Librar y (or a portion or derivative of it, under Section 2) in object code or executable form under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above provided that you accompany it with the complete corresponding machine-readable source code, which must be distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a medium customarily used for software interchange. If distribution of object code is made by offering access to copy from a designated place, then offering equivalent access to c opy the source code from the same place satisfies the requirement to distribute the source code, even though third parties are not compelled to copy the source along with the object code. 5. A program that contains no derivative of any portion of the Librar y , but is designed to work with the Librar y by being compiled or linked with it, is called a âÂÂwork that uses the Librar y âÂÂ. Such a work, in isolation, is not a derivative work of the Library , and therefore falls outside the scope of this License. However , linking a â work that uses the Librar y â with the Librar y creates an executable that is a derivative of the Librar y (because it contains portions of the Librar y), rather than a âÂÂwork that uses the librar y âÂÂ. The executable is therefore covered by this License. Section 6 states terms for distribution of such executables.
14 Appendix English 77 En When a âÂÂwork that uses the Librar y â uses material from a header file that is part of the Librar y , the object code for the work may be a derivative work of the Librar y even though the source code is not. Whether this is true is especially significant if the work can be linked without the Librar y , or if the work is itself a librar y . The threshold for this to be true is not precisely defined by l aw . If such an object file uses only numerical parameters, data structure layouts and accessors, and small macros and small inline functions (ten lines or less in length), then the use of the object file is unrestricted, regardless of whether it is legally a derivative work. (Executables containing this object code plus portions of the Librar y will still fall under Section 6.) Otherwise, if the work is a derivative of the Librar y, you may distribute the object code for the work under the terms of Section 6. Any executables containing that work also fall under Section 6, whether or not they are linked directly with the Library itself . 6. As an exception to the Sections above, you may also combine or link a âÂÂwork that uses the Librar y â with the Librar y to produce a work containing portions of the Librar y , and distribute that work under terms of your choice, provided that the terms permit modification of the work for the customer âÂÂs own use and reverse engineering for debugging such modifications. Y ou must give prominent notice with each copy of the work that the Librar y is used in it and that the Librar y and its use are c overed by this License. Y ou must supply a copy of this License. If the work during execution displays copyright notices, you must incl ude the copyright notice for the Librar y among them, as well as a reference directing the user to the copy of this License. Also, you must do one of these things: a) Accompany the work with the complete corresponding machine-readable source code for the Library including whatever changes were used in the work (which must be distributed under Sections 1 and 2 above); and, if the work is an executable linked with the Librar y , with the complete machine-readable â work that uses the Librar y âÂÂ, as object code and/or source code, so that the user can modify the Librar y and then relink to produce a modified executable containing the modified Librar y . (It is understood that the user who changes the contents of definitions files in the Library will not necessarily be able to recompile the applic ation to use the modified definitions.) b) Use a suitable shared library mechanism for linking with the Librar y . A suitable mechanism is one that (1) uses at run time a copy of the librar y already present on the user âÂÂs computer system, rather than copying librar y functions into the executable, and (2) will operate properly with a modified version of the librar y , if the user installs one, as long as the modified version is inter face-compatible with the version that the work was made with. c) Accompany the work with a written offer , valid for at least three years, to give the same user the materials specified in Sub section 6a, above, for a charge no more than the cost of performing this distribution. d) If distribution of the work is made by offering access to copy from a designated place, offer equivalent access to copy the a bove specified materials from the same place. e) V erif y that the user has already received a copy of these materials or that you have already sent this user a copy . F or an executable, the required form of the âÂÂwork that uses the Librar y â must include any data and utility programs needed for reproducing the executable from it. However , as a special exception, the materials to be distributed need not include anything that is normally distributed (in either source or binar y form) with the major components (compiler , kernel, and so on) of the operat ing system on which the executable runs, unless that component itself accompanies the executable. It may happen that this requirement contradicts the license restrictions of other proprietar y libraries that do not normally ac company the operating system. Such a contradiction means you cannot use both them and the Library together in an executable that you distribute. 7. Y ou may place librar y facilities that are a work based on the Librar y side-by-side in a single librar y together with other li brar y facilities not covered by this License, and distribute such a combined library, provided that the separate distribution of the work based on the Librar y and of the other librar y facilities is otherwise permitted, and provided that you do these two things: a) Accompany the combined library with a copy of the same work based on the Librar y , uncombined with any other librar y facilities. This must be distributed under the terms of the Sections above. b) Give prominent notice with the combined library of the fact that part of it is a work based on the Librar y, and explaining wh ere to find the accompanying uncombined form of the same work. 8. Y ou may not copy , modif y , sublicense, link with, or distribute the Librar y except as expressly provided under this License. A ny attempt otherwise to copy , modif y , sublicense, link with, or distribute the Librar y is void, and will automatically terminate y our rights under this License. However , parties who have received copies, or rights, from you under this License will not have thei r licenses terminated so long as such parties remain in full compliance. 9. Y ou are not required to accept this License, since you have not signed it. However , nothing else grants you permission to modif y or distribute the Librar y or its derivative works. These actions are prohibited by law if you do not accept this License. Therefore, by modifying or distributing the Librar y (or any work based on the Librar y), you indicate your acceptance of this License to do so, and all its terms and conditions for copying, distributing or modifying the Librar y or works based on it. 10. Each time you redistribute the Librar y (or any work based on the Librar y), the recipient automatically receives a license from the original licensor to copy , distribute, link with or modify the Librar y subject to these terms and conditions. Y ou may not impose any further restrictions on the recipientsâ exercise of the rights granted herein . Y ou are not responsible for enforcing compliance by third parties with this License. 11. If , as a consequence of a court judgment or allegation of patent infringement or for any other reason (not limited to patent issues), conditions are imposed on you (whether by court order , agreement or other wise) that contradict the conditions of this License, they do not excuse you from the conditions of this License. If you cannot distribute so as to satisfy simultaneously your obligation s under this License and any other pertinent obligations, then as a consequence you may not distribute the Library at all. F or example, if a patent license would not permit royalty-free redistribution of the Librar y by all those who receive copies directly or indirectly through you, then the only way you could satisfy both it and this License would be to refrain entirely from distribution of the Librar y .
14 Appendix 78 En If any portion of this section is held invalid or unenforceable under any particular circumstance, the balance of the section i s intended to apply , and the section as a whole is intended to apply in other circumstances. It is not the purpose of this section to induce you to infringe any patents or other property right claims or to contest validity of any such claims; this section has the sole purpose of protecting the integrity of the free software distribution system which is im plemented by public license practices. Many people have made generous contributions to the wide range of software distributed through tha t system in reliance on consistent application of that system; it is up to the author/donor to decide if he or she is willing to distribute software through any other system and a licensee cannot impose that choice. This section is intended to make thoroughly clear what is believed to be a consequence of the rest of this License. 12. If the distribution and/or use of the Library is restricted in certain countries either by patents or by copyrighted inter faces, the original copyright holder who places the Librar y under this License may add an explicit geographical distribution limitation ex cluding those countries, so that distribution is permitted only in or among countries not thus excluded. In such case, this License inc orporates the limitation as if written in the body of this License. 13. The F ree Sof tware Foundation may publish revised and/or new versions of the Lesser General P ublic License from time to time. Such new versions will be similar in spirit to the present version, but may differ in detail to address new problems or concern s. Each version is given a distinguishing version number . If the Librar y specifies a version number of this License which applies to it and âÂÂany later versionâÂÂ, you have the option of following the terms and conditions either of that version or of any later versi on published by the F ree Sof tware F oundation. If the Library does not specif y a license version number , you may choose any version ever published by the F ree Sof tware F oundation. 14. If you wish to incorporate parts of the Library into other free programs whose distribution conditions are incompatible with these, write to the author to ask for permission. F or software which is copyrighted by the Free Software F oundation, write to the F ree Software Foundation; we sometimes make exceptions for this. Our decision will be guided by the two goals of preserving the free status of all derivatives of our free software and of promoting the sharing and reuse of software generally . NO WARRANTY 15. BECA USE THE LIBRARY IS LICENSED FREE OF CHARGE, THERE IS NO W ARRANTY FOR THE LIBRARY , TO THE EXTENT PERMIT TED BY APPLICABLE LAW . EXCEPT WHEN OTHERWISE ST A TED IN WRITING THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND/OR OTHER P ARTIES PROVIDE THE LIBRARY â AS ISâ WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCL UDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO , THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANT ABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A P ARTICUL AR PURPOSE. THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QU ALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE LIBRARY IS WITH YOU. SHOULD THE LIBRARY PROVE DEFECTIVE, Y OU ASSUME THE COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING, REP AIR OR CORRECTION. 16. IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LA W OR AGREED TO IN WRITING WILL ANY COPYRIGHT HOLDER , OR ANY OTHER P ARTY WHO MA Y MODIFY AND/OR REDISTRIBUTE THE LIBRARY AS PERMIT TED ABOVE, BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR DAMAGES, INCL UDING ANY GENERAL, SPECIAL, INCIDENT AL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE LIBRARY (INCL UDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOSS OF DA T A OR DA T A BEING RENDERED INACCURA TE OR L OSSES SUST AINED BY YOU OR THIRD P ARTIES OR A FAIL URE OF THE LIBRARY TO OPERA TE WITH ANY OTHER SOF TWARE), EVEN IF SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER P ARTY HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS How to Apply These T erms to Y our New Libraries If you develop a new librar y , and you want it to be of the greatest possible use to the public, we recommend making it free software that ever yone can redistribute and change. Y ou can do so by permitting redistribution under these terms (or , alternatively, under the terms of the ordinar y General P ublic License). To apply these terms, attach the following notices to the library . It is safest to attach them to the start of each source file to most effectively convey the exclusion of warranty ; and each file should have at least the âÂÂcopyrightâ line and a pointer to where the full notice is found. <one line to give the librar yâÂÂs name and an idea of what it does.> Copyright (C) year name of author This librar y is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modif y it under the terms of the GNU Lesser General P ublic License as published by the F ree Sof tware F oundation; either version 2.1 of the License, or (at your option) any later version. This librar y is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but WITHOUT ANY W ARRANTY ; without even the implied warranty of MERCHANT ABILITY or FITNESS FOR A P ARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU Lesser General Public License for more details. Y ou should have received a copy of the GNU Lesser General P ublic License along with this librar y ; if not, write to the F ree Sof tware F oundation, Inc., 59 T emple Place, Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307, USA Also add information on how to contact you by electronic and paper mail. Y ou should also get your employer (if you work as a programmer) or your school, if any , to sign a âÂÂcopyright disclaimer â for the librar y , if necessar y . Here is a sample; alter the names: Y oyodyne, Inc., hereby disclaims all copyright interest in the library âÂÂFrobâ (a library for tweaking knobs) written by James R andom Hacker . signature of T y Coon, 1 April 1990 Ty Coon, P resident of Vice ThatâÂÂs all there is to it!
14 Appendix English 79 En Specifications It em 5 0"Plasma Displa y , Model: PR O-5 0 5PU 4 3" Plasma Display , Model: PR O-4 3 5PU Number of Pix els 1 2 80 à7 6 8 pixels 1 0 2 4 à7 6 8 pixels Audio Amplifier 1 3 W 1 3 W (1 kHz, 1 0 %, 8 ⦠)1 3 W 1 3 W (1 kHz, 1 0 %, 8 ⦠) Surr ound Sy stem SR S/FOCUS/T ruBass SR S/FOCUS/T ruBass Po w er Requir ement 1 2 0 V AC, 6 0 Hz, 3 6 3 W (0.2 W Standb y) 1 2 0 V AC, 6 0 Hz, 2 98 W (0.2 W St andby) Dimensions 1 2 7 0 (W) à7 3 7 (H) à9 3 (D) mm 1 1 2 0 (W) à6 5 2 (H) à9 3 (D) mm (5 0 (W) à2 9 (H) à3 11 /1 6 (D) inches) (44 1 /8 (W) à25 11 /1 6 (H) à3 11 /1 6 (D) inches) W eight 3 2.8 kg (7 2.3 lbs.) 2 6.8 kg (5 9.1 lbs.) It em Media R eceiver , Model: PR O-R0 5U R ecep tion Syst em (Digital) A TSC Digit al TV sy stem Circuit t ype 8VSB/6 4QAM/2 5 6QAM/QPSK demodulation T uner VHF/UHF VHF 2âÂÂ1 3ch, UHF 1 4âÂÂ6 9ch CA TV 2âÂÂ1 3 5ch Audio format Dolb y Digital R ecep tion Syst em (Analog) American TV st andard NTSC s yst em Circuit t ype V ideo signal det ection PLL full synchr onous det ection, PLL digital s ynthesizer sys t em T uner VHF/UHF VHF 2âÂÂ1 3ch, UHF 1 4âÂÂ6 9ch CA TV ANTENNA/CABLE A IN: 1âÂÂ1 3 5ch Cable: 1âÂÂ1 2 5ch Audio multiple x BTSC s yst em T erminals Rear ANTENNA/CABLE A IN 7 5 ⦠UNB AL, F T ype for DTV/VHF/UHF/CA TV in ANTENNA B 7 5 ⦠UNB AL, F T ype for VHF/UHF/CA TV in Loop out i.LINK (TS) S4 00 (2) INPUT 1 COMPONENT VIDEO in, S- VIDEO in, VIDEO in, AUDIO in, HDMI in INPUT 2 S- VIDEO in, VIDEO in, AUDIO in INPUT 3 COMPONENT VIDEO in, A UDIO in, HDMI in Monit or Out S- VIDEO out, VIDEO out, A UDIO out Digital Audio Output Optical (1) VCR Control Output 1 CONTR OL IN 1 CONTR OL OUT 1 Cable CARD P oint of Deplo yment Fr ont INPUT 4 COMPONENT VIDEO in, S- VIDEO in, VIDEO in, AUDIO in PC Analog R GB in, AUDIO in OSD English/Fr ench/Spanish Po w er Requir ement 1 2 0 V A C, 6 0 Hz, 4 3.3 W (3 1 W Standb y) Dimensions 4 2 0 (W) à90 (H) à2 9 5 (D) mm (1 6 9 /1 6 (W) à3 9 /1 6 (H) à11 10 /1 6 (D) inches) W eight 5.8 kg (1 2.8 lbs.) ⢠Design and specifications are subject to change without notice.
14 Appendix 80 En T rademarks ⢠FOCUS, WOW , SRS and symbol are trademarks of SRS Labs, Inc. FOCUS and WOW technologies are incorporated under license from SRS Labs, Inc. ⢠Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. âÂÂDolbyâ and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories. ⢠HDMI, the HDMI logo and High-Definition Multimedia Interface are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC. ⢠This product includes F ontAvenue î fonts licensed by NEC Corporation . FontAvenue is a registered trademark of NEC Corporation . ⢠âÂÂi.LINKâ and the âÂÂi.LINKâ logo are trademarks. ⢠DDC is a registered trademark of V ideo Electronics Standards Association. ⢠CableCARD is a trademark of Cable T elevision Laboratories, Inc. ⢠The names of the companies or institutions are trademarks or registered trademarks of the respective companies or institutions. Copyright protection ⢠This product incorporates copyright protection technology that is protected by U.S. patents and other intellectual property rights. Use of this copyright protection technology must be authorized by Macrovision Corporation , and is intended for home and other limited consumer uses only unless otherwise authorized by Macrovision. Reverse engineering or disassembly is prohibited. Published by Pioneer Corporation. Copyright é 2004 Pioneer Corporation. All rights reserved.
PIONEER CORPORATION 4-1, Meguro 1-Chome, Meguro-ku, Tokyo 153-8654, Japan PIONEER ELECTRONICS (USA) INC. P.O. BOX 1540, Long Beach, California 90810-1540, U.S.A. TEL: (800) 421-1404 PIONEER ELECTRONICS OF CANADA, INC. 300 Allstate Parkway, Markham, Ontario L3R OP2, Canada TEL: 1-877-283-5901 PIONEER EUROPE NV Haven 1087, Keetberglaan 1, B-9120 Melsele, Belgium TEL: 03/570.05.11 PIONEER ELECTRONICS ASIACENTRE PTE. LTD. 253 Alexandra Road, #04-01, Singapore 159936 TEL: 65-6472-7555 PIONEER ELECTRONICS AUSTRALIA PTY. LTD. 178-184 Boundary Road, Braeside, Victoria 3195, Australia, TEL: (03) 9586-6300 PIONEER ELECTRONICS DE MEXICO S.A. DE C.V. Blvd.Manuel A vila Camacho 138 10 piso Col.Lomas de Chapultepec, Me xico,D .F . 11000 TEL: 55-9178-4270 Published by Pioneer Corporation. Copyright é 2004 Pioneer Corporation. All rights reserved. <04H00001> Printed in Japan / Imprimé au Japon <ARB1566-A> Printed on recycled paper Imprimé sur papier recyclé
Read these instructions. K eep these instructions. Heed all warnings. F ollow all instructions. Do not use this apparatus near water . Clean only with dr y cloth. Do not bloc k any v entilation openings. Install in accordance with the manuf acturerâ s instructions. Do not install near any heat sources such as r adiators, heat registers , stov es, or other apparatus (including amplifiers) that produce heat. Do not def eat the safety purpose of the polarized or g rounding-type plug. A polarized plug has two b lades with one wider than the other . A grounding type plug has two b lades and a third grounding prong. The wide blade or the third prong are provided f or your safety . If the provided plug does not fit into your outlet, consult an electrician f or replacement of the obsolete outlet. Protect the power cord from being w alked on or pinched par ticularly at plugs, conv enience receptacles, and the point where the y exit from the apparatus. 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) 6) 7) 8) 9) 10) Only use attachments/accessories specified by the manuf acturer . Use only with the car t, stand, tripod, bracket, or table specified b y the manuf acturer , or sold with the apparatus. When a cart is used, use caution when moving the cart/apparatus combination to av oid injur y from tip-ov er . Unplug this apparatus during lightning stor ms or when unused f or long periods of time. Ref er all ser vicing to qualified ser vice personnel. Ser vicing is required when the apparatus has been damaged in any w ay , such as power-supply cord or plug is damaged, liquid has been spilled or objects hav e fallen into the apparatus , the apparatus has been e xposed to rain or moisture, does not operate normally , or has been dropped. 11) 12) 13) 14) Note to CA TV system installer . This reminder is pr ovided to call the CA TV system installerâ s attention to Article 820-40 of the NEC that provides guidelines for proper gr ounding and, in particular , specifies that the cable groundâÂÂshall be connected to the grounding system of the building, as close to the point of cable entry as practical.
English CAUTION: This product satisfies FCC regulations when shielded cables and connectors are used to connect the unit to other equipment. T o prevent electromagnetic inter fer- ence with electric appliances such as radios and televi- sions, use shielded cables and connectors for connec- tions. FEDERAL COMMUNICA TIONS COMMISSION DECLARA TION OF CONFORMITY This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Op- eration is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful inter ference, and (2) this device must accept any inter ference received, including inter ference that may cause undesired operation. P roduct Name: Plasma Display System (Plasma Display) (Media Receiver) Model Number: PRO-1120HD PRO-920HD (PRO-505PU) (PRO-435PU) (PRO-R05U) (PRO-R05U) P roduct Categor y : Class B Personal Computers & P eriph- erals R esponsible P arty Name: PIONEER ELECTRONICS (USA), INC., Customer Support Div . Address: P .O. BO X 1760, LONG BEACH , CA., 90801-1760 U.S.A. Phone: (800) 421-1625 F or Business Customer URL http://www .PioneerUSA.com IMPORT ANT NOTICE: The serial number for this equipment is located on the rear panel. Please write this serial number on your enclosed warranty card and keep it in a secure area. This is for your security . W ARNING: Be sure to plug this equipment into a grounding-type AC outlet. W ARNING: THE APP ARA TUS IS NOT W A TER- PROOFS, TO PREVENT FIRE OR SHOCK HAZARD, DO NOT EXPOSE THIS APPLIANCE TO RAIN OR MOISTURE AND DO NOT PUT ANY W A TER SOURCE NEAR THIS APP ARA TUS, SUCH AS V ASE, FL OWER POT , COSMET - ICS CONT AINER AND MEDICINE BOT TLE ETC. W ARNING: Handling the cord on this product or cords associated with accessories sold with the prod- uct will expose you to lead, a chemical known to the State of California and other governmental entities to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm. W ash hands after handling . NOTE: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a class B digital device, pur - suant to P art 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are de- signed to provide reasonable protection against harmful inter ference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful inter ference to radio communications. However , there is no guarantee that inter ference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful inter ference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turn- ing the equipment off and on , the user is encouraged to tr y to correct the inter ference by one or more of the fol- lowing measures: â Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. â Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver . â Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. â Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV tech- nician for help. Information to User Alteration or modifications carried out without appro- priate authorization may invalidate the user âÂÂs right to operate the equipment. [For Canadian model] This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003.
4 En Contents Thank you for buying this P ioneer product. Please read through these operating instructions so you will know how to operate your model properly . After you have finished reading the instructions, put them away in a safe place for future reference. In some countries or regions, the shape of the power plug and power outlet may sometimes differ from that shown in the explana- tor y drawings. However the method of connecting and operating the unit is the same. 01 Important User Guidance Information 02 Safety Precautions 03 Operational Precautions 04 Supplied Accessories Plasma Display ................................................................... 11 Media Receiver .................................................................... 11 05 Part Names Plasma Display ................................................................... 12 Media Receiver .................................................................... 12 R emote control unit ............................................................ 14 06 Preparation Installing the Plasma Display ............................................ 15 Installing the Media Receiver ............................................ 16 Installing the Media Receiver vertically ...................... 16 Connecting the system cable ............................................ 18 R outing cables .................................................................... 19 P reparing the remote control unit ..................................... 20 Inserting batteries ......................................................... 20 Cautions regarding batteries ....................................... 20 Allowed operation range of the remote control unit .................................................................... 20 Cautions regarding the remote control unit .............. 20 Cable connections for watching digital and/or conventional TV channels .................................................. 21 Connecting VHF/UHF antennas and a Cable Converter ....................................................................... 21 Cable connections for watching digital TV channels over air (VHF/UHF) ........................................ 21 Connecting VHF/UHF antennas .................................. 21 Switching between antenna A and B ............................... 22 Inserting the cable card ..................................................... 22 Connecting the power cord ............................................... 23 07 Basic Operations T urning on the power (Standby) ........................................ 24 T urning off the power (Standby) ........................................ 24 W atching TV channels ........................................................ 25 Selecting the antenna .................................................. 25 Changing channels ...................................................... 25 Changing the volume and sound ................................ 26 V iewing a channel banner ........................................... 26 Using the POD ser vice ................................................. 27 Changing the language ................................................ 27 Setting MTS/SAP mode ............................................... 27 Using the multiscreen functions ....................................... 28 Splitting the screen ...................................................... 28 F reezing images ............................................................ 29 08 Menu Setup Menu configuration ............................................................ 30 AV mode menus ............................................................ 30 PC mode menus ........................................................... 30 Menu operations ................................................................. 30 09 T uner Setup Setting up TV channels ...................................................... 31 Using Auto Channel P reset ......................................... 31 Setting for skipping unwanted channels .................... 31 Setting up TV channels manually ............................... 31 Naming TV channels .................................................... 32 Checking signal strength ............................................. 32 Checking the Cable Card ID ........................................ 32 Enabling data acquisition ............................................ 32 P arental Control .................................................................. 33 Changing the password ............................................... 33 Clearing the password ................................................. 34 Activating the P arental Control ................................... 34 Setting the voluntar y movie rating system (MP AA) .......................................................................... 34 Setting the TV ratings ................................................... 35 Setting the TV P arental Guidelines (TV Guidelines) ... 35 Blocking Not Rated TV programs ................................ 35 Canadian rating systems ............................................. 36 Setting Canadian English ratings ............................... 36 Setting Canadian F rench ratings ................................ 37 T emporarily deactivating the P arental Control ........... 37 Setting your favorite channels ........................................... 37 Setting up closed captions ................................................ 37 Activating the closed caption ...................................... 38 Selecting the type of conventional closed captions .. 38 Selecting digital closed captions ................................ 38 Selecting digital closed caption parameters ............. 38 Clock Setting ....................................................................... 39
Contents English 5 En 10 Adjustments and Settings Sleep Timer .......................................................................... 40 AV Selection ........................................................................ 40 P icture adjustments ........................................................... 41 P ro Adjust ...................................................................... 41 Color Management ....................................................... 42 Sound adjustments ............................................................ 43 FOCUS ........................................................................... 43 F ront Surround .............................................................. 43 P ower Control ...................................................................... 44 Energy Save ................................................................... 44 No Signal off (A V mode only) ....................................... 44 No Operation off (A V mode only) ................................. 44 P ower Management (PC mode only) .......................... 44 Adjusting image positions (A V mode only) ...................... 45 Adjusting image positions and clock automatically (PC mode only) .................................................................... 45 Adjusting image positions and clock manually (PC mode only) .................................................................... 45 Selecting a screen size ....................................................... 46 Changing the brightness at both sides of the screen (Side Mask) .......................................................................... 47 Language setting ................................................................ 47 11 Timer Presetting P resetting TV programs using the timer ........................... 48 P riority rules for overlapped presettings ........................... 49 12 Enjoying through External Equipment W atching a DVD image ...................................................... 50 Connecting a DVD player ............................................. 50 Displaying a DVD image .............................................. 50 W atching a VCR image ...................................................... 50 Connecting a VCR ........................................................ 50 Displaying a VCR image ............................................... 50 Using HDMI Input ............................................................... 51 Connecting HDMI equipment ..................................... 51 Enjoying a game console or watching camcorder images ................................................................................. 52 Connecting a game console or camcorder ................ 52 Displaying an image of the game console or camcorder ..................................................................... 52 Recording digital TV programs using a VCR or DVD recorder ....................................................................... 52 Avoiding unwanted feedback ...................................... 52 Connecting a recorder ................................................. 53 Connecting other audio equipment .................................. 53 Connecting an A V receiver .......................................... 53 W atching a D - VHS image ................................................... 54 What is i.LINK? .............................................................. 54 Which i.LINK devices are connectable? ..................... 54 What can be recorded through i.LINK? ...................... 54 Connecting D- VHS recorders ...................................... 54 When connecting a single D- VHS recorder ............... 54 When connecting two D- VHS recorders ..................... 54 Displaying a D- VHS image ................................................. 55 Useful and important notification ............................... 55 Setting up for controlling a D- VHS recorder .............. 56 Editing the i.LINK list .................................................... 56 Setting up for i.LINK standby ....................................... 57 Operating the control panel screen ............................ 57 W atching an image from a personal computer ............... 58 Connecting a personal computer ............................... 58 Displaying an image from a personal computer ....... 58 Computer compatibility chart ............................................ 58 Connecting the VCR controller .......................................... 59 The lists of controllable recording equipment manufactures ............................................ 60 Connecting control cords .................................................. 61 About SR .................................................................... 61 13 Useful Remote Control Featur es Learning function of the remote control unit ................... 62 Using the learning function ......................................... 62 P resetting manufacture codes .................................... 62 Manufacture codes ...................................................... 63 Using the remote control unit to control other devices ................................................................................. 64 R eceiver control buttons .............................................. 64 Cable control buttons ................................................... 65 SA T control buttons ...................................................... 66 VCR control buttons ..................................................... 67 DVD/DVR control buttons ............................................ 68 14 Appendix T roubleshooting .................................................................. 69 Specifications ...................................................................... 79
01 Important User Guidance Information 6 En In order to obtain maximum enjoyment from this P ioneer P ureVision PRO-1120HD/PRO-920HD Plasma Display System, please first read this information carefully . With the P ioneer PureV ision PRO -1120HD/PRO -920HD, you can be assured of a high quality Plasma Display System with long- life and high reliability . T o achieve images of exceptional quality , this P ioneer Plasma Display System incorporates state-of-the- art design and construction, as well as very precise and highly advanced technology . The P ioneer P ureVision PRO-1120HD/PRO-920HD incorporates the latest in color filter technology â 1 st Sur face P ure Color F ilter . This improves the color / picture reproduction of these models as compared to previous models. It also eliminates the need for a physical glass panel to be placed in front of the plasma panel, which furthers P ioneer âÂÂs continued goal of reducing environmental waste in consumer electronics, now during the manufacturing process and in the future during the recycling process. Over the course of its lifetime, the luminosity of the P ioneer PRO-1120HD/PRO -920HD Plasma Display System will diminish ver y slowly , such as with all phosphor-based screens (for example, a traditional tube-type television). T o enjoy beautiful and bright images on your P ioneer Plasma Display System for many years to come, please carefully read and follow the usage guidelines below . Usage guidelines All phosphor-based screens (including conventional tube-type televisions) can be affected by displaying static images for a prolonged period. Plasma Display Systems are no exception to this rule. After-image and permanent effects on the screen can be avoided by taking some basic precautions. By following the recommendations listed below , you can ensure longer and satisfactor y results from your plasma: ⢠Whenever possible, avoid frequently displaying the same image or virtually still moving pictures (e.g. closed-captioned images or video game images which have static portions). ⢠Avoid viewing the On Screen Display for extended periods, from a DVD player , VCR , and all other components. ⢠Do not leave the same picture freeze-framed or paused continuously over a long period of time, when using the still picture mode from a TV , VCR , DVD player or any other component. ⢠Images which have both very bright areas and ver y dark areas side by side should not be displayed for a prolonged period of time. ⢠When playing a game, the âÂÂGAMEâ mode setting within â A V Selectionâ is strongly recommended. However , please limit its use to less than 2 hours at a time. â¢A f ter playing a game, or displaying a PC image or any still image, it is best to view a normal moving picture in the âÂÂWIDEâ or âÂÂFULL â screen setting for over 3 times longer than the previous still/moving image. â¢A f ter using the Plasma Display System, always switch the display to âÂÂST ANDBYâ mode. Installation guidelines The P ioneer P ureVision PRO-1120HD/PRO-920HD Plasma Display System incorporates a ver y thin design. T o ensure safety , please take the proper measures to mount or install the Plasma Display , in order to prevent the unit from tipping over in the event of vibration or accidental movement. This product should be installed by using only parts and accessories designed by PIONEER . Use of accessories other than the PIONEER stand or installation bracket may result in instability , and could cause injur y. F or custom installation, please consult the dealer where the unit was purchased. T o ensure correct installation, experienced and qualified experts must install the unit. PIONEER will not be held responsible for accident or damage caused by the use of parts and accessories manufactured by other companies. To avoid malfunction and overheating when installing, make sure that the vents on the main unit are not blocked. T o ensure proper heat emission: ⢠Distance the unit slightly from other equipment, walls, etc. F or the minimum space required around the unit, see pages 15 to 16. ⢠Do not fit the unit inside narrow spaces where ventilation is poor . ⢠Do not cover with a cloth, etc. ⢠Clean the vents on the sides and rear of the unit to remove dust build-up by using a vacuum cleaner set to its lowest suction setting. ⢠Do not place the product on a carpet or blanket. ⢠Do not leave the product tilted over except the case of vertical installation of the Media Receiver . ⢠Do not reverse the product. Using the unit without proper ventilation may cause the internal temperature to rise, and could result in possible malfunction. When the surrounding or internal temperature exceeds a certain degree, the display will automatically power off in order to cool the internal electronics and prevent a hazardous occurrence. Malfunction can be caused by many factors: inappropriate installation site, improper assembly/installation/mounting, improper operation of or modifications made to this product. However , PIONEER cannot be held responsible for accidents or malfunction caused by the above. The following are typical effects and characteristics of a phosphor-based matrix display and as such, are not covered by the manufacturer âÂÂs limited warranties: â¢P ermanent residual images upon the phosphors of the panel. ⢠The existence of a minute number of inactive light cells. â¢P anel generated sounds, examples: F an motor noise, and electrical circuit humming / glass panel buzzing
01 Important User Guidance Information English 7 En Panel sticking and after-image lag ⢠Displaying the same images such as still images for a long time may cause after-image lagging. This may occur in the following two cases. 1. A f ter-image lagging due to r emaining electric load When image patterns with ver y high peak luminance are displayed more than 1 minute, after-image lagging may occur due to the remaining electric load. The after-images remaining on the screen will disappear when moving images are displayed. The time for the after-images to disappear depends on the luminance of the still images and the time they had been displayed. 2. A f ter-image (lag image) due to bur ning Avoid displaying the same image on the Plasma Display continuously over a long period of time. If the same image is displayed continuously for several hours, or for shorter periods of time over several days, a permanent after-image may remain on the screen due to burning of the fluorescent materials. Such images may become less noticeable if moving images are later displayed, but they will not disappear completely . ⢠The Energy save function can be set to help prevent damage from screen burning (see page 44). About operations through i.LINK PIONEER shall not always assure normal video/audio recording or playback when a D- VHS is operated through i.LINK. DO NOT PLACE THIS PRODUCT ON AN UNST ABLE CART , ST AND, TRIPOD, BRACKET , OR T ABLE. THE PRODUCT MA Y F ALL, CAUSING SERIOUS PERSONAL INJURY AND SERIOUS DAMAGE TO THE PRODUCT . USE ONL Y WITH A CART , ST AND, TRIPOD, BRACKET , OR T ABLE RECOMMENDED BY THE MANUF ACTURER , OR SOLD WITH THE PRODUCT . FOLLOW THE MANUF ACTUREâÂÂS INSTRUCTIONS WHEN INST ALLING THE PRODUCT AND USE MOUNTING ACCESSORIES RECOMMENDED BY THE MANUF ACTURER. A PRODUCT AND CART COMBINA TION SHOULD BE MOVED WITH THE CARE. QUICK STOPS, EXCESSIVE FORCE, AND UNEVEN SURF ACES MA Y CAUSE THE PRODUCT AND CART COMBINA TION TO OVERTURN.
02 Safety Precautions 8 En Electricity is used to perform many useful functions, but it can also cause personal injuries and property damage if improperly handled. This product has been engineered and manufactured with the highest priority on safety . However , improper use can result in electric shock and/or fire. In order to prevent potential danger , please obser ve the following instructions when install- ing, operating and cleaning the product. T o ensure your safety and prolong the ser vice life of your product, please read the following precautions carefully before using the product. 1. Read instructionsâÂÂAll operating instructions must be read and understood before the product is operated. 2. Keep this manual in a safe placeâÂÂThese safety and operating instructions must be kept in a safe place for future reference. 3. Obser ve warningsâÂÂAll warnings on the product and in the instructions must be obser ved closely . 4. F ollow instructionsâÂÂAll operating instructions must be followed. 5. CleaningâÂÂUnplug the power cord from the AC outlet before cleaning the product. Use a damp cloth to clean the product. Do not use liquid cleaners or aerosol cleaners. 6. AttachmentsâÂÂDo not use attachments not recommended by the manufacturer . Use of inadequate attachments can result in accidents. 7. W ater and moistureâÂÂDo not use the product near water , such as bathtub, washbasin, kitchen sink and laundry tub, swimming pool and in a wet basement. 8. StandâÂÂDo not place the product on an unstable cart, stand, tripod or table. Placing the product on an unstable base can cause the product to fall, resulting in serious personal injuries as well as damage to the product. Use only a cart, stand, tripod, bracket or table recommended by the manufacturer or sold with the product. When mounting the product on a wall, be sure to follow the manufacturer âÂÂs instructions. Use only the mounting hardware recommended by the manufacturer . 9. When relocating the product placed on a cart, it must be moved with utmost care. Sudden stops, excessive force and uneven floor sur face can cause the product to fall from the cart. 10. V entilationâÂÂThe vents and other openings in the cabinet are designed for ventilation. Do not cover or block these vents and openings since insufficient ventilation can cause overheating and/or shorten the life of the product. Do not place the product on a bed, sofa, rug or other similar sur face, since they can block ventilation openings. This product is not designed for built-in installation; do not place the product in an enclosed place such as a bookcase or rack, unless proper ventilation is provided or the manufacturer âÂÂs instructions are followed. 11. P ower sourceâÂÂThis product must operate on a power source specified on the specification label. If you are not sure of the type of power supply used in your home, consult your dealer or local power company . 12. P ower cord protectionâÂÂThe power cords must be routed properly to prevent people from stepping on them or objects from resting on them. Check the cords at the plugs and product. 13. The plasma Display used in this product is made of glass. Therefore, it can break when the product is dropped or applied with impact. Be careful not to be injured by broken glass pieces in case the plasma Display breaks. 14. OverloadingâÂÂDo not overload AC outlets or extension cords. Overloading can cause fire or electric shock. 15. Entering of objects and liquidsâÂÂNever insert an object into the product through vents or openings. High voltage flows in the product, and inserting an object can cause electric shock and/or short internal parts. F or the same reason, do not spill water or liquid on the product. 16. ServicingâÂÂDo not attempt to ser vice the product yourself . R emoving covers can expose you to high voltage and other dangerous conditions. Request a qualified service person to per form ser vicing. 17. R epairâÂÂIf any of the following conditions occurs, unplug the power cord from the AC outlet, and request a qualified ser vice person to per form repairs. a. When the power cord or plug is damaged. b. When a liquid was spilled on the product or when objects have fallen into the product. c. When the product has been exposed to rain or water . d. When the product does not operate properly as de- scribed in the operating instructions. Do not touch the controls other than those described in the operating instructions. Improper adjustment of controls not described in the instructions can cause damage, which often requires extensive adjustment work by a qualified technician. e. When the product has been dropped or damaged. f. When the product displays an abnormal condition. Any noticeable abnormality in the product indicates that the product needs ser vicing. 18. R eplacement partsâÂÂIn case the product needs replace- ment parts, make sure that the ser vice person uses replacement parts specified by the manufacturer , or those with the same characteristics and per formance as the original parts. Use of unauthorized parts can result in fire, electric shock and/or other danger . 19. Safety checksâÂÂUpon completion of service or repair work, request the ser vice technician to per form safety checks to ensure that the product is in proper operating condition. 20. W all or ceiling mountingâÂÂWhen mounting the product on a wall or ceiling, be sure to install the product according to the method recommended by the manufacturer . 21. Heat sourcesâÂÂKeep the product away from heat sources such as radiators, heaters, stoves and other heat- generat- ing products (including amplifiers). 22. Unplug the power cord from the AC outlet before installing the speakers. 23. Never expose the screen of the Plasma Display to a strong impact, for example, by hitting it. The screen may be broken, resulting in fire or personal injury . 24. Do not expose the Plasma Display to direct sunlight for a long period of time. The optical characteristics of the front protection panel changes, resulting in discoloration or warp. 25. The Plasma Display weighs about 32.8 kg (72.3 lbs.) for the PRO-505PU and about 26.8 kg (59.1 lbs.) for the PRO- 435PU. Because it has small depth and is unstable, unpack, carr y , and install the product with one more person at least and use the handles.
02 Safety Precautions English 9 En ⢠Be sure to use four or more mounting holes symmetrical to the vertical and horizontal median lines. ⢠Use M8 screws, which go 12 to 18 mm (0.5 to 0.7 inches) in depth from the mounting surface of the Plasma Display . See the side view above. ⢠Be careful not to block the ventilation opening at the rear of the Plasma Display . ⢠Be sure to install the Plasma Display on a flat surface because it contains glass. ⢠The screw holes other than the above are to be used only for the specified products. Never use them for mounting non-specified products. ⢠Do not mount or remove the Plasma Display to or from the stand, with speakers attached. ⢠It is strongly recommended to use the optional PIONEER mounting products. ⢠PIONEER shall not be liable for any personal injury or product damage that results from the use of mounting items other than the optional PIONEER products. Installation Pr ecautions Obser ve the following precautions when installing with any items such as the optional stand. When using the optional stand, brack ets, or equivalent items ⢠Ask your dealer to perform the installation. ⢠Be sure to use the supplied bolts. â¢F or details, see the instruction manual that comes with the optional stand (or equivalent items). When using other items ⢠Consult your dealer . ⢠The following six mounting holes can be used for the installation: Median line Mounting hole Mounting hole R ear view Median line Side view Plasma Display Mounting sur face 12 to 18 mm (0.5 to 0.7 inches) M8 screw Mounting bracket (or equivalent item)
03 Operational Precautions 10 En PIONEER bears no responsibility for any damages arising from incorrect use of the product by you or other people, malfunctions when in use, other product related problems, and use of the product except in cases where the company must be liable. Plasma Display protection function When still images (such as photos and computer images) stay on the screen for an extended period of time, the screen will be slightly dimmed. This is because the protection function of the Plasma Display automatically adjusts the brightness to protect the screen when detecting still images; so this does not designate malfunction. The screen is dimmed when a still image is detected for about three minutes. Infrared rays The Plasma Display releases infrared rays because of its characteristics. Depending on how the Plasma Display is in use, the remote controls of nearby equipment may be adversely affected or wireless headphones using infrared rays are inter fered by noise. If this is the case, place that equipment at a location where its remote control sensor is not affected. R adio interfer ence While this product meets the required specifications, it emits a small amount of noise. If you place such equipment as an AM radio, personal computer , and VCR close to this product, that equipment may be interfered. If this happens, place that equipment far enough from this product. F an motor noise When ambient temperature of the Media Receiver becomes high, the rotation speed of the cooling fan motor increases. This may make you feel that the fan motor is noisy at such an occasion. The fan motor keeps running until the power cord of the Media R eceiver is removed from a wall outlet. Do not attach such items as labels and tape to the product. ⢠This may result in the discoloration or scratch of the cabinet. When not using the product for a long period of time ⢠If you do not use the product for a long period of time, the functions of the product may be adversely affected. Switch on and run the product occasionally . Condensation ⢠Condensation may take place on the surface or inside of the product when the product is rapidly moved from a cold place to a warm place or just after a heater is switched on in winter morning, for example. When condensation takes place, do not switch on the product and wait until condensation disappears. Using the product with condensation may result in malfunction. Cleaning the screen ⢠When cleaning the screen of this product, gently wipe it with a soft dr y cloth; the supplied cleaning cloth or other similar cloths (e.g., cotton and flannel). If you use a hard cloth or rub the screen hard, the surface of the screen will be scratched. ⢠If you clean the surface of the screen with a wet cloth, water droplets on the surface may enter into the product, resulting in malfunction. Cleaning the cabinet ⢠When cleaning the cabinet of this product, gently wipe it with a soft dr y cloth; the supplied cleaning cloth or other similar cloths (e.g., cotton and flannel). If you use a hard cloth or rub the cabinet hard, the surface of the cabinet will be scratched. ⢠The cabinet of this product is mostly composed of plastic. Do not use chemicals such as benzine or thinner to clean the cabinet. Using these chemicals may result in quality deterio- ration or coating removal. ⢠Do not expose the product to volatile gas or fluid such as pesticide. Do not make the product contact with rubber or vinyl products for a long period of time. The effect of plasticizer in the plastic may result in quality deterioration or coating removal. ⢠If you clean the surface of the cabinet with a wet cloth, water droplets on the surface may enter into the product, resulting in malfunction. Handles at the rear of the Plasma Display ⢠Do not remove the handles from the rear of the Plasma Display . ⢠When moving the Plasma Display , ask another person for help and use the handles attached to the rear of the Plasma Display . Do not move the Plasma Display by holding only a single handle. Use the handles as shown. ⢠Do not use the handles to hang the product when installing or carr ying the product, for example. Do not use the handles for the purpose of preventing the product from tilting over .
04 Supplied Accessories English 11 En Plasma Display Media Receiver Operating Instructions ⢠Always use the power cord supplied with the Plasma Display and the one supplied with the Media Receiver for each respective unit. P ower cord (2 m/6.6 feet) Cleaning cloth Speed clamp à3 Bead band à3 W arranty card P ower cord (2 m/6.6 feet) R emote control unit System cable (3 m/9.8 feet) AA size batter y à2 (Alkaline batter y) Stand Screw à4 (for stand) Screw hole cap à4 VCR controller (1.8 m/5.9 feet) Instruction guide
05 Part Names 12 En Plasma Display 1 button 2 ST ANDBY indicator Lights red when the unit is standby mode. (page 24) 3 POWER ON indicator Lights green when the Plasma Display is operating. (page 24) 4 R emote control sensor 5S T ANDBY/ON button 6 INPUT button 7 VOLUME / â buttons 8 CHANNEL / â buttons 4 5 6 7 8 (right view) R ear view Fr ont view 9 SYSTEM CABLE terminal (BLACK) 10 SYSTEM CABLE terminal (WHITE) 11 SPEAKER (right/left) terminals 12 AC INLET terminal The terminals have faced downward. Media Receiver Fr ont view POWER ON STANDBY REC TIMER DATA ACQUISITION COMPONENT VIDEO Y S - VIDEO VIDEO AUDIO PC INPUT 4 ANALOG RGB AUDIO ( STEREO ) LR C B /P B C R /P R 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 P ull this section to open the door . 1 POWER button 2 POWER ON indicator 3 ST ANDBY indicator 4 REC TIMER indicator 5 DA T A ACQUISITION indicator 6 INPUT 4 terminals (COMPONENT VIDEO: Y , C B /PB , CR /PR ) 7 INPUT 4 terminal (S- VIDEO) 8 INPUT 4 terminal (VIDEO) 9 INPUT 4 terminals (AUDIO) 10 PC INPUT terminal (AUDIO) 11 PC INPUT terminal (ANAL OG RGB) 9 10 11 12
05 Part Names English 13 En R ear view 1 CONTROL IN terminal 2 CONTROL OUT terminal 3 VCR CONTROL terminal 4 ANTENNA B IN terminal 5 ANTENNA/CABLE A IN terminal 6 INPUT 2 terminal (VIDEO) 7 INPUT 2 terminals (A UDIO) 8 i.LINK terminals 9 Cable CARD slot 10 INPUT 1 terminals (A UDIO) 11 DIGIT AL OUT terminal (OPTICAL) 12 INPUT 1 terminals (COMPONENT VIDEO: Y , C B /PB , CR /PR ) 13 AC IN terminal 14 RS-232C terminal (used for factor y setup) 15 ANTENNA B OUT terminal 16 INPUT 2 terminal (S- VIDEO) 17 MONITOR OUT terminal (S- VIDEO) 18 MONITOR OUT terminal (VIDEO) 19 MONITOR OUT terminals (A UDIO) 20 INPUT 1 terminal (VIDEO) 21 INPUT 1 terminal (S- VIDEO) 22 INPUT 3 terminals (AUDIO) 23 INPUT 3 terminals (COMPONENT VIDEO: Y , C B /PB , CR /PR ) 24 HDMI terminals (INPUT1/INPUT3) 25 SYSTEM CABLE terminal (WHITE) 26 SYSTEM CABLE terminal (BLACK) MONITOR OUT INPUT 1 INPUT 2 VCR CONTROL INPUT 3 ANTENNA B CONTROL IN OUT S-VIDEO S-VIDEO VIDEO VIDEO R-AUDIO-L R-AUDIO-L COMPONENT VIDEO Y Y C B /P B C B /P B C R /P R C R /P R S-VIDEO R-AUDIO-L R-AUDIO-L VIDEO S400 INPUT 1 INPUT 3 HDMI DIGIT AL OUT OPTICAL SERVICE ONL Y AC IN BLACK WHITE SYSTEM CABLE ANTENNA/ CABLE A IN INPUT 2 INPUT 1 IN OUT Cable CARD Cable CARD (TS) INPUT 3 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 9 10 11 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 25 26 24 12 8
05 Part Names 14 En Remote control unit With the mode switch set to TV 1 TV : T urns on the power to the Plasma Display or places it into standby mode. 2 T ransmission confirmation LED 3 INP UT : Selects an input source of the Plasma Display . (INPUT 1, INPUT 2, INPUT 3, INPUT 4, PC, i.LINK) 4 â¢(dot) : Enters a dot. 5 CH RETURN : Returns to the previous chan- nel. Mode switch (with âÂÂT Vâ selected) 6 CH /â : Selects the channel. 7 RETURN : Returns to the previous menu screen. 8 / / / : Selects a desired item on the menu screen. 9 DTV INFO : Shows more information on DTV programs. 10 SPLIT : Switches the screen mode among 2- screen, picture-in-picture, and single-screen . 11 FREEZE : F reezes a frame from a moving image. P ress again to cancel the function. 12 SWAP : Switches between the two screens when in the 2-screen or picture-in-picture mode. 13 SHIFT : Moves the location of the small screen when in the picture-in-picture mode. 14 : When pressed, all buttons on the remote control unit will light. The lighting will turn off if no operations are performed within about 5 seconds. This button is used for per forming operations in dark places. 15 ANT : Selects the antenna (A, B). See pages 21 and 22 for details. 16 MTS : Selects the MTS/SAP . 17 0 â 9 : Selects the channel. 18 CH ENTER : Executes a channel number . 19 VOL /â : Sets the volume. 20 MUTING : Mutes the sound. 21 HOME MENU : Displays the menu screen . 22 ENTER : Executes a command. 23 F A VORITE CH (A, B, C, D ): Selects any of the four preset channels. See page 37 for details to set the F A VORITE CH . While watching, you can toggle the set chan- nels by pressing A , B , C and D . 24 SCREEN SIZE : Selects the screen size. 25 DISPLA Y : Displays the channel information . 26 A V SELECTION : Selects audio and video settings. (A V mode: ST ANDARD, DYNAMIC, MOVIE, GAME, USER . PC mode: ST ANDARD, USER .) 27 SLEEP : Sets the sleep timer . ⢠When using the remote control unit, point it at the Plasma Display . ⢠See pages 62 to 68 for operating buttons not listed on this page. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 13 12 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
06 Pr eparation English 15 En Installing the Plasma Display L ocating ⢠Avoid direct sunlight. Maintain adequate ventilation . ⢠The length of the system cable used to connect the Plasma Display and the Media Receiver is about 3 m (9.8 feet). ⢠Because the Plasma Display is heavy , be sure to have someone help you when moving it. ⢠If you place anything on the top of the Media R eceiver it will not receive enough ventilation and will not operate properly . ⢠Allow enough space around the upper and back parts when installing to ensure ventilation around the backside. Using the optional PIONEER stand F or details on installation, refer to the instruction manual supplied with the stand. ⢠This product may be used only with model PDK -1012 stand. Use with other stands may result in instability causing possible injur y . Using the optional PIONEER speakers F or details on installation, refer to the instruction manual supplied with the speaker . Operating Envir onment Operating environment temperature and humidity : 0ðC to 40ðC ( 32ðF to 104ðF); less than 85% RH (cooling vents not blocked) Avoid installing at the following locations: ⢠Under direct exposure to sunlight ⢠Under strong artificial light ⢠In high humidity â¢P oorly ventilated Over 50 cm (19 11 / 16 inches) Over 10 cm (3 15 / 16 inches )
06 Pr eparation 16 En Right side Installing the Media Receiver vertically Y ou can use the supplied stand to install the Media Receiver vertically . 1. Insert the stand into the side of the Media R eceiver . 2. Secure the stand with the supplied scr ews. Screws POWER ON STANDBY REC TIMER DATA ACQUISITION POWER ON STANDBY REC TIMER DATA ACQUISITION Installing the Media Receiver POWER ON STANDBY REC TIMER DATA ACQUISITION Plasma Display Media Receiver (vertical installation) (horizontal installation) System cable (approx. 3 m/9.8 feet) ⢠Do not place a VCR or any other device on the top of the Media Receiver . ⢠When installing, allow enough space on the sides and above the Media Receiver . ⢠Do not block the side cooling vents or the r ear ventila- tion fan opening of the Media Receiver . Over 10 cm (3 15 /16 inches) Over 5 cm (2 inches) Over 5 cm (2 inches) POWER ON STANDBY REC TIMER DATA ACQUISITION Over 5 cm (2 inches) Over 5 cm (2 inches) Over 5 cm (2 inches) Over 5 cm (2 inches) Over 10 cm (3 15 /16 inches)
06 Pr eparation English 17 En Shock absorbing pad 3. Remove the shock absorbing pads. Keep the shock absorbing pads and screws. They are required when you place the Media Receiver in the horizontal position . 4. Plug the screw holes using the supplied caps. ⢠When you have installed the Media R eceiver vertically , be sure to use the supplied stand. If you place the unit directly on the floor , the cooling vents will be blocked, r esulting in mechanical failur e. R emove the separation sheet. Screw hole cap Align with the hole and attach.
06 Pr eparation 18 En BLACK WHITE SYSTEM CABLE MONITOR OUT VCR CONTROL Cable CARD ANTENNA/ CABLE A IN ANTENNA B CONTROL IN OUT S-VIDEO INPUT 2 INPUT 3 S-VIDEO VIDEO VIDEO R-AUDIO-L R-AUDIO-L COMPONENT VIDEO Y Y C B /P B C B /P B C R /P R C R /P R S-VIDEO R-AUDIO-L R-AUDIO-L VIDEO S400 INPUT 1 INPUT 3 HDMI DIGITAL OUT OPTICAL SERVICE ONL Y AC IN INPUT 3 INPUT 1 IN OUT Cable CARD (TS) Connecting the system cable Connecting the system cable to the Plasma Display ⢠THESE SPEAKER TERMINALS CAN BE APPLIED WITH HAZARDOUS VOL T AGE WHEN YOU CONNECT OR DIS- CONNECT THE SPEAKER CABLES. TO PREVENT THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT TOUCH UNINSULA TED P ARTS BEFORE DISCONNECTING THE POWER CORD. Connecting the system cable to the Media R eceiver F or details on optional PIONEER speaker installation, refer to the instruction manual that came with the speaker . Plasma Display (rear view) (WHITE) (BLACK) System cable Media Receiver (r ear view) (WHITE) (BLACK)
06 Pr eparation English 19 En Routing cables Speed clamps and bead bands are supplied for bunching cables. Once properly bunched, follow the steps below to route the cables. When the speakers ar e installed on the sides (rear view) Speaker cable A ttaching speed clamps to the main unit Attach the speed clamps using the 4 holes marked with below , depending on your routing system. A ttaching and r emoving speed clamps Insert [1] into an appropriate hole on the rear of the Plasma Display and snap [2] into the back of [1] to lock the clamp. Speed clamps are designed to be difficult to undo once in place. Please attach them carefully . Use pliers to twist the clamp 90ð, pulling outward. The clamp may deteriorate over time and become damaged if removed. 2 1 Speaker cable Speed clamps Cable binders (supplied with the stand)* * Cable binder Using the cable binders supplied with the stand, put the speaker and system cables together so that the cables are invisible from the front. At that time be careful not to apply any force to the connection sections of the cables.
06 Pr eparation 20 En Preparing the r emote control unit Inserting batteries 1 Open the batter y cover . 2 Insert the supplied two AA size batteries. ⢠The battery polarities must correspond with the ( ) and (âÂÂ) indicators in the batter y compartment. 3 Close the batter y cover . Cautions regar ding batteries ⢠The remote control unit cannot operate the system if the batteries in the unit are empty . When this happens, replace the batteries with new ones. ⢠Do not use manganese batteries. When you replace the batteries, use alkaline ones. ⢠Do not mix batteries of different types. Different types of batteries have different characteristics. ⢠Do not mix old and new batteries. Mixing old and new batteries can shorten the life of new batteries or cause chemical leakage in old batteries. ⢠Do not leave dead batteries in the remote control unit; chemical leakage will occur . If you find any chemical leakage, wipe thoroughly with a cloth. ⢠The batteries supplied with this product may have a shorter life expectancy due to storage conditions. ⢠If you will not use the remote control unit for an extended period of time, remove the batteries from it. ⢠WHEN DISPOSING OF USED BA TTERIES, BE SURE TO COMPL Y WITH GOVERNMENT REGULA TIONS AND ENVIRONMENT AL PROTECTION GUIDELINES THA T APPL Y IN Y OUR COUNTRY OR AREA. Allowed operation range of the remote contr ol unit Operate the remote control unit while pointing it toward the remote control sensor located at the bottom right of the front panel of the Plasma Display . The distance from the remote control sensor must be within 7 m (23 feet) and the angle relative to the sensor must be within 30 degrees in the right or left direction. 30 ð Remote control sensor 7 m (23 feet) 30 ð Cautions regar ding the remote control unit ⢠Do not expose the remote control unit to shock, liquid, or high humidity . ⢠Do not place the remote control unit under direct sunlight; the unit may deform. ⢠The remote control unit may not work properly if the remote sensor window of the Plasma Display is under direct sunlight or strong lighting. In such case, change the angle of the lighting or Plasma Display , or operate the remote control unit closer to the remote sensor window . ⢠When any obstacle exists between the remote control unit and the remote control sensor , the remote control unit may not function. ⢠As the batteries become empty , the remote control unit can function within a shorter distance from the remote control sensor . Replace the batteries with new ones if necessary . ⢠The Plasma Display emits very weak infrared rays from its screen. If you place such equipment operated through infrared remote control as a VCR nearby , that equipment may not receive commands from its remote control unit properly or entirely . If this is the case, place that equipment at a location far enough from the Plasma Display . ⢠Depending on the installation environment, infrared rays from the Plasma Display may not allow this system to properly receive commands from the remote control unit or may shorten allowable distances between the remote control unit and the remote control sensor . The strength of infrared rays emitted from the screen differs, depending on images displayed on the screen.
06 Pr eparation English 21 En Cable connections for watching digital and/or conventional TV channels This system is equipped with two terminals for inputting TV broadcasting signals: ANTENNA/CABLE A IN and ANTENNA B. The ANTENNA/CABLE A IN terminal accepts both digital and conventional TV broadcasting signals while the ANTENNA B terminal accepts only conventional TV broadcasting signals. When using a cable TV to watch digital and/or conventional TV channels, connect to the ANTENNA/CABLE A IN terminal as shown. In addition , you may connect an antenna to the ANTENNA B terminal as shown; use an outdoor antenna to enjoy clearer pictures. If your outdoor uses a 75-ohm coaxial cable with an F-type connector , plug it into the antenna terminal at the rear of the Media Receiver . Connecting VHF/UHF antennas and a Cable Converter ⢠Be sure to connect coaxial cables as shown above. Signal reception may fail if not properly connected. ANTENNA B IN OUT ANTENNA/ CABLE A IN Media Receiver (r ear) Cable TV Cable Converter Cable connections for watching digital TV channels over air (VHF/UHF) If using VHF and UHF antennas to watch digital TV channels, connect the coaxial cables as shown. Connecting VHF/UHF antennas ANTENNA B IN OUT ANTENNA/ CABLE A IN VHF antenna UHF antenna U/V mixer Media Receiver (rear) Media Receiver (r ear) ⢠Be sure to connect coaxial cables as shown above. Signal reception may fail if not properly connected. Splitter Splitter
06 Pr eparation 22 En Switching between antenna A and B To watch broadcasts via the two antennas, you can select it by pressing ANT on the remote control unit. ⢠While watching a broadcast, press ANT to view the image received from the other antenna. â¢P ressing ANT while watching in the 2-screen mode (TV image and video image) with TV selected will display the TV image of the other antenna. â¢P ressing ANT while watching in the 2-screen mode with two TV images displayed will not have any effect. â¢P ressing ANT while watching in the 2-screen mode with two video images displayed will switch the selected screen to a TV image. Inserting the cable card The Media Receiver is equipped with a slot for inserting a cable card. When you are watching digital and/or High Definition TV channels over cable, the card allows you to use the POD ser vice provided by the cable TV company ; the POD stands for P oint of Deployment. This ser vice presents various types of useful information, using HTML text. 1 Confirm that the ANTENNA/CABLE A IN terminal has been connected with the coaxial cable from the Cable Converter . See page 21. 2 Hold the tab of the slot cover on the rear of the Media R eceiver , and remove the cover while releasing the tabâÂÂs latch. Cable CARD A UDIO-L COMPONENT VIDEO Y C B /P B C R / P R C R /P R R-AUDIO-L VIDEO S400 INPUT 1 DIGIT AL OUT OPTICAL (TS) INPUT 1 Ta b 3 Insert the specified cable card into the Cable CARD slot as far as it goes. Cable CARD INPUT 3 ANTENNA/ CABLE A IN VI DEO VIDEO R-AUDIO-L R-AUDIO-L COMPONENT VIDEO Y Y C B /P B C B /P B C R /P R C R /P R S-VIDEO R-AUDIO-L R-AUDIO-L VIDEO S400 INPUT 1 H DIGIT AL OUT OPTICAL (TS) N PUT 2 ⢠Be sure to insert only the specified cable card. ⢠Do not insert a PCMCIA card.
06 Pr eparation English 23 En P ower cord P ower cord ⢠Use only the supplied power cor d. ⢠Be sur e to use the specified power supply voltage; neglecting this can result in fir e or electric shock. â¢F or the Plasma Display System, a three-core power cor d with a ground ter minal is used for efficiency protection. Always connect the power cord to a thr ee-pronged outlet and make sur e that the cord is pr operly grounded. ⢠Always turn off the power of the Plasma Display and Media R eceiver when connecting the power cords. ⢠Disconnect the power cord from the power outlet when the Plasma Display System is not going to be used for a long period of time. ANTENNA/ CABLE A IN MONITOR OUT INPUT 2 VCR CONTROL INPUT 3 ANTENNA B CONTROL IN OUT S-VIDEO S-VIDEO VIDEO VIDEO R-AUDIO-L R-AUDIO-L COMPONENT VIDEO Y Y C B /PB C B /P B C R /P R C R /P R S-VIDEO R-AUDIO-L R-AUDIO-L VIDEO INPUT 1 INPUT 3 HDMI DIGITAL OUT OPTICAL SERVICE ONLY AC INLET BLACK WHITE SYSTEM CABLE AC IN INPUT 2 INPUT 3 INPUT 3 INPUT 1 Cable CARD S400 Cable CARD (TS) IN OUT AC IN Connecting the power cord Connect the power cord after all component connections have been completed. Plasma Display (rear view) Media Receiver (r ear view) Noise filter P artially eliminates noise caused by the power source. Noise filter P artially eliminates noise caused by the power source.
07 Basic Operations 24 En Plasma Display POWER ON indicator button ST ANDBY indicator Media Receiver POWER ON indicator POWER button ST ANDBY/ ON button POWER ON STANDBY REC TIMER DATA ACQUISITION ST ANDBY indicator (right view) Tu r ning on the power (Standby) 1 P ress on the Plasma Display if the ST ANDBY indicator is off . ⢠The ST ANDBY indicator on the Plasma Display lights up red. 2 Confirm that the ST ANDBY indicators light up red, and then press TV on the remote control unit or ST ANDBY/ON on the Plasma Display or POWER on the Media R eceiver to turn the system on. ⢠The POWER ON indicators on the Plasma Display and Media R eceiver light up green. ⢠In this manual, âÂÂsystemâ means the Plasma Display P anel and Media R eceiver . Tu r ning off the power (Standby) 1 P ress TV on the remote control unit or ST ANDBY/ON on the Plasma Display or POWER on the Media R eceiver . ⢠The system enters the standby mode and the image on the screen disappears. ⢠Both ST ANDBY indicators light up red. ⢠It is recommended to place the system into the standby mode by pressing TV on the remote control unit. This allows the system to automatically receive digital TV program information in the standby mode. ⢠If you are not going to use this system for a long period of time, press on the Plasma Display and remove the power cord from the power outlet. Plasma Display/Media Receiver status indicators Indicat or Status Sy stem St atus Plasma Displa y Media R eceiver PO WER ON S T ANDB Y PO WER ON S T ANDB Y Po w er to the Pla sma Displa y and Media Receiv er is off. Or the pow er cords ha ve been disconnect ed. Po w er to the s yst em is on. The s yst em is in the standb y mode. The pow er cord has been disconnect ed from the Media R eceiver . Po w er to the Pla sma Displa y is off. Or the po wer cord ha s been disconnect ed from the Pla sma Display . F or other than the above, see âÂÂT roubleshootingâ on page 69. Flashing Flashing
07 Basic Operations English 25 En Plasma Display (right view) Channel banner DTV 2 ⢠1002.102 A XXXXXXXXXX 12:30pm â 2:00pm 12:33pm CHANNEL /â W atching TV channels Unless you set up TV channels that you can watch under the current conditions, you cannot tune in those channels. F or the procedure, see âÂÂSetting up TV channelsâ on page 31. ⢠When watching a digital TV program, you may see emergency alert messages scrolling at the top of the screen. Those messages are broadcasted by TV stations as necessar y when in emergency situations. Selecting the antenna After confirming that the Mode switch on the remote control unit has been set to âÂÂTV âÂÂ, press ANT on the remote control unit to select antenna A or B. ⢠Make this selection depending on the connections to the antenna input terminals on the Media Receiver (page 21). Changing channels To increase the channel number , press CH on the remote control unit. T o decrease the channel number , press CH âÂÂ. ⢠CHANNEL /â on the Plasma Display operates the same as CH /â on the remote control unit. â¢P ress CH RETURN to switch the currently tuned channel to the previously tuned channel. P ress CH RETURN again to restore the currently tuned channel. Using 0 â 9 and ⢠(dot) on the r emote control unit Select channels directly by pressing buttons 0 to 9. T o select subchannels, also use the ⢠(dot) button. EXAMPLE â¢T o select channel 5 (1-digit channel), press 5 . â¢T o select channel 25 (2-digit channel), press 2 then 5 . â¢T o select channel 125 (3-digit channel), press 1 , 2, then 5 . â¢T o select subchannel 10.01, press 1 , 0, ⢠(dot), 0, then 1 . â¢T o select subchannel 10.001 (for the cable TV), press 1 , 0 , ⢠(dot), 0 , 0, then 1 . â¢A f ter entering a channel or subchannel number , you may press CH ENTER to tune in the channel more quickly . ⢠Each time you change a channel, such a channel banner appears that shows information about the currently selected channel. T o clear the channel banner , press DTV INFO. F or more information about the channel banner , see âÂÂViewing a channel banner â on page 26.
07 Basic Operations 26 En Changing the volume and sound To increase the volume, press VOL on the remote control unit. T o decrease the volume, press VOL â . ⢠VOL UME /â on the Plasma Display operates the same as VOL /â on the remote control unit. â¢T o mute the sound output, press MUTING. â â appears on the screen. T o quit muting, press MUTING again. P ressing VOL also quits muting. Plasma Display (right view) V olume adjustment Muting V iewing a channel banner While watching a digital TV program, pressing DTV INFO causes the following banner to appear . P ressing DTV INFO again causes the banner to disappear . 12:30pm â 2:00pm WXCD ⢠1000 Ant. A XXXXXXXXXX ******************************************************** ********************************************* ****************************************** 12:33pm 1 2 3 5 6 7 4 1 Station name 2 Current time 3 Channel number 4 Input (Ant. A or Ant. B) 5 P rogram time schedule 6 P rogram title 7 TV rating and program description (This may be unavailable for some programs.) ⢠The above information is not displayed if not included in broadcast signals. ⢠If â â is shown at the bottom right of the channel banner containing program description, press / to scroll the program description. VOLUME /âÂÂ
07 Basic Operations English 27 En Setting MTS/SAP mode When watching conventional TV programs, you may enjoy stereo sound and/or Secondar y Audio P rograms (SAP), using the Multi-channel T elevision Sound (MTS) function. ⢠Ster eo broadcasts Y ou can enjoy , for example, sports, shows, and concerts in dynamic stereo sound. ⢠SAP br oadcasts MAIN sound: The normal program soundtrack (either in mono or stereo). SAP sound: Listen to second language, supplementar y commentar y and other information. (SAP is mono sound.) ⢠Conventional TV channels in this manual designate TV channels that are received through the conventional VHF/UHF frequencies or conventional cable TV channels. ⢠When stereo sound is difficult to hear , you may manually switch to the MONO mode to obtain clearer sound. ⢠Once the MONO mode is selected, the Plasma Display System sound remains mono even if the system receives a stereo broadcast. Y ou must reselect the STEREO mode if you want to hear stereo sound again. ⢠Selecting MTS while the input source is INPUT 1 to 4 or PC does not change the type of sound. In this case, sound is determined by the video source. Each time you press MTS, MTS toggles as shown below . STEREO STEREO mode SAP SAP mode MONO MONO mode ⢠In each of the MTS/SAP modes selected using the MTS button , the display changes depending on broadcasting signals being received. Using the POD service If you have watched digital and/or High Definition TV channels over cable, you can use the POD ser vice provided by the cable TV company . This ser vice presents various types of useful information, using HTML text. P ress HOME MENU, 9, 9 , then 9 to view the POD display . ⢠If you have enabled data acquisition using the menu, POD information is automatically acquired even when the system is in the standby mode. See page 32. Changing the language If you have selected a digital TV program that provides multi- language ser vices, you can switch among the languages by pressing MTS on the remote control unit. Each time you press MTS, the language switches. ⢠Switchable languages differ depending on the current broadcast. ⢠If the language selected through language setting is available when the channel or program is changed, you will hear that language.
07 Basic Operations 28 En Using the multiscreen functions Splitting the screen Use the following procedure to select the 2-screen or picture-in- picture mode. 2-screen P icture-in-picture 1 P ress SPLIT to select the display mode. ⢠Each time you press SPLIT , the display mode is switched among 2-screen, picture-in-picture, and single-screen. When receiving STEREO sound signals A 125 STEREO In STEREO mode In SAP mode In MONO mode A 125 STEREO A 125 MONO When receiving MAIN SAP sound signals In STEREO mode In SAP mode In MONO mode A 125 MAIN (SAP) A 125 SAP (MAIN) A 125 MONO (SAP) When receiving STEREO SAP sound signals In STEREO mode In SAP mode In MONO mode A 125 STEREO (SAP) A 125 SAP (STEREO) A 125 MONO (SAP) When receiving MONO sound signals In STEREO mode In SAP mode In MONO mode A 125 MONO A 125 MONO A 125 MONO
07 Basic Operations English 29 En â¢I n 2-screen or picture-in-picture mode, press SW AP to switch the position of the 2 screens shown . Left screen is the active screen which will be indicated by â âÂÂ. The user is allowed to operate picture and sound. ⢠In 2-screen mode, press S CREEN SIZE to change the size of the left screen. â¢I n picture-in-picture mode, press SHIFT to move the position of the small screen in anti-clockwise. 2 To select the desired input source, press the appropriate input source button. ⢠If watching TV programs, press CH / â to change the channel. ⢠The multiscreen function cannot display images from the same input source at the same time. If you make such an attempt, a warning message appears. ⢠When you press HOME MENU or DTV INFO, the single-screen mode is restored and the corresponding menu is displayed. ⢠When the two screens show the same analog broadcasting coming through antenna A and B, the picture quality may differ between the two screens. Freezing images Use the following procedure to capture and freeze one frame from a moving image that you are watching. Normal image Still image 1 P ress FREEZE. â¢A still image appears on the right screen while a moving image is shown on the left screen. 2 P ress FREEZE again to cancel the function. â¢W ith the screen split, any image cannot be frozen. ⢠When this function is not available, a warning message appears.
08 Menu Setup 30 En Menu operations The following describes the typical procedure for setting up the menus. F or the actual procedures, see the appropriate pages that describe individual functions. 1 P ress HOME MENU. 2 P ress / to select a menu item, and then press ENTER. 3 R epeat step 2 until you access the desired submenu item. ⢠The number of menu layers differs depending on menu items. ⢠If you select âÂÂT uner Setupâ or âÂÂTimersâ , a menu bar appears at the bottom of the screen. T o select a submenu item on the bar , press / instead of / . 4 P ress / to select an option (or parameter), and then press ENTER . â¢F or some menu items, press / instead of / . 5 P ress HOME MENU to exit the menu. â¢Y ou can return to the upper menu levels by pressing RETURN . PC mode menus Menu configuration AV mode menus Home Menu It em P age Picture AV Selection 4 0 Contr ast 4 1 Brightness 4 1 Color 4 1 T int 4 1 Sharpness 4 1 Pro A djust 4 1 Res et 4 1 Sound Tr eble 4 3 Bass 4 3 Balance 4 3 Res et 4 3 F OCUS 4 3 Fr ont Surr ound 4 3 Po w er Contr ol Ener gy Sa ve 4 4 No Signal off 4 4 No Oper ation off 4 4 Sleep T imer âÂÂ4 0 Option P osition 4 5 Side Mask 4 7 HDMI Input 5 1, 5 2 Monit or Out 5 2, 5 3 Digital Audio Out 5 4 Language 4 7 T uner Setup Channel Setup 3 1, 3 2 Pa r ental Contr ol 3 3âÂÂ3 7 Fa v orites 3 7 Closed Captions 3 7âÂÂ3 9 R ecor der Setup 5 6âÂÂ5 7 Clock 3 9 Home Menu It em P age Picture AV Selection 4 0 Contr ast 4 1 Brightness 4 1 Red 4 1 Gr een 4 1 Blue 4 1 Res et 4 1 Sound Tr eble 4 3 Bass 4 3 Balance 4 3 Res et 4 3 F OCUS 4 3 Fr ont Surr ound 4 3 Po w er Contr ol Ener gy Sa ve 4 4 Po w er Management 44 Sleep T imer âÂÂ4 0 Option Aut o Setup 4 5 Manual Setup 4 5 T imers âÂÂ4 8, 4 9
09 T uner Setup English 31 En Setting up TV channels This section describes how to search and set up TV channels that you can watch under the current conditions. Unless you set up TV channels using Auto Channel P reset, you may not be able to tune in those channels. Using Auto Channel Preset Auto Channel P reset automatically searches and sets up TV channels. 1 P ress HOME MENU. 2 Select âÂÂT uner SetupâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER ) 3 Select âÂÂChannel SetupâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER) 4 Select â Ant. A â or â Ant. BâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER) 5 Select â Auto Channel PresetâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER ) 6 Select â Air â or âÂÂCableâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER ) Channel Setup Begin Preset Cancel Exit Ant. A Auto Ch. Preset Cable Air Cable Ant. A Auto Channel Preset 2.0 4.0 6.0 xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx Enter Home Menu D ⢠Channel search automatically starts. Channel Setup Cancel Exit Ant. A Auto Ch. Preset Cable Ant. A Auto Channel Preset ⢠Cable One Moment Please ⦠xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx Home Menu D â¢T o quit Auto Channel P reset half way , press D . 7 After Auto Channel Preset has been finished, press HOME MENU to exit the menu. ⢠When using the Cable Converter , you may need to manually add Cable Converter output channels. Setting for skipping unwanted channels F rom among TV channels searched and set up using Auto Channel P reset, you can select channels to be skipped when CH / â are operated. 1 P ress HOME MENU. 2 Select âÂÂT uner SetupâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER ) 3 Select âÂÂChannel SetupâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER) 4 Select â Ant. A â or â Ant. BâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER) 5 Select âÂÂChannel Keep/SkipâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER ) 6 Select a channel to be skipped. ( / then ENTER) Channel Setup Ant. A Channel Keep/Skip Ant. A Channel Keep/Skip 2.0 4.0 6.0 xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx Exit Home Menu â¢F or the skipped channel, a check mark disappears. 7 P ress HOME MENU to exit the menu. â¢T o restore skipped channels, use the above procedure except that you select a skipped channel in step 6. ⢠When using the Cable Converter , you may need to manually add Cable Converter output channels. Setting up TV channels manually This section describes how to manually set up TV channels that have not been set up by Auto Channel P reset. 1 P ress HOME MENU. 2 Select âÂÂT uner SetupâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER ) 3 Select âÂÂChannel SetupâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER) 4 Select â Ant. A â or â Ant. BâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER) 5 Select â Add ChannelâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER) 6 Select a channel number to be added. ( / then ENTER) â¢Y ou can also use buttons 0 â 9 to enter a channel number . Channel Setup Ant. A Add Channel 0000.000 Ant. A Add Channel xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx 1 Exit Home Menu â¢A f ter ENTER has been pressed, a confirmation screen appears. 7 P ress A to complete the setup processing. 8 P ress HOME MENU to exit the menu.
09 T uner Setup 32 En Naming TV channels Y ou can name TV channels that you have set up for antenna B. This may help you easily identify the channels during selections. 1 P ress HOME MENU. 2 Select âÂÂT uner SetupâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER ) 3 Select âÂÂChannel SetupâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER) 4 Select â Ant. BâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER) 5 Select âÂÂName ChannelâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER ) 6 Select a channel. ( / then ENTER) â¢Y ou can also use buttons 0 â 9 to enter a channel number . Channel Setup Ant. B Name Channel Ant. B Name Channel xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx Exit Home Menu 7 Enter up to 7 alphanumeric characters using / , / , and ENTER. â¢T o clear the last character , press B . Channel Setup Cancel Ant. B Name Channel A BCDE FGH I J KL M N O P Q R ST UV W X Y Z 1 2 3 4 56 78 90 . @ / ( ), â _ : ' & SP ACE Name: DTV2 Ant. B Name Channel xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx Clear Accept Exit Home Menu D B A 8 P ress A. 9 P ress HOME MENU to exit the menu. Checking signal strength When you have selected antenna A, you can check the current channelâÂÂs signal strength. Y ou may use this function when receiving a channel through a VHF/UHF antenna. 1 P ress HOME MENU. 2 Select âÂÂT uner SetupâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER ) 3 Select âÂÂChannel SetupâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER) 4 Select â Ant. A âÂÂ. ( / then ENTER) 5 Select âÂÂSignal StrengthâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER) Channel Setup Exit Ant. A Signal Strength Ant. A Current: 100 Maximum: 100 xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx Home Menu Signal Strength ⢠Adjust the direction of the antenna so that the current signal strength reaches as close to the maximum signal strength as possible. 6 P ress HOME MENU to exit the menu. Checking the Cable Card ID The Media Receiver has a slot for a cable card that is used for managing your information by the cable TV company . The following procedure allows you to check your Cable Card ID and the Host ID. 1 P ress HOME MENU. 2 Select âÂÂT uner SetupâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER ) 3 Select âÂÂChannel SetupâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER) 4 Select âÂÂPOD IDâÂÂ. ( / ) ⢠The Host ID and Cable Card ID appear . 5 P ress HOME MENU to exit the menu. Enabling data acquisition Use this function to enable the system to automatically acquire information about digital TV programs even when in the standby mode. 1 P ress HOME MENU. 2 Select âÂÂT uner SetupâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER ) 3 Select âÂÂChannel SetupâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER) 4 Select âÂÂData AcquâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER ) 5 Select âÂÂEnabledâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER ) 6 P ress HOME MENU to exit the menu. ⢠The DA T A ACQUISITION indicator on the front of the Media R eceiver lights while data is being acquired.
09 T uner Setup English 33 En Parental Contr ol W ith the P arental Control, parents can prevent their children from watching inappropriate TV programs, VCR or DVD contents. When an attempt is made to watch a program (or content) blocked by parents, the Plasma Display shows nothing but a message. The P arental Control functions for both conventional and digital TV channels. In the U.S. three rating systems have been provided: the TV ratings, TV P arental Guidelines, and movie ratings. Movie ratings are provided by the Motion P icture Association of America (MP AA) and are used for original movies not edited for television. F or the rating system in Canada, see pages 36 and 37. V oluntar y movie rating system (MP AA) Ra ting Description G General audience s. All ages admit ted. PG Pa r ental guidance suggest ed. Some mat erial ma y not be suit able for children. PG-1 3 Pa r ents str ongly cautioned. Some mat erial ma y be inappr opriat e for children under 1 3. Age-Base R Re stricted. Under 1 7 r equire s accompanying par ent or adult guardian (age v aries in some jurisdictions). NC-1 7 No one 1 7 and under admit ted. Adult A r ating that has no w been superseded b y NC-1 7 . NR Not r at ed. ⢠The voluntar y movie rating system only uses an age-based rating. TV ratings Ra ting Description TV - Y All children TV - Y7 Children 7 and abo ve Age-Base TV -G Gener al audiences TV -PG P arent al guidance sug gest ed TV -1 4 P ar ents strongl y cautioned TV -MA Ma ture audience s only TV Par ental Guidelines Cont ent FV V S L D Rating (F antas y (V iolence) (Se xual (Adult (Se xually violence) situations) language) suggestive dialog) TV - Y (All childr en) TV - Y7 (Dir ec t ed t o older children) X TV -G Age-Base (Gener al audience) TV -PG (P arental guidance suggest ed) X XXX TV -1 4 (P arent s strongl y cautioned) X XXX TV -MA (Matur e audience only) XXX X: Content rating can be set. Changing the password Using a password prevents other persons from changing P arental Control settings. A default password (1234) has been set before shipment. Use the following procedure to change the password. 1 P ress HOME MENU. 2 Select âÂÂT uner SetupâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER ) 3 Select âÂÂP arental ControlâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER) 4 Select âÂÂP asswordâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER ) 5 Select âÂÂChange P asswordâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER) Parental Control Password Change Password Password xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx Clear Password Exit Home Menu 6 Enter the current 4-digit password, using buttons 0 â 9 . 7 Enter a 4-digit password to be newly set, using buttons 0 â 9 . 8 Enter the same password that you have entered in step 7. â¢A confirmation screen appears. 9 P ress A. 10 P ress HOME MENU to exit the menu. â¢T ake a note of the newly set password and keep it handy .
09 T uner Setup 34 En Clearing the password Use the following procedure to clear the password. 1 P ress HOME MENU. 2 Select âÂÂT uner SetupâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER ) 3 Select âÂÂP arental ControlâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER) 4 Select âÂÂP asswordâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER ) 5 Select âÂÂClear P asswordâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER) Parental Control Password Change Password Password xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx Clear Password Exit Home Menu 6 Enter the current 4-digit password, using buttons 0 â 9 . â¢A confirmation screen appears. 7 P ress A. 8 P ress HOME MENU to exit the menu. ⢠The above procedure will reset the password to the factory default (1234). Activating the Parental Contr ol 1 P ress HOME MENU. 2 Select âÂÂT uner SetupâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER ) 3 Select âÂÂP arental ControlâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER) 4 Select âÂÂStatusâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER) 5 Select âÂÂOnâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER) ⢠The password entry screen appears. Enter your 4-digit password using buttons 0 â 9 . 6 P ress HOME MENU to exit the menu. ⢠If you select âÂÂOff â in step 5, then select âÂÂReset on Startupâ or âÂÂDonâÂÂt R esetâÂÂ. W ith âÂÂReset on Startupâ selected, the P arental Control is automatically activated when the power to the system is turned off and on. W ith âÂÂDonâÂÂt R esetâ selected, the P arental Control remains off when the power to the system is off and on. Setting the voluntary movie rating system (MP AA) 1 P ress HOME MENU. 2 Select âÂÂT uner SetupâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER ) 3 Select âÂÂP arental ControlâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER) 4 Select âÂÂMP AA RatingsâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER ) 5 Select the desired rating and change the setting. ( / then ENTER) Parental Control MPAA Ratings G MPAA Ratings Blocked MPAA Ratings G, PG, PG-13, R, NC-17, Adult, NR xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx PG PG-13 Exit Home Menu ⢠The password entry screen appears. Enter your 4-digit password using buttons 0 â 9 . ⢠Each time you press ENTER , the setting is switched. â¢A lock icon appears beside the block ed rating. ⢠All the ratings have been unblock ed before shipment. 6 P ress HOME MENU to exit the menu. ⢠Blocking a rating causes more severe ratings to be automatically blocked as well. Likewise, unblocking a rating causes less severe ratings to be automatically unblocked. We suggest you write down your password so you donâÂÂt forget it. PRO-1120HD/PRO -920HD Y our password No.: If you forget the passwor d When the message âÂÂEnter your P asswordâ is displayed in step 6 under âÂÂClearing the passwordâÂÂ, press the ENTER button on the remote control unit and hold it down for 3 seconds or longer . The password reverts to âÂÂ1234âÂÂ.
09 T uner Setup English 35 En Setting the TV ratings 1 P ress HOME MENU. 2 Select âÂÂT uner SetupâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER ) 3 Select âÂÂP arental ControlâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER) 4 Select âÂÂTV RatingsâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER) 5 Select the desired rating and change the setting. ( / then ENTER) TV Ratings TV-Y TV-Y7 TV Ratings Blocked TV Ratings xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx TV-G TV-PG Exit Home Menu Parental Control ⢠The password entry screen appears. Enter your 4-digit password using buttons 0 â 9 . ⢠Each time you press ENTER , the setting is switched. â¢A lock icon appears beside the block ed rating. ⢠All the ratings have been unblock ed before shipment. 6 P ress HOME MENU to exit the menu. ⢠Blocking a rating causes more severe ratings to be automatically blocked as well. Likewise, unblocking a rating causes less severe ratings to be automatically unblocked. Setting the TV Parental Guidelines (TV Guidelines) 1 P ress HOME MENU. 2 Select âÂÂT uner SetupâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER ) 3 Select âÂÂP arental ControlâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER) 4 Select âÂÂTV P arental GuidelinesâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER) 5 Select the desired rating and change the setting. ( / then ENTER) Parental Control TV Parental Guidelines Fantasy Violence TV Parental Guidelines Blocked TV Parental Guidelines xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx Violence Sexual Situations Exit Home Menu ⢠The password entry screen appears. Enter your 4-digit password using buttons 0 â 9 . ⢠Each time you press ENTER , the setting is switched. â¢A lock icon appears beside the block ed rating. ⢠All the ratings have been unblock ed before shipment. 6 P ress HOME MENU to exit the menu. ⢠Blocking a rating causes more severe ratings to be automatically blocked as well. Likewise, unblocking a rating causes less severe ratings to be automatically unblocked. Blocking Not Rated TV programs Use the following procedure to block TV programs whose rating information is unavailable. 1 P ress HOME MENU. 2 Select âÂÂT uner SetupâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER ) 3 Select âÂÂP arental ControlâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER) 4 Select âÂÂUnavailable RatingsâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER) 5 Select âÂÂBlockâ or âÂÂDonâÂÂt BlockâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER ) Unavailable Ratings xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx Unavailable Ratings Block DonâÂÂt Block Parental Control Exit Home Menu ⢠The password entry screen appears. Enter your 4-digit password using buttons 0 â 9 . ⢠T he factor y default is âÂÂDonâÂÂt BlockâÂÂ. 6 P ress HOME MENU to exit the menu.
09 T uner Setup 36 En Canadian rating systems In Canada you can choose the Canadian English ratings or the Canadian F rench ratings. These ratings are based on the Canadian Radio- T elevision and T elecommunications Commission (CRTC) policy . Canadian English ratings Ra ting Description E Exemp t: Includes ne ws, sports, document a- ries and other informa tion progr amming; talk show s, music videos, and variet y progr amming. C Childr en: Intended for y ounger children under the age of 8 year s. Pa ys car eful at t ention t o themes that could thr eat en their sense of securit y and well-being. C8 Children o ver 8 year s old: Contains no portr a y al of violence as the pr eferred, accept able, or only w a y t o resolv e conflict; nor encour age children t o imit at e dangerous acts which the y may see on the scr een. G Gener al: Considered accept able for all age groups. Appr opriat e viewing for the entir e family , contains v ery lit tle violence, phy sical, ve rbal or emotional. Age-Base PG Pa r ental Guidance: Int ended for a gener al audience, but ma y not be suit able for y ounger childr en (under the age of 8) because it could cont ain contro versial themes or issues. 14 Over 1 4 Y ears: Could cont ain themes wher e violence is one of the dominant elements of the st oryline, but it must be int egr al to the dev elopment of plot or char act er . Language usage could be pr ofane and nudit y present within the cont ext of the theme. 18 Adults: Int ended for view ers 1 8 year s and older and might cont ain depictions of violence, which while rela t ed t o the dev elop- ment of plot, char acter or theme s, are int ended for adult viewing. Could cont ain gr aphic language and portra yals of se x and n udit y . Canadian F rench ratings Ra ting Description E Exemp t progr amming. G Gener al: All ages and children, cont ains minimal dir ect violence, but ma y be int egr at ed into the plo t in a humorous or unr ealistic manner . 8ans Gener al but inadvisable for young childr en: Ma y be view ed by a wide public audience, but could contain scene s disturbing t o children under eight who canno t distinguish bet ween imaginary and r eal situations. R ecommended for vie wing with parent. Age-Base 1 3ans Over 1 3 year s: Could contain scenes of frequent violent scene s and therefor e r ecommended for vie wing with parent. 1 6ans Over 1 6 year s: Could contain fr equent violent scenes and int ense violence. 1 8ans Over 1 8 y ears: Onl y for adult viewing. Could contain fr equent violent scenes and e xtreme violence. Setting Canadian English ratings 1 P ress HOME MENU. 2 Select âÂÂT uner SetupâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER ) 3 Select âÂÂP arental ControlâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER) 4 Select âÂÂCanadian English RatingsâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER) 5 Select the desired rating and change the setting. ( / then ENTER) Parental Control Canadian English Ratings E Canadian English Ratings Blocked Canadian English Ratings xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx C C8 Exit Home Menu ⢠The password entry screen appears. Enter your 4-digit password using buttons 0 â 9 . ⢠Each time you press ENTER , the setting is switched. â¢A lock icon appears beside the block ed rating. ⢠All the ratings have been unblock ed before shipment. 6 P ress HOME MENU to exit the menu.
09 T uner Setup English 37 En Setting Canadian French ratings 1 P ress HOME MENU. 2 Select âÂÂT uner SetupâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER ) 3 Select âÂÂP arental ControlâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER) 4 Select âÂÂCanadian F rench RatingsâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER ) 5 Select the desired rating and change the setting. ( / then ENTER) Parental Control Canadian French Ratings E Canadian French Ratings Blocked Canadian French Ratings E, G, 8 ans , 13 ans , 16 ans , 18 ans xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx G 8 ans Exit Home Menu ⢠The password entry screen appears. Enter your 4-digit password using buttons 0 â 9 . ⢠Each time you press ENTER , the setting is switched. â¢A lock icon appears beside the block ed rating. ⢠All the ratings have been unblock ed before shipment. 6 P ress HOME MENU to exit the menu. T emporarily deactivating the Parental Contr ol When the P arental Control is working and censors a blocked TV program (or content), the Plasma Display shows nothing but a message. The method for temporarily deactivating the P arental Control differs, depending on the currently selected input source. Antenna A, antenna B, or i.LINK: P ress ENTER and then enter your 4-digit password. WWWWWWW 1000.0000 (Ant. B) xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx Parental Control Disable Parental Control Enter ⢠The password entry screen stays only for one minute. After the screen disappears, pressing ENTER causes it to appear again. Input 1 â 4: Enter your 4-digit password. Y ou need not press ENTER first, pressing ENTER causes the password entr y screen to disappear . Please Input Y our Password. ⢠The above password entry screen will also be shown during 2-screen mode, picture-in-picture, and while freezing an image. ⢠The password entry screen stays only for one minute. After the screen disappears, pressing ENTER causes it to appear again. Setting your favorite channels Set up to 10 TV channels to each of the four color buttons on the remote control unit (40 channels in total). Y ou can then quickly select from only your favorite channels. 1 P ress HOME MENU. 2 Select âÂÂT uner SetupâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER ) 3 Select âÂÂF avoritesâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER) 4 Select a color button (A, B, C, D). ( / then ENTER) 5 Select a TV channel to be registered. ( / then ENTER) Favorites Favorites Current Favorites A Line Up A4.0 A6.0 Favorites A 2.0 xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx A 4.0 A 6.0 A Exit Home Menu A â¢A star appears beside the favorite channels currently selected. â¢T o register another TV channel under the same color button, repeat step 5. T o register another TV channel under a different color button , repeat steps 4 and 5. 6 P ress HOME MENU to exit the menu. Setting up closed captions Y our Plasma Display System is equipped with an internal closed caption decoder . Closed caption allows you to view conversations, narration, and sound effects in TV programs and home videos as subtitles on your Plasma Display screen. Y ou may enjoy digital closed captions when watching digital TV programs. Digital closed captions allow you to change parameters such as fonts and colors. ⢠Not all programs and videos offer closed caption . Please look for the â â symbol to ensure that captions will be shown .
09 T uner Setup 38 En Activating the closed caption 1 P ress HOME MENU. 2 Select âÂÂT uner SetupâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER ) 3 Select âÂÂClosed CaptionsâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER) 4 Select âÂÂStatusâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER) 5 Select âÂÂOnâ or âÂÂOn If MuteâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER) Closed Captions Status Status xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx On On If Mute Off Exit Home Menu It em De scription Off Does not sho w closed captions. (factory default) On Alwa ys sho ws closed captions. On If Mut e Show s closed captions only while sound is being mut ed. 6 P ress HOME MENU to exit the menu. â¢F or MONITOR OUT , only conventional closed caption signals are output; digital closed caption signals are not output. Selecting the type of conventional closed captions Select the type of conventional closed captions that you will watch after tuning to a conventional TV channel. This selection also becomes effective when a selected digital TV program provides only conventional closed captions. ⢠âÂÂCC1âÂÂ, âÂÂCC2âÂÂ, âÂÂCC3âÂÂ, or âÂÂCC4â displays subtitles of TV dramas and news programs while allowing a full view of the picture. â¢â T ext1âÂÂ, â T ext2âÂÂ, â T ext3âÂÂ, or â T ext4â superimposes on the picture other information (e.g. TV guide, weather) that is independent of the TV in progress. 1 P ress HOME MENU. 2 Select âÂÂT uner SetupâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER ) 3 Select âÂÂClosed CaptionsâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER) 4 Select â Analog SettingsâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER) 5 Select the desired closed caption . ( / then ENTER) Analog Settings xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx Closed Captions Analog Settings CC3 CC2 CC1 T ext 1 CC4 Exit Home Menu ⢠The factory default is âÂÂCC1âÂÂ. 6 P ress HOME MENU to exit the menu. Selecting digital closed captions Use the following procedure to select digital closed captions. 1 P ress HOME MENU. 2 Select âÂÂT uner SetupâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER ) 3 Select âÂÂClosed CaptionsâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER) 4 Select âÂÂDigital SettingsâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER) 5 Select âÂÂDigital Ser viceâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER) 6 Select the desired closed caption . ( / then ENTER) Digital Settings Digital Settings Digital Service xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx Closed Captions Digital Service Service 3 Service 4 Service 5 Service 2 Service 1 Exit Home Menu ⢠The factory default is âÂÂSer vice 1âÂÂ. 7 P ress HOME MENU to exit the menu. ⢠The P rimar y Caption Ser vice is usually offered for Ser vice 1, and the Secondar y Language Ser vice is usually offered for Ser vice 2 if these ser vices are available. Selecting digital closed caption parameters Use the following procedure to change such parameters of digital closed captions as font size, font type, foreground and background colors. 1 P ress HOME MENU. 2 Select âÂÂT uner SetupâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER ) 3 Select âÂÂClosed CaptionsâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER) 4 Select âÂÂDigital SettingsâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER) 5 Select âÂÂF ont SizeâÂÂ, âÂÂF ontâÂÂ, or any other item. ( / then ENTER ) 6 Select the desired parameter . ( / then ENTER) Digital Settings Digital Settings Font Size xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx Closed Captions Font Size Small Standard Large Exit Home Menu 7 R epeat steps 5 and 6 as necessar y . ( , / ) 8 P ress HOME MENU to exit the menu.
09 T uner Setup English 39 En The following table shows the parameters selectable for each item. It em Selection F ont Size Auto/ Lar ge/ Standar d / Small F ont 1 Aut o/ F ont 1/ F ont 2/ F ont 3 / F ont 4/ F ont 5/ F ont 6/ F ont 7 F ont Color Aut o/ Black/ Whit e / Red/ Gr een/ Blue/ Y ellow/ Magent a/ Cyan F ont Opacit y Aut o/ Solid / T r ansparent/ T r anslucent/ Flashing Background C olor Aut o/ Black / Whit e/ Red/ Gr een/ Blue/ Y ellow/ Magent a/ Cyan Background Opacit y Aut o/ Solid / T r anspar ent/ T r anslucent 1 F ont 1 (monospaced with serifs)/ Font 2 (proportionally spaced with serifs)/ F ont 3 (monospaced without serifs)/ F ont 4 (proportionally spaced without serifs)/ F ont 5 (casual font)/ F ont 6 (cursive font)/ F ont 7 (small capitals font) W ith â Autoâ selected, parameters specified by the provider are used; if not specified by the provider , the bolded default parameters are used. If you select parameters other than â AutoâÂÂ, the selected parameters are used regardless of provider âÂÂs specifications. Clock Setting W ith â Auto Setâ selected for Clock Setting, the system acquires and sets time information automatically . Y ou can also manually set the correct time. If you disconnect the power cord from the power outlet or power blackout occurs, the set time is cleared. 1 P ress HOME MENU. 2 Select âÂÂT uner SetupâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER ) 3 Select âÂÂClockâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER) 4 Select âÂÂTime ZoneâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER ) 5 Select a time zone for your area. ( / then ENTER) Clock Time Zone Atlantic Eastern Time Zone xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx Central Mountain Exit Home Menu Current Time: 9:55 pm EDT Monday 05/17/04 6 Select âÂÂD.S.T .â ( , / , then ENTER ) 7 Select â Appliesâ or âÂÂDoes Not Apply âÂÂ. ( / then ENTER) ⢠Mak e this selection, depending on whether summer time is employed in your area. Clock Daylight Savings Time Applies D.S.T . xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx Does Not Apply Exit Home Menu Current Time: 9:56 pm EDT Monday 05/17/04 8 Select â Auto/Manual SetâÂÂ. ( , / , then ENTER ) 9 Select â Auto Setâ or âÂÂManual SetâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER) 10 If you select â Auto SetâÂÂ, select an antenna (A or B) and a channel number using / and ENTER. Auto/Manual Set Clock Set Channel Ant. A Auto/Manual Set â¢Auto Set 2.0 xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx Clock Exit Home Menu Current Time: 11:58 pm PDT Monday 05/17/04 ⢠The date and time will be automatically corrected using data from the selected channel. If you select âÂÂManual SetâÂÂ, manually set the date and time using / , / and ENTER. Auto/Manual Set Date and Time 3 /17/04 Auto/Manual Set â¢Manual Set 11:58pm xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx Clock 5 4 3 6 Exit Home Menu Current Time: 11:58 pm PDT Monday 05/17/04 11 P ress HOME MENU to exit the menu. ⢠When the time has not been set, the REC TIMER indicator on the front of the Media Receiver blinks. ⢠When the time has not yet been set, you cannot view channel banner information, use auto channel select, and preset TV programs for recording.
10 Adjustments and Settings 40 En Y ou can also use the menu to change the options. 1 P ress HOME MENU. 2 Select âÂÂP ictureâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER) 3 Select â AV Selection âÂÂ. ( / then ENTER) 4 Select the desired option. ( / then ENTER ) AV Selection ST ANDARD DYNAMIC MOVIE GAME USER F or A V source It em De scription ST AND ARD F or a highly defined image in a normally bright room D YNAMIC F or a very sharp image with the maximum contr ast This mode does no t allow manual image qualit y adjustment. MO VIE F or a movie G AME Low ers image brightness for ea sier viewing. USER Allo ws the user t o customize se t tings as desir ed. Y ou can set the mode for each input sour ce. F or PC sour ce It em De scription ST AND ARD F or a highly defined image in a normally (factory default) bright room USER Allo ws the user t o customize se t tings as desir ed. Y ou can set the mode for each input sour ce. 5 P ress HOME MENU to exit the menu. Sleep Timer When the selected time elapses, the Sleep Timer automatically places the system into the standby mode. P ress SLEEP to select the desired time. ⢠The timer starts counting. ⢠Each time you press SLEEP , the selection is switched as below : (cancel) 30 60 90 120 Off (minutes) ⢠The factory default is âÂÂOff âÂÂ. â¢T o cancel the Sleep Timer , select âÂÂOff â by pressing SLEEP . â¢F ive minutes before the selected time elapses, the remaining time appears ever y minute. Y ou can also use the menu to set the Sleep Timer . 1 P ress HOME MENU. 2 Select âÂÂSleep Timer âÂÂ. ( / then ENTER ) 3 Select the desired time. ( / then ENTER) 4 P ress HOME MENU to exit the menu. AV Selection Select from the five viewing options, depending on the current environment (e.g., room brightness), the type of the current TV program, or the type of images input from external equipment. 1 P ress AV SELECTION. ⢠The current A V Selection mode appears. 2 P ress AV SELECTION again before the displayed mode disappears. â¢F or AV source, the mode is switched in the order ; ST ANDARD, DYNAMIC, MOVIE, GAME, then USER . â¢F or PC source, the mode is switched between ST ANDARD and USER .
10 Adjustments and Settings English 41 En Picture adjustments Adjust the picture to your preference for the chosen A V Selection option (except DYNAMIC). 1 P ress HOME MENU. 2 Select âÂÂP ictureâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER) 3 Select an item to be adjusted. ( / then ENTER) Picture AV Selection Contrast Brightness Color Tint Sharpness Pro Adjust Reset ST AND ARD 40 0 0 0 0 F or PC source, the following screen appears: Picture AV Selection Contrast Brightness Red Green Blue Reset ST AND ARD 40 0 0 0 0 4 Select the desired level. ( / then ENTER ) Contrast 40 ⢠When an adjustment screen is in display , you can also change an item to be adjusted, by pressing / . 5 P ress HOME MENU to exit the menu. F or A V source It em but ton butt on C ontr ast F or less contr ast F or more contr ast Brightness F or less brightness F or more brightness C olor F or less color int ensit y F or more color int ensit y T int Skin t ones become Skin tones become purplish gr eenish Sharpness F or less sharpness F or more sharpne ss F or PC sour ce It em but ton butt on Co ntrast F or less contr ast F or more contr ast Brightness F or less brightness F or more brightness Re d F or weak er red F or stronger r ed Gr een F or weak er green F or stronger gr een Blue F or weak er blue F or stronger blue â¢T o make settings for âÂÂP ureCinemaâÂÂ, âÂÂColor T empâÂÂ, âÂÂMPEG NRâÂÂ, âÂÂDNRâÂÂ, âÂÂCTIâÂÂ, and âÂÂDREâÂÂ, select âÂÂP ro Adjustâ in step 3, and then press ENTER . F or the subsequent procedures, see âÂÂP ro AdjustâÂÂ. â¢T o restore the factor y defaults for all the items, press / to select âÂÂResetâ in step 3, and then press ENTER. A confirmation screen appears. P ress / to select âÂÂY esâÂÂ, and then press ENTER . Pro Adjust This system provides various advanced functions for optimizing the picture quality . 1 P ress HOME MENU. 2 Select âÂÂP ictureâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER) 3 Select âÂÂP ro AdjustâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER) 4 Select an item to be adjusted. ( / then ENTER) â¢Y ou can select âÂÂP ureCinemaâÂÂ, âÂÂColor T empâÂÂ, âÂÂMPEG NRâÂÂ, âÂÂDNRâÂÂ, âÂÂCTIâÂÂ, or âÂÂDREâÂÂ. 5 Select the desired parameter . ( / then ENTER) â¢F or the selectable parameters, see the table. Pur eCinema Automatically detects a film-based source (originally encoded at 24 frames/second), analyzes it, then recreates each still film frame for high-definition picture quality . Selections Off Deactiv at es the PureCinema. St andard Produce s smooth and vivid mo ving images (film specific) b y aut omatically de t ecting recor ded image information when displa ying D VD or 1 08 0i HD TV images (e.g., movie s) ha ving 2 4 fr ames per second. AD V Produce s smooth and qualit y moving images (as sho wn on theater screens) b y conv erting to 7 2 Hz when displa ying D VD images (e.g., movie s) ha ving 2 4 fr ames per second. R emark Y ou cannot select âÂÂSt andardâ when 4 80p or 7 2 0p signals ar e being input.
10 Adjustments and Settings 42 En C olor T emp Adjusts the color temperature, resulting in a better white balance. Selections High Whit e with bluish tone Mid-High Int ermediat e tone bet ween High and Mid Mid Natur al t one Mid-Low Int ermediat e t one bet ween High and Low Low Whit e with reddish t oneMid-Low Manual Allow s you t o manually adjust the color t emper ature. Use the follo wing procedur e. 1 Select âÂÂManualâÂÂ, and then press and hold ENTER for more than three seconds to display the manual adjustment screen. 2 Select an item to be adjusted. ( / then ENTER) 3 Select the desired level. ( / then ENTER ) It em but ton but t on R High F or weak er red F or stronger r ed G High F or weak er green F or stronger green B High F or weaker blue F or stronger blue R Low F or weak er red F or stronger r ed G Low F or weak er green F or stronger green B Low F or weak er blue F or stronger blue â¢T o per form adjustment for another item, press RETURN, and then repeat steps 2 and 3 . â¢Y ou may press / to immediately change an item to be adjusted. 4 P ress HOME MENU to exit the menu. MPEG NR Eliminates mosquito noise from video images when a digital TV channel is watched or a DVD is played, resulting in noise-free images. Selections Off Deactiv at es the MPEG NR. High Enhanced MPEG NR Mid Standar d MPEG NR Low Moder at e MPEG NR DNR Eliminates video noise for clean crisp images. The DNR stands for Digital Noise Reduction . Selections Off Deactiv at es the DNR. High Enhanced DNR Mid Standar d DNR Low Moder at e DNR CTI P rovides images with clearer color contours. The CTI stands for Color T ransient Improvement. Selections Off Deactiv at es the CTI. On Activ at es the CTI. DRE Adjusts dark and bright portions on images so that the contrast between brightness and darkness becomes clearer . Selections Off Deactiv at es the DRE. High Enhanced DRE Mid Standar d DRE Low Moder at e DRE Color Management Adjusts the hue for each basic color . Use the following procedure. 1 Select an item to be adjusted. ( / then ENTER) 2 Select the desired level. ( / ) It em but ton but ton Re d Closer to magent a Closer to y ellow Y ellow Closer t o red Closer t o green Gr een Closer t o yello w Closer t o cyan Cyan Closer t o green Closer to blue Blue Closer t o cy an Closer t o magenta Magenta Closer to blue Closer to r ed â¢T o perform adjustment for another item, press RETURN , and then repeat steps 1 and 2 . â¢Y ou may press / to immediately change an item to be adjusted. 3 P ress HOME MENU to exit the menu.
10 Adjustments and Settings English 43 En Sound adjustments Adjust the sound to your preference for the chosen A V Selection option. See page 40. 1 P ress HOME MENU. 2 Select âÂÂSoundâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER) 3 Select an item to be adjusted. ( / ) 4 Select the desired level. ( / ) Bass Balance T reble Reset FOCUS Front Surr ound 0 0 Off Off 2 Sound ST AND ARD It em butt on butt on Tr eble F or weak er treble F or stronger tr eble Bass F or weak er bass F or stronger bass Balance Decrease s audio from Decr eases audio from the right speaker the left speaker 5 P ress HOME MENU to exit the menu. â¢T o restore the factor y defaults for all the items, press / to select âÂÂResetâ in step 3, and then press ENTER. A confirmation screen appears. P ress / to select â Y esâÂÂ, and then press ENTER . FOCUS This shifts the sound coming direction (sound images) upward and produces clear sound contours. 1 P ress HOME MENU. 2 Select âÂÂSoundâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER) 3 Select âÂÂFOCUSâÂÂ. ( / ) 4 Select the desired parameter . ( / ) It em Descrip tion Off Deactiva t es the FOCUS. (factory default) On Activat es the FOCUS. 5 P ress HOME MENU to exit the menu. Front Surr ound This provides three-dimensional sound effects and/or deep, rich bass. 1 P ress HOME MENU. 2 Select âÂÂSoundâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER) 3 Select âÂÂF ront SurroundâÂÂ. ( / ) 4 Select the desired parameter . ( / ) It em Descrip tion Off Deactiva t es both the SR S and T ruBass. SRS R eproduce s highly effectiv e three- dimensional sound. T ruBass Pro vides deep, rich bass using a ne w (factory default) technology . T ruBass SR S Pro vides both T ruBass and SRS effects. 5 P ress HOME MENU to exit the menu. ⢠(WOW) designates a status where the FOCUS is on and T ruBass SRS has been selected for Front Surround. ⢠is a trademark of SRS Labs, Inc. ⢠WOW technology is incorporated under license from SRS Labs, Inc.
10 Adjustments and Settings 44 En Power Control P ower Control provides convenient functions for power saving. Energy Save Y ou can save power consumption by decreasing the picture brightness. When you need not watch the screen and want to enjoy only audio, you can also deactivate the screen . 1 P ress HOME MENU. 2 Select âÂÂP ower ControlâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER) 3 Select âÂÂEnergy SaveâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER ) 4 Select âÂÂSaveâ or âÂÂP icture Off âÂÂ. ( / then ENTER) It em De scription Standar d Does not decr ease picture brightne ss. (factory default) Sa ve Decr eases pictur e brightness t o sav e pow er . Picture Off Deactiva t es the scr een to sa ve po wer . T o re stor e the screen displa y , press an y but t on o ther than V OL /â and MUTING . This set ting is not memorized b y the sy stem. 5 P ress HOME MENU to exit the menu. â¢Y ou can also select this function using the Home menu when the input source is a PC. No Signal off (A V mode only) The system will be automatically placed into the standby mode if no signal is received for 15 minutes. 1 P ress HOME MENU. 2 Select âÂÂP ower ControlâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER) 3 Select âÂÂNo Signal off âÂÂ. ( / then ENTER ) 4 Select âÂÂEnableâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER) It em De scription Disable Does no t place the sy stem int o the (factory default) standb y mode. Enable Places the s yst em int o the standb y mode if no signal is receiv ed for 1 5 minut es. 5 P ress HOME MENU to exit the menu. â¢F ive minutes before the system is placed into the standby mode, a message appears ever y minute. ⢠The system may not be placed into the standby mode when noise signals are present at the Media Receiver after a TV program finishes. No Operation off (A V mode only) The system will be automatically placed into the standby mode when no operation is per formed for three hours. 1 P ress HOME MENU. 2 Select âÂÂP ower ControlâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER) 3 Select âÂÂNo Operation off âÂÂ. ( / then ENTER) 4 Select âÂÂEnableâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER) It em De scription Disable Does no t place the sy stem int o the (factory default) standb y mode. Enable Places the s yst em int o the standb y mode if no oper ation is performed for three hour s. 5 P ress HOME MENU to exit the menu. â¢F ive minutes before the system is placed into the standby mode, a message appears ever y minute. Power Management (PC mode only) The system will be automatically placed into the standby mode when no signal is received from the personal computer . 1 P ress HOME MENU. 2 Select âÂÂP ower ControlâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER) 3 Select âÂÂP ower ManagementâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER) 4 Select âÂÂMode1â or âÂÂMode2âÂÂ. ( / then ENTER) It em De scription Off No pow er management (factory default) Mode1 ⢠Places the s y st em into the st andby mode when no signal is r eceived fr om the personal comput er for eight minut es. ⢠Even when y ou start using the comput er and a signal is r eceived again, the s y stem sta ys off . ⢠The s yst em is switched on again by pr essing ST ANDB Y/ON on the Plasma Displa y or TV on the r emot e control unit. Mode2 ⢠Places the s y st em into the st andby mode when no signal is r eceived for eight seconds. ⢠When you st art using the computer and a signal is receiv ed again, the sy stem is switched on. ⢠The s yst em is switched on again by pr essing ST ANDB Y/ON on the Plasma Displa y or TV on the r emot e control unit. 5 P ress HOME MENU to exit the menu.
10 Adjustments and Settings English 45 En Adjusting image positions (A V mode only) Adjust the horizontal and vertical positions of images on the Plasma Display . 1 P ress HOME MENU. 2 Select âÂÂOptionâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER) 3 Select âÂÂP ositionâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER) 4 Select âÂÂH/V P osition AdjustâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER) P osition H/V P osition Adjust Reset 5 Adjust the vertical position ( / ) or horizontal position ( / ). 6 P ress HOME MENU to exit the menu. â¢T o restore the factor y defaults for all the items, press / to select âÂÂResetâ in step 4, and then press ENTER. A confirmation screen appears. P ress / to select â Y esâÂÂ, and then press ENTER . ⢠Adjustments are stored separately according to input source. Adjusting image positions and clock automatically (PC mode only) Use Auto Setup to automatically adjust positions and clock of images coming from a personal computer . 1 P ress HOME MENU. 2 Select âÂÂOptionâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER) 3 Select â Auto SetupâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER) Option Auto Setup Manual Setup ⢠Auto Setup starts. 4 P ress HOME MENU to exit the menu. ⢠When Auto Setup is finished, â Auto Setup completed.â appears. ⢠Even when â Auto Setup completed.â appears, Auto Setup may have failed, depending on conditions. ⢠Auto Setup may fail with a PC image composed of similar patterns or monochrome. If not successful, change the PC image and try again. ⢠Be sure to connect the computer to the Media R eceiver and switch it on before starting Auto Setup. Adjusting image positions and clock manually (PC mode only) Usually you can easily adjust the positions and clock of images using Auto Setup. Use Manual Setup to optimize the positions and clock of images when necessar y . 1 P ress HOME MENU. 2 Select âÂÂOptionâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER) 3 Select âÂÂManual SetupâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER) 4 Select an item to be adjusted. ( / then ENTER) Manual Setup H/V Position Adjust Clock Phase Reset 0 0 5 Pe r form adjustment. ( / and / ) ⢠Use / only when you adjust the vertical position after selecting âÂÂH/V P osition AdjustâÂÂ. 6 P ress HOME MENU to exit the menu. â¢T o restore the factor y defaults for all the items, press / to select âÂÂResetâ in step 4, and then press ENTER. A confirmation screen appears. P ress / to select âÂÂY esâÂÂ, and then press ENTER .
10 Adjustments and Settings 46 En AV mode 4:3 WIDE FULL CINEMA ZOOM PC mode ex cept for XGA signals 4:3 Dot by Dot FULL PC mode for XGA signals 4:3 FULL2 FULL1 Selecting a scr een size In single-screen mode, press S CREEN SIZE to change the size of the screen from among the selectable options for the type of video signals currently received. ⢠The selectable screen sizes differ depending on the types of input signals. AV mode It em Description 4:3 F or 4:3 âÂÂstandar dâ pictures. A side bar appear s on each side. FULL F or 1 6:9 squeeze pictures. ZOOM F or 1 6:9 let terbo x pictures. Bar s ma y appear on the t op and bot tom with some pr ograms. CINEMA F or 1 4:9 let terbo x picture s. Bars ma y appear on the t op and bot tom on some pr ograms. WIDE In this mode picture s are progr essivel y stre tched to wa rd each side of the screen. PC mode ex cept for XGA signals It em Description 4:3 F ills the screen without alt ering the input signal a spect r atio. FULL F ull 1 6:9 screen displa y Dot by Dot Matches input signal with same n umber of screen pix els. PC mode for XGA signals (Ex. 1024 à768 input at PRO-1120HD) It em Description 4:3 Ma tches input signal with the same number of screen pix els. Optimized for 1 02 4 à7 6 8 display FULL1 F ull 1 6:9 scr een displa y Optimized for 1 02 4 à7 6 8 display FULL2 F or wide signal displa y Use when displa ying 1 2 80 à7 6 8 signal resolution. ⢠In 2-screen mode, press S CREEN SIZE to change the size of lef t screen. ⢠The PC mode above is for the PRO-1120HD. For the PRO-920HD the number of panel pixels is different, so signal processing and actual viewing conditions will var y slightly . ⢠While watching High Definition TV broadcasting, pressing S CREEN SIZE switches between FULL and WIDE. ⢠If you watch High Definition TV broadcasting with WIDE selected, part of the screen (e.g., images, graphic interface) can be missed. If this is the case, select FULL.
10 Adjustments and Settings English 47 En Changing the brightness at both sides of the scr een (Side Mask) W ith the 4:3 screen size selected for the A V mode, you can change the brightness of the gray side masks that appear at both sides of the screen. 1 P ress HOME MENU. 2 Select âÂÂOptionâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER) 3 Select âÂÂSide MaskâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER) 4 Select the desired parameter . ( / then ENTER) It em Description Fixed Alwa ys se ts the same brightness for the (factory default) gra y side masks. Aut o A djust s the brightness of the gr a y side masks according t o the brightness of images. 5 P ress HOME MENU to exit the menu. Language setting Y ou can select a language to be used for on-screen display such as menus from among three languages: English, F rench, and Spanish. 1 P ress HOME MENU. 2 Select âÂÂOptionâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER) 3 Select âÂÂLanguageâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER) 4 Select a language. ( / ) Language Menu English 5 P ress HOME MENU to exit the menu.
11 Timer Pr esetting 48 En 7 Specify a channel number . ( / then ENTER for each digit) Day(s) Start/End Times Recording Device â¢1 Wed 5/19 3:58p - 10:58p A 2.0 None xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx Clear Timer Suspend Timer New Timer Exit Home Menu D B A Timers Channel 8 Select a recording device. ( / then ENTER ) â¢T o preset for auto channel select, select âÂÂNoneâÂÂ. Day(s) Start/End Times Channel â¢1 T ue. 5/18 12:03a - 1:03a A 2.0 D-VHS xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx Clear Timer Suspend Timer New Timer Exit Home Menu D B A Name Advantz Recording Device Timers 9 P ress HOME MENU to exit the menu. An alarm screen appears slightly before the preset timer is activated. If watching a TV channel through antenna A or B in a single-screen mode, the screen allows you to cancel the presetting by pressing D . Timer Alert The Following timer is about to begin: Sun. 1/0 12:00 am â 12:00 am Ant. A 0.0 Cancel Timer Accept D A The icons beside the list numbers have the following meanings. Icon Meaning REC Pre set for r ecording; no conflict s with other timers exist. Pre set for aut o channel select; no conflicts with o ther timer s exist. REC Pre set for r ecording; conflict s with other timer s exist. Pre set for aut o channel select; conflicts with other timers e xist. REC Pre set for r ecording; the timer st art has been dela yed. Pre set for aut o channel select; the timer start has been dela yed. Presetting TV pr ograms using the timer Using the menu, you can easily preset TV programs for watching later (auto channel select), recording with a D- VHS recorder , or recording via the supplied VCR controller . W ith the power to the system left on, the Auto Channel P reset automatically selects the preset TV program when its on-air time comes. Then you will not miss an important TV program when you are enjoying another TV program. F or the connections with a D- VHS recorder , see pages 54 and 55. F or the connections with the supplied VCR controller , see page 59. â¢Y ou can make up to 32 presettings in total. ⢠In steps 4 to 8, you can also press / to move the cursor . 1 P ress HOME MENU. 2 Select âÂÂTimersâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER) 3 Select a list number . ( / then ENTER) Day(s) Start/End Times Channel Recording Device Timers â¢1 Mon 5/17 9:58p - 10:58p A 2.0 None xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx Clear Timer Suspend Timer New Timer Exit Home Menu D B A Timers 4 Specify a date. ( / then ENTER) ⢠The selections include the days of the week (e.g., Mondays), âÂÂWeekdaysâÂÂ, âÂÂW eekendsâÂÂ, and âÂÂEveryday âÂÂ. Selecting one of these will cause the timer to activate periodically . Start/End Times Channel Recording Device â¢1 Wed. 5/19 9:58p - 10:58p A 2.0 None xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx Clear Timer Suspend Timer New Timer Exit Home Menu D B A Timers T ue. 5/18 Mon. 5/17 Thu. 5/20 Fri. 5/21 Day(s) 5 Specify the start and end times. ( / then ENTER for each field) Day(s) Channel Recording Device â¢1 Wed 5/19 3:58p - 10:58p A 2.0 None xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx Clear Timer Suspend Timer New Timer Exit Home Menu D B A 2 1 4 5 Timers Start/End Times 6 Select antenna A or B. ( / then ENTER ) Day(s) Start/End Times Recording Device â¢1 Wed 5/19 3:58p - 10:58p A 2.0 None xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx Clear Timer Suspend Timer New Timer Exit Home Menu D B A Timers Channel
11 Timer Presetting English 49 En ⢠If you set a timer to record a future digital program on a VCR , you must first turn off P arental Control. Other wise, you will record only a black screen. See âÂÂT emporarily deactivating the Parental Controlâ on page 37. â¢T o change the TV program presetting, repeat the above procedure. T o cancel the presetting, press D after selecting a list number in step 4. ⢠Switch on the recording equipment at least 30 seconds before the start of the preset program; otherwise recording will not be executed. ⢠When presetting for recording, finish the operations two minutes (one minute for auto channel select) before the start of the program; otherwise presetting may fail. ⢠Auto channel select is not executed when the system is in the standby mode. â¢R ecording is not executed if recordable D - VHS tape is not present in the D-VHS recorder when the preset program starts. This is also true when a specified D- VHS recorder is not in connection. â¢F or recording with a VCR , confirm that the video output terminals on the Media Receiver have been connected to the signal input terminals on the VCR . â¢P resettings become ineffective if the start time and the end time are identical. Priority rules for overlapped pr esettings When preset TV programs are overlapped, the following three rules are used to determine a higher priority . If more than one of the three rules are met, the rules are applied in the order; 1, 2, then 3. R ule 1: P resetting for recording is given a higher priority over presetting for auto channel select. P resetting for recording P resetting for auto channel select The shaded area is not executed. R ule 2: If two presettings are overlapped, presetting with earlier start time is given a higher priority . If two presettings are sequential, the last portion of the first program may not be recorded for 60 seconds (or less) because recording of the second program is started at the exact start time. P rogram A P rogram B The shaded area is not executed. R ule 3: If presettings at the same start time are overlapped, presetting with a higher list number is given a higher priority .
12 Enjoying thr ough Exter nal Equipment 50 En Y ou can connect many types of external equipment to your Plasma Display System, like a DVD player , VCR, personal computer , game console, and camcorder . To view images coming from external equipment, select the input source using the INPUT buttons on the remote control (page 14) or the INPUT button on the Plasma Display . â¢T o protect all equipment, always turn off the system before connecting to a DVD player , VCR , personal computer , game console, camcorder , or other external equipment. â¢R efer to the relevant instruction manual (DVD player , personal computer , etc.) carefully before making connections. W atching a DVD image Connecting a DVD player Use the INPUT 1 terminals when connecting a DVD player and other audiovisual equipment. Cable CARD ANTENNA/ CABLE A IN NPUT 2 VIDEO VIDEO R-AUDIO-L R-AUDIO-L COMPONENT VIDEO Y Y C B /P B C B /P B C R /P R C R /P R S-VIDEO R-AUDIO-L R-AUDIO-L VIDEO INPUT 1 HDMI DIGITAL OUT OPTICAL S400 INPUT 3 INPUT 1 Cable CARD (TS) Media Receiver (rear view) AV cable (commercially available) Component Video cable (commercially available) S- Video cable (commercially available) DVD player Displaying a DVD image To watch a DVD image, press INP UT 1 on the remote control unit or press INPUT on the Plasma Display to select INPUT1. â¢R efer to your DVD player instruction manual for the signal type. ⢠The INPUT 1 terminals are checked for cable connections in the order where; 1) Component Video , 2) S- Video , 3) Video. ⢠Connect external equipment to only terminals that are to be actually used. â¢Y ou can also use the INPUT 3 terminals when connecting only with the Component Video output terminals on a DVD player . W atching a VCR image Connecting a VCR Use the INPUT 2 terminals when connecting a VCR and other audiovisual equipment. MONITOR OUT VCR CONTROL Cable CARD ANTENNA/ CABLE A IN ANTENNA B CONTROL IN OUT S-VIDEO INPUT 2 INPUT 3 S-VIDEO VIDEO VIDEO R-AUDIO-L R-AUDIO-L COMPONENT VIDEO Y Y C B /P B C B /P B C R /P R C R /P R S-VIDEO R-AUDIO-L R-AUDIO-L VIDEO S400 INPUT 1 INPU T HDMI DIGITAL OUT OPTICAL SERVICE ONL Y INPUT 3 INPUT 1 IN OUT Cable CARD (TS) Media Receiver (r ear view) AV cable (commercially available) S- Video cable (commercially available) VCR Displaying a VCR image To watch a VCR image, press INPUT 2 on the remote control unit or press INPUT on the Plasma Display to select INPUT2. ⢠The INPUT 2 terminals are checked for cable connections in the order where; 1) S- Video, 2) Video . ⢠Connect external equipment to only terminals that are to be actually used.
12 Enjoying thr ough Exter nal Equipment English 51 En Using HDMI Input The INPUT 1 and INPUT 3 terminals include HDMI terminals to which digital video and audio signals can be input. T o use the HDMI terminal, activate the terminal and specify the types of video and audio signals to be received from the connected equipment. F or the types of these signals, see the operation manual that came with the connected equipment. Before starting the menu, press INPUT 1 (or INP UT 3) on the remote control unit or press INPUT on the Plasma Display to select INPUT 1 (or INPUT 3). Input signal corr elation table 19 2 0 â 1 08 0i@5 9.94/6 0Hz 720 â 48 0p@5 9.9 4/6 0Hz 12 8 0 â 72 0p@5 9.9 4/6 0Hz 72 0(1 4 4 0) â 48 0i@5 9.94/6 0Hz ⢠PC signals are not supported. Connecting HDMI equipment INPUT 3 COMPONENT VIDEO Y Y C B /P B C B /P B C R /P R C R /P R S-VIDEO R-AUDIO-L R-AUDIO-L VIDEO S400 INPUT 1 INPUT 3 HDMI DIGITAL OUT OPTICAL INPUT 3 INPUT 1 (TS) Audio cable (commercially available) Make this connection when inputting analog audio signals. Media Receiver (r ear view) HDMI cable (commercially available) HDMI equipment To activate the HDMI terminal: 1 P ress HOME MENU. 2 Select âÂÂOptionâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER) 3 Select âÂÂHDMI InputâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER) 4 Select âÂÂSettingâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER) 5 Select âÂÂEnableâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER ) It em Description Disable Deactiva t es the HDMI t erminal. (factory default) Enable Activa te s the HDMI t erminal. 6 P ress HOME MENU to exit the menu. To specif y the type of digital video signals: 1 P ress HOME MENU. 2 Select âÂÂOptionâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER) 3 Select âÂÂHDMI InputâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER) 4 Select âÂÂVideoâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER ) 5 Select the type of digital video signals. ( / then ENTER ) ⢠If you select â AutoâÂÂ, an attempt will be made to identify the type of digital video signals when digital video signals are received. It em Description Aut o Automa tically identifie s input digital video (factory default) signals. Color -1 Digital Component V ideo signals (4:2:2) locked Color -2 Digital Component V ideo signals (4:4:4) locked Color -3 Digital R GB signals locked 6 P ress HOME MENU to exit the menu. ⢠If you select a parameter other than â AutoâÂÂ, make such a setting that results in natural color . ⢠If no image appears, specify another digital video signal type. â¢F or the digital video signal types to be specified, check the operation manual that came with the connected equipment. To specif y the type of audio signals: 1 P ress HOME MENU. 2 Select âÂÂOptionâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER) 3 Select âÂÂHDMI InputâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER) 4 Select â AudioâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER) 5 Select the type of audio signals. ( / then ENTER) ⢠If you select â AutoâÂÂ, an attempt will be made to identify the type of audio signals when audio signals are received.
12 Enjoying thr ough Exter nal Equipment 52 En It em Description Aut o Automa tically identifie s input audio (factory default) signals. Digital Accept s digital audio signals. Analog Accepts analog audio signals. 6 P ress HOME MENU to exit the menu. ⢠If no sound is output, specify another audio signal type. â¢F or the audio signal types to be specified, check the operation manual that came with the connected equipment. ⢠Depending on the equipment to be connected, you also need to connect analog audio cables. Enjoying a game console or watching camcorder images Connecting a game console or camcorder Use the INPUT 4 terminals to connect a game console, camcorder and other audiovisual equipment. COMPONENT VIDEO Y S - VIDEO VIDEO AUDIO PC INPUT 4 ANALOG RGB AUDIO ( STEREO ) LR C B /P B CR /P R Media Receiver (fr ont view) AV cable (commercially available) S- Video cable (commercially available) Component Video cable (commercially available) Game console/Camcorder ⢠The INPUT 4 terminals are checked for cable connections in the order where; 1) Component Video , 2) S- Video , 3) Video. ⢠Connect external equipment to only terminals that are to be actually used. Displaying an image of the game console or camcorder To watch an image coming from the game console or camcorder , press INPUT 4 on the remote control unit or press INPUT on the Plasma Display to select INPUT4. Recording digital TV pr ograms using a VCR or DVD recor der If you connect recording equipment such as a VCR or DVD recorder to the MONITOR OUT terminals on the rear of the Media Receiver , you can record, for example, digital TV programs using the recording equipment. Y ou can also record digital TV programs more easily by using the supplied VCR controller . Connect the VCR controller to the VCR control terminal on the rear of the Media Receiver and then position the controller so that its light emitting section faces the remote control sensor on the recording equipment. F or more information, see page 59. A voiding unwanted feedback Y ou can prevent unwanted feedback from adversely affecting the quality of images. Specify the output terminal whose output is to be inhibited. 1 P ress HOME MENU. 2 Select âÂÂOptionâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER) 3 Select âÂÂMonitor OutâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER) 4 Select âÂÂINPUT1 P rohibitâÂÂ, âÂÂINPUT2 P rohibitâÂÂ, âÂÂINPUT3 P rohibitâÂÂ, or âÂÂINPUT4 P rohibitâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER) 5 P ress HOME MENU to exit the menu.
12 Enjoying thr ough Exter nal Equipment English 53 En Connecting a recor der VCR CONTROL Cable CARD ANTENNA/ CABLE A IN ANTENNA B CONTROL IN OUT S-VIDEO INPUT 2 INPUT 3 S-VIDEO VIDEO VIDEO R-AUDIO-L R-AUDIO-L COMPONENT VIDEO Y Y C B /P B C B /P B C R /P R C R /P R S-VIDEO R-AUDIO-L R-AUDIO-L VIDEO S400 INPUT 1 HD M DIGITAL OUT OPTICAL SERVICE ONL Y INPUT 3 INPUT 1 IN OUT Cable CARD (TS) MONITOR OUT VCR controller (for presetting digital TV programs for recording) Media Receiver (r ear view) AV cable (commercially available) S- Video cable (commercially available) VCR or DVD recor der ⢠About the MONITOR OUT terminals The MONITOR OUT terminals cannot output the following signals: 1 V ideo signals input from the COMPONENT VIDEO terminal 2 V ideo signals from a personal computer 3 S- Video signals when a conventional TV channel is being received 4 S- Video signals when V ideo signals (INPUT 1, 2, and 4) are being input 5 Digital video and audio signals from the HDMI terminals ⢠When watching images played back on a VCR or DVD recorder connected to the MONITOR OUT terminals, select an input source (e.g., TV channel reception) on the recording equipment other than external input sources. Selecting an external input source may result in distorted images or noise. ⢠Analog broadcasting signals are not sent to the MONITOR OUT (S- VIDEO) terminal. This is also true of composite signals coming from INPUT 1, 2, or 4. Connecting other audio equipment The digital audio output terminal (optical) on this system can output Dolby Digital signals. Using an optical digital cable, connect an A V receiver to the digital audio output terminal (optical) on the rear of the Media Receiver . This allows audio such as digital TV broadcasting to be played in high quality . If your A V receiver does not have a digital audio input terminal (optical), connect the MONITOR OUT terminals (AUDIO) on the rear of the Media Receiver to the audio input terminals on the AV receiver . ⢠When using the digital audio output terminal (optical), you need to make settings depending on your A V receiver . For more information , see the instruction manual that came with the A V receiver . Connecting an A V receiver MONITOR OUT VCR CONTROL Cable CARD ANTENNA/ CABLE A IN ANTENNA B CONTROL IN OUT S-VIDEO INPUT 2 INPUT 1 S-VIDEO VIDEO VIDEO R-AUDIO-L R-AUDIO-L COMPONENT VIDEO Y Y C B /P B C B /P B C R /P R C R /P R S-VIDEO R-AUDIO-L R-AUDIO-L VIDEO S400 INPUT 1 H DIGITAL OUT OPTICAL SERVICE ONL Y INPUT 3 IN OUT Cable CARD (TS) Media Receiver (r ear view) Audio cable (commercially available) Optical digital cable (commercially available) AV receiver
12 Enjoying thr ough Exter nal Equipment 54 En Switching the optical audio signal type Set up for the DIGIT AL AUDIO output terminal (OPTICAL), depending on your A V receiver . 1 P ress HOME MENU. 2 Select âÂÂOptionâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER) 3 Select âÂÂDigital Audio OutâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER) 4 Select âÂÂDolby Digitalâ or âÂÂPCMâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER) It em Description PCM Alwa y s outputs in the PCM format (factory default) r egar dless of the t ypes of signals. Dolby Digit al F or Dolby Digit al encoded signals, outputs in the Dolb y Digital forma t. F or PCM encoded signals, outputs in the PCM forma t. 5 P ress HOME MENU to exit the menu. W atching a D-VHS image What is i.LINK? i.LINK is a digital serial inter face for handling digital video, digital audio, and other data in two directions. i.LINK is SonyâÂÂs term for the IEEE 1394 data transport bus. Digital A V equipment compatible with i.LINK can be connected using a single i.LINK cable. The i.LINK interface allows this PDP system to control one of up to two i.LINK compatible devices (in connection) that can be identified. Which i.LINK devices are connectable? F or i.LINK devices, this system supports only D- VHS recorders. The i.LINK terminals on this system cannot be connected with other equipment such as DVD recorders, digital video cameras, personal computers, and PC peripheral devices because of differences in the specifications. What can be recor ded through i.LINK? W ith D- VHS recorders connected to this system through i.LINK, you can record only digital TV programs. Y ou cannot record conventional TV channels nor contents coming from external input sources and personal computers. Connecting D-VHS recor ders Use the i.LINK terminals when connecting D- VHS recorders. When connecting a single D-VHS recor der I TOR OUT C R CONTROL Cable CARD ANTENNA/ CABLE A IN S-VIDEO INPUT 2 S-VIDEO VIDEO VIDEO R-AUDIO-L R-AUDIO-L COMPONENT VIDEO Y Y C B /P B C B /P B C R /P R C R /P R S-VIDEO R-AUDIO-L R-AUDIO-L VIDEO INPUT 1 IN HDMI DIGITAL OUT OPTICAL S400 INPUT 3 INPUT 1 IN OUT Cable CARD (TS) D- VHS recorder Media Receiver (r ear view) (The function and per formance are the same for both terminals.) i.LINK cable (commercially available) To use i.LINK, you need to connect only an i.LINK cable; you need not connect cables to the video and audio terminals. When connecting two D-VHS recor ders Y ou can connect two D-VHS recorders directly to the i.LINK terminals on the rear of the Media Receiver . Media Receiver D- VHS recorder D- VHS recorder i.LINK cables POWER ON STANDBY REC TIMER DATA ACQUISITION
12 Enjoying thr ough Exter nal Equipment English 55 En Using i.LINK cables you can also connect up to two D- VHS recorders in a daisy chain. Media Receiver i.LINK cable D- VHS recorder D- VHS recorder POWER ON STANDBY REC TIMER DATA ACQUISITION Precautions about i.LINK connections ⢠Use S400 i.LINK cables that have 4-pin plugs and are shorter than 3.5 m (11.48 feet). ⢠Some i.LINK devices cannot relay data when their power is off . ⢠Do not make the following loop connections: Media Receiver D- VHS recorder D- VHS recorder POWER ON STANDBY REC TIMER DATA ACQUISITION Media Receiver D- VHS recorder POWER ON STANDBY REC TIMER DATA ACQUISITION Displaying a D-VHS image To watch a D-VHS image, press i.LINK on the remote control unit or press INPUT on the Plasma Display to select i.LINK. Useful and important notification Useful information â¢D - VHS recorders connected through i.LINK can play back digital TV programs recorded using this system. â¢D - VHS recorders connected through i.LINK can record only digital TV programs. Using i.LINK, those recorders cannot record conventional TV channels nor contents coming from external input sources. ⢠This system can be simultaneously connected with up to two D- VHS recorders that support i.LINK. Y ou can control one of these D- VHS recorders (basic functions only). ⢠Some D- VHS recorders connected through i.LINK may not allow this system to control through the control panel screen or to display images and output sound. â¢T o record digital TV programs using connected D- VHS recorders, use D- VHS tape. Y ou cannot use VHS tape nor S- VHS tape. ⢠Some D- VHS recorders connected though i.LINK may not allow this system to play back images and sound recorded on VHS tape, S- VHS tape, or (if with analog signals) D - VHS tape. If this is the case, connect the analog output terminals on the D- VHS recorder to INPUT 1, 2, 3, or 4 terminals on this system. See page 50. ⢠This system supports the Digital T ransmission Content P rotection (DTCP) technology . The DTCP is a copy protection technology that presents data coding and device authentication. ⢠i.LINK may not allow copy-restricted video , audio, and other data to be copied from one i.LINK device to another . It also may not allow video, audio , and other data to be transferred with equipment that does not support the DTCP . Precautions ⢠While one D- VHS recorder connected through i.LINK is recording or playing back, do not switch on or off the other connected D-VHS recorder (not in use) or do not connect or disconnect the i.LINK cable from that D- VHS recorder . Doing so can result in image and sound interruption. ⢠Some D- VHS recorders that support i.LINK cannot relay data when their power is off . Check the instruction manual that came with your D- VHS recorder . This system allows you to change the setting for data relay in the standby mode. See âÂÂSetting up for i.LINK standbyâ on page 57.
12 Enjoying thr ough Exter nal Equipment 56 En Setting up for controlling a D-VHS r ecorder Y ou can operate the connected D-VHS recorder from the Plasma Display that shows the control panel screen. After making the connections, use the menu to specify the model of the D- VHS recorder to be operated. Y ou can operate only a single D- VHS recorder from the Plasma Display . 1 P ress HOME MENU. 2 Select âÂÂT uner SetupâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER ) 3 Select âÂÂR ecorder SetupâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER) 4 Select âÂÂi.LINK SetupâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER) 5 Select âÂÂi.LINK ListâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER) 6 Select the D- VHS recorder model to be operated. ( / then ENTER) Recorder Setup i.LINK Setup i.LINK List i.LINK Setup i.LINK List D-VHS XXXX XXXX Control --- --- xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx Move Delete Rename Connect Exit Home Menu D C B A 7 P ress A to select âÂÂConnectâÂÂ. 8 P ress HOME MENU to exit the menu. ⢠The following information appears at the right end of the i.LINK list to indicate the connection status of the D- VHS recorders: Control: Data connection with the D - VHS recorder has been established and the recorder is ready for control. Link: The D - VHS recorder has been physically con- nected, and can be controlled if it is selected for control. âÂÂ: Currently not physically connected ⢠When connected to any device other than a D- VHS, the device is not listed in the i.LINK List. Editing the i.LINK list The i.LINK list shows all devices connected through i.LINK inter faces. In this list, you can change the name or order of devices or delete device information. 1 P ress HOME MENU. 2 Select âÂÂT uner SetupâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER ) 3 Select âÂÂR ecorder SetupâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER) 4 Select âÂÂi.LINK SetupâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER) 5 Select âÂÂi.LINK ListâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER) 6 Select the desired device. ( / ) Recorder Setup i.LINK Setup i.LINK List i.LINK Setup i.LINK List xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx Exit Home Menu Move Delete Rename Connect D C B A D-VHS XXXX XXXX Control --- --- The following procedure differs depending on what you want to per form. To change the name of a device: 7 P ress B to select âÂÂR enameâÂÂ. 8 Enter up to 7 characters using / , / , and ENTER. Recorder Setup i.LINK Setup i.LINK List Cancel A BCDE FGH I J KL M N O P Q R ST UV W X Y Z 1 2 3 4 56 78 90 . @ / ( ), â _ : ' & SP ACE New Name: D-VHS i.LINK Setup i.LINK List xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx Clear Accept Exit Home Menu D B A 9 P ress A. 10 P ress HOME MENU to exit the menu. To change the order of devices: 7 P ress C to select âÂÂMoveâÂÂ. 8 Select the new desired position. ( / then ENTER ) ⢠The selected device is moved to the selected position . 9 P ress HOME MENU to exit the menu. To delete information about a device: 7 P ress D to select âÂÂDeleteâÂÂ. â¢A confirmation message appears. â¢A warning message appears if the selected device has been preset for recording with the timer or if its power is on. If this is the case, you cannot delete the device that you have selected. 8 P ress A to execute the deletion . 9 P ress HOME MENU to exit the menu.
12 Enjoying thr ough Exter nal Equipment English 57 En Setting up for i.LINK standby Use the following procedure to enable data transfer between multiple i.LINK devices even when the system is in the standby mode. 1 P ress HOME MENU. 2 Select âÂÂT uner SetupâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER ) 3 Select âÂÂR ecorder SetupâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER ) 4 Select âÂÂi.LINK SetupâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER) 5 Select âÂÂi.LINK StandbyâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER ) 6 Select âÂÂEnableâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER) 7 P ress HOME MENU to exit the menu. â¢W ith âÂÂEnableâ selected, the system relays data between multiple i.LINK devices even when in the standby mode; the i.LINK circuits are energized in that mode. In standby mode i.LINK device Media Receiver i.LINK device POWER ON STANDBY REC TIMER DATA ACQUISITION No data relay Operating the control panel scr een The control panel screen appears when you press i.LINK. It disappears when you press i.LINK again. T o select a button on the control panel screen, press / or / , and then press ENTER on the remote control. D-VHS4 XXXXXXX XXX No1394 00:00:00 ⢠D-VHS4 i.LINK Setup A Device List ON/OFF REC 1 20 2 10 11 13 12 14 15 16 17 18 19 3 4 5 6 9 7 8 D 1 Shows the current status of the D- VHS recorder . 2 Shows the name of the currently selected device. 3 Shows counter time output by the D- VHS recorder . 4 Shows the manufacture name of the D- VHS recorder to be operated. 5 Shows the model name of the D- VHS recorder to be operated. 6 Shows the type of inserted video tape; D for D- VHS, S for S- VHS, and no display for VHS. 7 Appears when any tape has been inserted. 8 Appears when the inserted tape has been write protected. The inserted tape cannot be used for recording when this indicator appears. 9 Appears when the D- VHS recorder has been preset for recording and is in the standby mode. 10 Switches on and off the D - VHS recorder . 11 Starts recording. 12 Rewinds to the start of the current program. 13 R ewinds the tape. 14 P auses the tape. 15 Stops the current tape motion. 16 Starts playing back. 17 Fo r wards to the start of the next program. 18 Fo r wards the tape. 19 Exits the control panel screen and displays the i.LINK Setup menu. 20 Allows you to change the D - VHS recorder to be operated. After pressing this button, press / to select the desired model from the list, and then press ENTER . ⢠If no i.LINK device has been connected, âÂÂNo i.LINK devices are connected.â appears. If this is the case, connect i.LINK devices. ⢠If none of the connected equipment has been supported for control, you cannot execute control.
12 Enjoying thr ough Exter nal Equipment 58 En W atching an image from a personal computer Connecting a personal computer Use the PC terminals to connect a personal computer . ⢠The PC input terminals are DDC2B-compatible. ⢠Plug & Play may not correctly function , depending on personal computers in use. E C ER DATA ACQUISITION COMPONENT VIDEO Y S - VIDEO VIDEO AUDIO PC INPUT 4 ANALOG RGB AUDIO ( STEREO ) LR C B /P B CR /P R Media Receiver (fr ont view) RGB cable (commercially available) Personal computer ø 3.5 mm stereo mini- plug cable (commercially available) Displaying an image from a personal computer When connecting to a personal computer , the input signal type is automatically identified. If the personal computer image does not come in clearly , you may need to use Auto Setup in the menu. See page 45. To watch an image coming from the personal computer , press PC on the remote control unit or press INPUT on the Plasma Display to select âÂÂPCâÂÂ. ⢠The PC terminals cannot be used for audiovisual equipment. Signal names for 15-pin mini D -sub connecter 15 14 13 12 9 11 10 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 (front view) Pin No. Signal name 1 R 2 G 3 B 4 Not connect ed 5 Not connect ed 6 GND (ground) 7 GND (ground) 8 GND (ground) 9 5V 10 GND (ground) 11 Not connect ed 12 SD A 13 HD 14 VD 15 SCL â¢A Macintosh adaptor may be required for use with some Macintosh computers. Computer compatibility chart Re solution F requency Remarks 720 à4 00 7 0 Hz 640 à4 8 0 6 0 Hz 65 Hz Macintosh 1 3" (6 7 Hz) 72 H z 75 H z 8 00 à6 00 5 6 Hz 60 H z 72 H z 75 H z 832 à6 2 4 7 4.5 Hz Macint osh 1 6" 10 2 4 à7 6 8 6 0 Hz 70 H z 75 Hz Macint osh 1 9" 12 8 0 à7 6 8 5 6 Hz 60 H z 70 H z
12 Enjoying thr ough Exter nal Equipment English 59 En Connecting the VCR controller Connect the supplied VCR controller to the Media Receiver . This allows you to preset digital TV programs for recording; see page 48. When the specified time comes, the system in the standby mode is automatically switched on and the specified TV program is recorded using the connected VCR or DVD recorder . ⢠Make sure to leave the VCR power on when presetting TV programs for recording with the VCR controller . ⢠Be sure to firmly connect the VCR controller to the VCR control terminal on the rear of the Media Receiver . If you have mistakenly connected it to the CONTROL IN or CONTROL OUT terminal, remote control or other operations may be disabled. Media Receiver (r ear view) VCR or DVD recor der (Once you have positioned the VCR controller , secure with the supplied tape.) P osition the light emitting section on the VCR controller cable so that it faces the VCR . Remote control sensor VCR CONTROL MONITOR OUT VCR CONTROL Cable CARD ANTENNA/ CABLE A IN ANTENNA B CONTROL IN OUT S-VIDEO INPUT 2 INPUT 3 S-VIDEO VIDEO VIDEO R-AUDIO-L R-AUDIO-L COMPO N Y Y C B / C B / S-VIDEO R-AUDIO-L R-AUDIO-L VIDEO S400 DIGITAL O OPTIC A SERVICE ONL Y INPUT 3 INPUT 1 IN OUT Cable CARD (TS) Use the following procedure to set the manufacture of the recording equipment: 1 P ress HOME MENU. 2 Select âÂÂT uner SetupâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER ) 3 Select âÂÂR ecorder SetupâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER) 4 Select âÂÂVCR SetupâÂÂ. ( / then ENTER) 5 Select the manufacture of the recording equipment. ( / then ENTER) VCR Setup ⢠XXXXX VCR Setup xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx XXXXX XXXXX Exit Home Menu Recorder Setup ⢠The screen for recording test appears. 6 Check that the power to the recording equipment is on , and insert tape into the slot. ⢠Insert tape you think it all right to erase its contents. The contents will be erased because R ec and Stop codes are output in the test. ⢠Check that the light emitting section on the VCR controller cable faces the recording equipment. 7 P ress A to execute recording test. ⢠If the recording equipment fails to start and stop recording, check and change the specified recording equipment manufacture. 8 P ress A to select âÂÂY es, Store SettingâÂÂ. 9 P ress HOME MENU to exit the menu. . ⢠Even if you correctly specify the manufacture of the recording equipment, control of some models may be disabled. â¢P er form the recording test when the recording equipment is not in recording standby or is not recording. ⢠The recording test takes approximately 10 seconds. ⢠The PIONEER has been set as the factor y default.
12 Enjoying thr ough Exter nal Equipment 60 En The lists of controllable r ecording equipment manufactures Manufacture Admir al Adv antz Adventur a Aiko Aiwa Akai American High Asha Audiov ox Beaumark Bell & How ell Broksonic CCE Calix Canon Capehart Carver Ciner al Citizen Colt Cr aig Curtis Mathes Cybernex Daew oo Da ytr on Denon Dynat ech Electrohome Electrophonic Emer ex Emer son F isher F uji F unai GE Garr ard Go V ideo GoldSt ar Gr adiente Grundig HI-Q Manufacture Harle y Da vidson Harman/K ardon Harwood Headquart er Hit achi JVC Jensen KEC KLH Ke nw ood K odak LXI Llo yd's Logik MEI MG A MGN T echnology MTC Magnasonic Magna vo x Magnin Mar antz Marta Matsushit a Memore x Minolta Mitsubishi Mot orola Multit ech NAD NEC Nikko Nikon Noblex Olympus Optimus Opt onica Orion P anasonic P enney P entax Manufacture Philco Philips Pilot Pioneer Po r tland Profitr onic Proscan Pro t ec Pulsar Quarter Quartz Quasar RC A R adio Shack R adix Rande x R ealistic Ricoh R unco STS Salor a Samsung Sanky Sansui San yo Scot t Sears Semp Sharp Shint om Shogun Singer Son y S ylv ania Symphonic TMK Ta tung T eac T echnics T eknika Thomas Manufacture T oshiba To te vision Unit ech V ector V ector R esearch V ideo Concepts V ideosonic Wa r d s Whit e W estinghouse XR -1 000 Y amaha Zenith Some modes of the listed manufactures may not allow control through the VCR controller .
12 Enjoying thr ough Exter nal Equipment English 61 En Connecting control cor ds Connect control cords between the Media Receiver and other PIONEER equipment having the logo. Y ou can then operate the connected equipment by sending commands from its remote control unit to the remote control sensor on the Media R eceiver . After the CONTROL IN terminals have been connected, the remote control sensors on the connected equipment do not accept commands from the remote control units. F ace the remote control units to the remote control sensor on the Plasma Display when operating the connected equipment. ⢠Make sure that the power is turned off when making connections. ⢠Complete all component connections before making control cord connections. About SR The CONTROL OUT terminal on the rear of the Media Receiver supports SR that allows linked operations with a PIONEER AV receiver . SR presents functions such as the input switch linkage operation function and the DSP surround mode display function. F or more information, see the instruction manual that came with the PIONEER A V receiver supporting SR . ⢠While in connection through SR , the volume on this system is temporarily minimized. Media Receiver (r ear view) CONTROL IN OUT MONITOR OUT VCR CONTROL Cable CARD ANTENNA/ CABLE A IN ANTENNA B IN OUT S-VIDEO INPUT 2 INPUT 3 S-VIDEO VIDEO VIDEO R-AUDIO-L R-AUDIO-L COMPONENT VIDEO Y Y C B /P B C B /P B C R /P R C R /P R S-VIDEO R-AUDIO-L R-AUDIO-L VIDEO S400 INPUT 1 INPUT 3 HDMI DIGITAL OUT OPTICAL SERVICE ONL Y INPUT 3 INPUT 1 IN OUT Cable CARD (TS) CONTROL CONTROL IN OUT CONTROL IN OUT CONTROL IN OUT The control cables (commercially available) are mono sound cables with mini plugs (no resistance).
13 Useful Remote Contr ol Features 62 En Learning function of the remote control unit Y ou can operate the connected A V products (AV R eceiver , Cable Box, SA T tuner , VCR , DVD, DVD recorder , LD) using the learning function of your remote control unit. This remote control unit has a function that can memorize each remote control code. 2 to 5 cm (0.8 to 2.0 inches) R emote contr ol Remote contr ol of (Supplied accessory) AV pr oduct Using the learning function 1 Slide the Mode switch to match the device whose remote control signal you want to be learned. 2 P ress EDIT/LEARN and 2 at the same time. â¢The LED flashes. 3 P ress a button to be learned. ⢠The LED lights up. â¢F or the functions that can be learned, see pages 64 to 68. ⢠When learning is finished, the LED starts flashing again. 4 P ress EDIT/LEARN again to exit the Learn mode. â¢T o exit the Learn mode halfway , press EDIT/LEARN again. ⢠If the Mode switch selection is changed when in the Learn mode, the Learn mode is cancelled. ⢠If no operation is performed for more than one minute, the Learn mode is cancelled. ⢠It takes about 2 seconds to finish code transmission. Do not interrupt it halfway . W ait until the LED flashes again. â¢Y ou can reset all learned codes to the factory defaults. When not in the Learn mode, press and hold TV , and then press and VOL (RECEIVER section) at the same time. Presetting manufactur e codes 1 Slide the Mode switch to match the device to which you want to preset the remote control signal. 2 P ress EDIT/LEARN and 1 at the same time. ⢠The LED flashes. 3 P ress 0 â 9 to enter the manufacture code. See page 63. â¢P reset mode is finished once the LED no longer lights up. â¢T o exit the Edit mode halfway , press EDIT/LEARN again. ⢠If the Mode switch selection is changed when in the Edit mode, the Edit mode is cancelled. ⢠If no operation is performed for more than one minute, the Edit mode is cancelled. ⢠When you enter a code not listed, the LED flashes quickly . ⢠If the table on page 63 does not include your desired manufacturer or the remote control does not work, you can make the memory learn its signal by the Learn mode. ⢠The initial mode is âÂÂ000â (PIONEER).
13 Useful Remote Contr ol Features English 63 En Manufacture codes CABLE/S A T VCR D VD/D VR 000 PIONEER1(CABLE) PIONEER PIONEER(D VD) 00 1 PIONEER2(CABLE) FISHER P ANASONIC(D VD) 00 2 JERR OLD1(CABLE) FISHER2 SAMSUNG(D VD) 00 3 JERR OLD2(CABLE) FISHER3 SONY(D VD) 00 4 JERR OLD3(CABLE) GOLDS T AR T OSHIBA(D VD) 00 5 JERR OLD4(CABLE) HIT A CHI JVC(D VD) 00 6 JERR OLD5(CABLE) HIT A CHI2 PIONEER(D VD-RECORDER) 00 7 JERR OLD6(CABLE) HIT A CHI3 PIONEER2(D VD-RECORDER) 00 8 JERR OLD7(CABLE) MA GNAV O X2 PIONEER3(D VD-RECORDER) 00 9 JERR OLD8(CABLE) MITSUBISHI P ANASONIC(D VD-RECORDER) 01 0 JERR OLD9(CABLE) MITSUBISHI2 P ANASONIC2(D VD-RECORDER) 01 1 JERR OLD1 0(CABLE) MITSUBISHI3 P ANASONIC3(D VD-RECORDER) 01 2 S.A.1(CABLE) MITSUBISHI4 PHILIPS(D VD-RECORDER) 01 3 S.A.2(CABLE) MITSUBISHI5 SHARP(D VD-RECORDER) 01 4 S.A.3(CABLE) MITSUBISHI6 SHARP2(D VD-RECORDER) 01 5 S.A.4(CABLE) P ANASONIC T OSHIB A(D VD-RECORDER) 01 6 ZENITH1(CABLE) P ANASONIC2 T OSHIBA2(D VD-RECORDER) 01 7 ZENITH2(CABLE) P ANASONIC3 01 8 ZENITH3(CABLE) R CA 01 9 R CA2 020 PIONEER(S A T) R CA3 PIONEER(LD) 02 1R CA1(SA T) SANY O KENW OOD(LD) 02 2R CA2(SA T) SANY O2 P ANASONIC1(LD) 02 3 SONY(S A T) SANY O3 P ANASONIC2(LD) 02 4 SHARP PHILIPS(LD) 025 SHARP2 R CA(LD) 026 SHARP3 SONY(MDP) 027 SONY(BET A) SONY(LD) 028 SONY(VHS) 029 SONY(8mm) 03 0T OSHIB A 03 1 JVC 03 2 JVC2 03 3 JVC3 034 JVC4 035 JVC5 036 ZENITH 037 MITSUBISHI(J-3) 038 SHARP(J-2) 03 9P ANASONIC(J-3) 04 0T OSHIBA(J-3) 04 1G R ANDIENTE 04 2 AKAI 04 3 PIONEER2 044 S ANY O4 04 5M A TSUI 04 6 AIW A 04 7 ALBA8 1 04 8 B USH 04 9 THOMSON 05 0B AIRD 05 1 TELEFUNKEN 052 ALBA CABLE/S A T VCR D VD/D VR 053 Grundig1 054 Grundig2 05 5 Grundig3 056 SONY2 05 7 SONY3 058 SONY4 059 R CA4 060 PHILIPS 06 1 PHILIPS2 06 2 PHILIPS3 06 3 PHILIPS4 064 PHILIPS5 065 PHILIPS6 066 SA M SUNG 06 7S AMSUNG2 06 8S AMSUNG3 06 9S AMSUNG4 07 0S AMSUNG5 07 1S AMSUNG6 07 2M ARANTZ 073 MARANTZ2 07 4 G E 075 GE2 076 GE3 077 YA MAHA 07 8Y AMAHA2 07 9Y AMAHA3 08 0Y AMAHA4 08 1 CUR TIS_MA THIS 08 2 CUR TIS_MA THIS2 08 3 CUR TIS_MA THIS3 084 FUNAI 085 ADMIRAL 086 KENW OOD 08 7 KENWOOD2 088 KENW OOD3 089 NEC 090 NEC2 09 1 NEC3 092 NEC4 09 3W ARDS 09 4W ARDS2 09 5W ARDS3 09 6W ARDS4 09 7 MEMOREX 098 MEMOREX2 099 JC_PENNY 10 0 JC_PENNY2 10 1 JC_PENNY3 10 2 JC_PENNY4 10 3 JC_PENNY5 10 4 JC_PENNY6
13 Useful Remote Contr ol Features 64 En Using the r emote control unit to contr ol other devices 3 1 2 Receiver control buttons When a P ioneer receiver is connected to the display , the receiver can be operated using buttons 1 to 3 . When a non-P ioneer receiver is connected to the display , the signals for 1 to 3 must first be learned before operating. See page 62. 1 RECEIVER (ST ANDBY/ON) T urns the receiver power on and off . 2 RECEIVER INPUT Selects the input source connected to the receiver . 3 RECEIVER VOL / â Adjusts the receiver volume level. P ress VOL to increase the volume and VOL â to decrease it. ⢠(RECEIVER) MUTING Allows the remote control unit to learn receiver âÂÂs mute signal. Use this button when the mode switch is set to a position other than TV . ⢠The color-highlighted buttons on the remote control can learn the control signal from another deviceâÂÂs remote control. Mode switch (with âÂÂTV â selected)
13 Useful Remote Contr ol Features English 65 En 1 2 3 4 5 Cable control buttons When the Mode switch is set to CBL/SA T , the cable converter connected to the display can be operated using 1 to 5 . Cable converters made by other manufacturers and not preset can also be operated using the remote control unit if 1 to 5 have learned the functions. See page 62. 10 â 9 P ress a button (or buttons) that corresponds to the channel that you want to watch. 2 CH / â P ress CH or CH â to tune in a higher or lower channel. 3 SOURCE T urns the cable converter power on and off . 4 CH ENTER * F ix the selected channel with the direct channel selection buttons. 5 CH RETURN * P ress to switch between the current channel and the channel you were watching immediately before. * Some manufacturers do not preset CH ENTER and CH RETURN . Use these buttons to learn if necessar y . ⢠CABLE and SA T cannot be selected at the same time. ⢠The color-highlighted buttons on the remote control can learn the control signal from another deviceâÂÂs remote control. Mode switch (with âÂÂCBL/SA T â selected)
13 Useful Remote Contr ol Features 66 En 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 SA T control buttons When the SA T is preset by the learning function of the remote control, the remote control unit buttons will function as shown below . ⢠When the Mode switch is set to CBL/SA T , satellite broadcast tuners made by other manufacturers and not preset can also be operated with the remote control unit if 1 to 8 have learned the functions. See page 62. 10 â 9 P ress a button (or buttons) that corresponds to the channel that you wish to watch. 2 CH / â P ress CH or CH â to tune in a higher or lower channel. 3 ENTER, / / / ENTER: P ress to activate the selected function . / / / : P ress the button to select items on the SA T GUIDE screen or SA T MENU screen. 4S AT INFO When this button is pressed, information on satellite broadcasting will appear . ⢠Use this button to learn if necessary . 5 SOURCE T urns the Satellite broadcast tuner power on and off . 6 CH ENTER F ix the selected channel with the direct channel selection buttons. ⢠Use this button to learn if necessary . 7S AT MENU When this button is pressed, the satellite broadcasting menu screen will appear . 8S AT GUIDE When this button is pressed, the satellite broadcasting guide screen will appear . ⢠CABLE and SA T cannot be selected at the same time. ⢠The color-highlighted buttons on the remote control can learn the control signal from another deviceâÂÂs remote control. Mode switch (with âÂÂCBL/SA T â selected)
13 Useful Remote Contr ol Features English 67 En 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 VCR control buttons When the VCR is preset by the learning function of the remote control, the remote control unit buttons will function as follows when the Mode switch of the remote control unit is set to VCR . ⢠When the input selector button having the same number as the input terminal connecting the VCR is pressed, the VCR can be operated using 1 to 8 . ⢠VCR made by other manufacturers and not preset can also be operated using the remote control unit if 1 to 8 have learned the functions. See page 62. 1 CH / â P ress to select the channel of the TV tuner on the VCR . 2 î (PLA Y) Selects playback. 3 î (REW) R ewinds the tape and allows picture search. 4 SOURCE T urns the power of the VCR on and off . 5 î (P AUSE/STILL) Sets pauses and still pictures. 6 î (FF) Rapidly advances the tape and allows picture search. 7 î (REC) Starts recording. 8 î (STOP) Stop tape transport. ⢠The color-highlighted buttons on the remote control can learn the control signal from another deviceâÂÂs remote control. Mode switch (with â VCRâ selected)
13 Useful Remote Contr ol Features 68 En Mode switch (with âÂÂDVD/ DVRâ selected) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 DVD/DVR control buttons When the DVD/DVR is preset by the learning function of the remote control, the remote control unit buttons will function as follows when the Mode switch of the remote control unit is set to DVD/DVR . ⢠When the input selector button having the same number as the input terminal connecting a DVD player or DVD recorder is pressed, these players can be operated using 1 to 12 . ⢠DVD players or DVD recorders made by other manufacturers and not preset can also be operated using the remote control unit if 1 to 12 have learned the functions. See page 62. 1 CH / â (DVD r ecorder only) P ress to change the channel of the tuner built in the DVD recorder . 2 RETURN When the DVD menu is in display , press to restore the immediately previous screen . 3 î (PLA Y) Selects playback. 4 î (SCAN)/î (CHAPTER SEARCH) Continue pressing to go backward. P ressing quickly once takes you to the start of the chapter currently playing. Each time you press it, you move back to the start of the previous chapter . 5 SOURCE T urns the power of the DVD player or DVD recorder on and off . 6 î (P AUSE/STILL) Sets pauses and still pictures. 7S A T/DVD MENU (DVD, DVD recor der) When this button is pressed, the DVD menu will appear . 8 ENTER, / / / (DVD, DVD recor der) ENTER :P ress to activate the selected function . / / / :P ress the button to select items on the DVD MENU screen. 9 DVD TOP MENU (DVD, DVD r ecorder) When this button is pressed, the DVD top menu will appear . 10 î (SCAN)/î (CHAPTER SEARCH) Continue pressing for fast forward. P ressing quickly once takes you to the start of the next chapter . Each time you press it, you move ahead to the start of the next chapter . 11 î (REC) Starts recording. 12 î (STOP) Playback stops when pressing once. W ith some DVD players or DVD recorders, pressing the button twice may open the disc tray . 11, 12 REC STOP P ress and hold î , and then press this button to stop recording. This operation is true of only P ioneer DVD recorders. ⢠The DVD player or DVD recorder cannot be selected at the same time. ⢠The color-highlighted buttons on the remote control can learn the control signal from another deviceâÂÂs remote control.
14 Appendix English 69 En Problem P ossible Solution ⢠No po wer . â¢G r een and red r ectangles appear on the screen alt ernat ely . ⢠The s yst em cannot be oper at ed. â¢R emot e control unit doe s not oper ate. ⢠No image and audio is pr esent ed. ⢠No pictur e. ⢠Audio is output but no image is pre sent ed. ⢠Images ar e present ed but no audio is output. ⢠Sound is r ev ersed bet ween the right and left. ⢠Sound is output fr om only a single speaker . ⢠Pictur e is cut off. ⢠Str ange color , light color , dark or color misalignment. â¢P ow er is suddenly turned off . â¢P anel sounds / noises Tr oubleshooting Code Message Check SD0 4 P ow ering off. Int ernal temper atur e t oo high. Check if the ambient temper atur e of the Plasma Displa y is high. Check t emper atur e ar ound PDP . SD0 5 P ow ering off. Int ernal pro tection cir cuits activa ted, Check the speak er cable connections bet ween the Plasma Displa y Is ther e a short in speaker cable? and the speaker s. SD1 1 P ow ering off. Int ernal temper ature t oo high. Check if the ambient t emper atur e of the Media Receiv er is high. Check t emper atur e ar ound media receiv er . ⢠Mak e sure the Pla sma Displa y and the Media Receiv er are connect ed correctly . (See page 1 8.) ⢠Is the po wer cor d disconnected? (See page 2 3.) â¢H as the main pow er been turned on? (See page 2 4.) ⢠Check if y ou pre ssed TV on the r emot e control unit. (See page 2 4.) If the indicat or on the sy st em lights up r ed, pre ss TV . ⢠Check if the s yst em cable has been disconnect ed or almost disconnected? (See page 1 8.) ⢠Ext ernal influences such as lightning, st atic electricit y , etc., ma y cause improper oper ation. In this case, oper at e the s yst em after fir st turning the power of the Pla sma Displa y and the Media Receiv er , or unplug ging the pow er cord and r e-plug ging it in after 1or 2 min ut es. ⢠Is the Mode switch se t correctly? Slide it t o the TV set ting position. (See page 1 4.) â¢A re bat teries insert ed with polarit y ( , âÂÂ) aligned? (See page 2 0.) â¢A re bat teries w orn out? (Replace with ne w bat terie s.) (See page 2 0.) ⢠Oper at e the remo t e control unit while pointing it t ow ard the r emote contr ol sensor on the Plasma Displa y . (See page 2 0.) â¢A re you using it under str ong or fluorescent lighting? ⢠Is a fluor escent light illuminat ed near the remo te contr ol sensor? ⢠Check if the input sour ce for video or PC has been unint entionally select ed although you w ant t o wa tch a TV channel. (See page 2 5.) ⢠Check if y ou ha ve activ at ed the Par ental Contr ol function. (See page 3 3.) Ent er a passw ord t o tempor arily cancel the P arent al Control function. (See page 3 7 .) ⢠Is connection t o other components corr ect? (See pages 5 0 t o 5 8.) ⢠Is a non-compa tible PC signal being input? (See page 5 8.) ⢠Is picture adjustment corr ect? (See page 4 1.) ⢠Check if y ou ha ve select ed âÂÂPicture Off â for Ener gy Sav e. W ith this option select ed, the scr een is deactiva ted; onl y audio is output. T o re st ore the scr een display , pre ss any but t on other than V OL /â and MUTING . (See page 44.) ⢠Check if y ou ha ve select ed the minimum volume. (See page 2 6.) ⢠Check if y ou ha ve mut ed sound. (See page 2 6.) ⢠When using a video or PC input sour ce, check that the audio terminal is also in connection. (See pages 5 0 to 5 4 and 5 8.) ⢠Check if the speak er cable connections ha ve been r ever sed bet ween the right and left or if the speak er cable from either speak er has been disconnect ed. (See pages 1 2 and 1 8.) â¢H as the balance been corr ectly adjust ed? (See page 4 3.) ⢠Is the image position corr ect? (See page 4 5.) ⢠Has the corr ect screen size been select ed? (See page 4 6.) â¢A djust the picture t one. (See page 4 1.) ⢠Is the r oom too bright? The pictur e may look dark in a r oom that is t oo bright. ⢠Is the sleep timer set? (See page 4 0.) ⢠Check the po wer contr ol set ting. (See page 4 4.) ⢠The s y stemâ s internal t emper ature has incr eased. Remo ve an y objects blocking v ent or clean. (See pages 1 5 and 1 6.) â¢P anel genera ted sounds, e xamples: F an mot or noise, Electrical Circuit Humming / Glass P anel buzzing are normal oper ation of a phosphor -based matrix displa y .
14 Appendix 70 En The video program that you watch may be high definition (HD) or standard definition (SD). This Plasma Display is designed to sc ale to each type of definition properly . If the video programâÂÂs definition type changes while a menu window is displayed on the screen (for example: HD âÂÂSD or SD â HD), the menu size may temporarily shrink or enlarge until the scaling is completed. This may happen, for example, when you switch between television and an external digital video recorder (D- VHS), or when your recorded program switches between different definition types, while the on-screen menu is being shown . If this happens, the menu will return to its normal size after two to three seconds. This action is normal, and does not indicate a problem with your Plasma Display system.
14 Appendix English 71 En This product in part uses âÂÂOpenSSL â sof tware. To the e xtent the OpenSSL sof tware is being used, the following notification applies: Copyright (c) 1998-2004 The OpenSSL P roject. All rights reser ved. R edistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met: 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer . 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution. 3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following acknowledgment: âÂÂThis produc t includes software developed by the OpenSSL P roject for use in the OpenSSL T oolkit. (http://www .openssl.org/)â 4. The names âÂÂOpenSSL T oolkitâ and âÂÂOpenSSL P rojectâ must not be used to endorse or promote products derived from this sof tware without prior written permission. F or written permission, please contact openssl-core@openssl.org. 5. P roducts derived from this software may not be called âÂÂOpenSSL â nor may âÂÂOpenSSL â appear in their names without prior written permission of the OpenSSL P roject. 6. Redistributions of any form whatsoever must retain the following acknowledgment: âÂÂThis product includes software developed by the OpenSSL P roject for use in the OpenSSL T oolkit (http://www .openssl.org/)â THIS SOF TW ARE IS PROVIDED BY THE OpenSSL PROJECT â AS ISâ AND ANY EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED W ARRANTIES, INCL UDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO , THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANT ABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A P ARTICUL AR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE OpenSSL PROJECT OR ITS CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT , INDIRECT , INCIDENT AL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY , OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCL UDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO , PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; L OSS OF USE, DA T A, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY , WHETHER IN CONTRACT , STRICT LIABILITY , OR TORT (INCL UDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY W AY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. This product includes cr yptographic software written by Eric Y oung (eay@cr yptsof t.com). This product includes software written by T im Hudson (tjh@cryptsof t.com). Original SSLeay License Copyright (C) 1995-1998 Eric Y oung (eay@cr yptsoft.com) All rights reser ved. This package is an SSL implementation written by Eric Y oung (eay@cr yptsoft.com). The implementation was written so as to confor m with Netscapes SSL. This librar y is free for commercial and non-commercial use as long as the following conditions are aheared to. The following co nditions apply to all code found in this distribution, be it the RC4, RSA, lhash, DES, etc., code; not just the SSL code. The SSL docume ntation included with this distribution is covered by the same copyright terms except that the holder is T im Hudson (tjh@cr yptsof t.com) . Copyright remains Eric Y oungâÂÂs, and as such any Copyright notices in the code are not to be removed. If this package is used in a product, Eric Y oung should be given attribution as the author of the parts of the library used. This can be in the form of a te xtual message at program startup or in documentation (online or textual) provided with the package. R edistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met: 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer . 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution. 3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following acknowledgement: âÂÂThis produ ct includes cr yptographic software written by Eric Y oung (eay@cr yptsoft.com)â The word âÂÂcr yptographicâ can be lef t out if the roui nes from the librar y being used are not cr yptographic related :-). 4. If you include any W indows specific code (or a derivative thereof) from the apps director y (application code) you must include an acknowledgement: âÂÂThis product includes sof tware written by Tim Hudson (tjh@cryptsof t.com)â THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY ERIC Y OUNG â AS ISâ AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED W ARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO , THE IMPLIED W ARRANTIES OF MERCHANT ABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A P ARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT , INDIRECT , INCIDENT AL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY , OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCL UDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; L OSS OF USE, DA T A, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY , WHETHER IN CONTRACT , STRICT LIABILITY , OR TORT (INCL UDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY W A Y OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOF TW ARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. The licence and distribution terms for any publically available version or derivative of this code cannot be changed. i.e. this code cannot simply be copied and put under another distribution licence [including the GNU P ublic Licence.]
14 Appendix 72 En Linux Source Notice The P ioneer Plasma T elevision integrated with the Media Receiver in part is powered by utilizes the Linux operation system. The machine readable copy of the corresponding source code is available for the cost of distribution . T o obtain a copy , please visi t http://www .pioneerelectronics.com/ for more information. GNU General Public License V ersion 2, June 1991 Copyright (C) 1989, 1991 F ree Sof tware F oundation, Inc. 59 T emple Place - Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307, USA Ever yone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies of this license document, but changing it is not allowed. Preamble The licenses for most software are designed to take away your freedom to share and change it. By contrast, the GNU General P ubl ic License is intended to guarantee your freedom to share and change free softwareâÂÂto make sure the software is free for all its u sers. This General P ublic License applies to most of the F ree Sof tware Foundation âÂÂs sof tware and to any other program whose authors commit to using it. (Some other F ree Sof tware F oundation sof tware is covered by the GNU Librar y General P ublic License instead.) Y ou can apply it to your programs, too. When we speak of free software, we are referring to freedom, not price. Our General P ublic Licenses are designed to make sure t hat you have the freedom to distribute copies of free software (and charge for this ser vice if you wish), that you receive source code or can get it if you want it, that you can change the software or use pieces of it in new free programs; and that you know you can do these things. To protect your rights, we need to make restrictions that forbid anyone to deny you these rights or to ask you to surrender the rights. These restrictions translate to certain responsibilities for you if you distribute copies of the software, or if you modify it. F or example, if you distribute copies of such a program, whether gratis or for a fee, you must give the recipients all the rights that you have. Y ou must make sure that they , too, receive or can get the source code. And you must show them these terms so they know th eir rights. We protect your rights with two steps: (1) copyright the software, and (2) offer you this license which gives you legal permission to copy , distribute and/or modify the sof tware. Also, for each author âÂÂs protection and ours, we want to make certain that ever yone understands that there is no warranty for this free software. If the sof tware is modified by someone else and passed on, we want its recipients to know that what they have is not the original, so that any problems introduced by others will not reflect on the original authorsâ reputations. F inally , any free program is threatened constantly by sof tware patents. W e wish to avoid the danger that redistributors of a free program will individually obtain patent licenses, in effect making the program proprietar y . T o prevent this, we have made it clear that any patent must be licensed for ever yoneâÂÂs free use or not licensed at all. The precise terms and conditions for copying, distribution and modification follow . GNU General Public License TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR COPYING, DISTRIBUTION AND MODIFICA TION 0. This License applies to any program or other work which contains a notice placed by the copyright holder saying it may be dis tributed under the terms of this General P ublic License. The âÂÂProgramâÂÂ, below , refers to any such program or work, and a âÂÂwork based on the P rogramâ means either the P rogram or any derivative work under copyright law : that is to say , a work containing the Program or a portion of it, either verbatim or with modifications and/or translated into another language. (Hereinafter , translation is included without limitation in the term âÂÂmodificationâÂÂ.) Each licensee is addressed as âÂÂyouâÂÂ. Activities other than copying, distribution and modification are not covered by this License; they are outside its scope. The act of running the P rogram is not restricted, and the output from the P rogram is covered only if its contents constitute a work based on the P rogram (independent of having been made by running the P rogram). Whether that is true depends on what the Program does. 1. Y ou may copy and distribute verbatim copies of the P rogramâÂÂs source code as you receive it, in any medium, provided that you conspicuously and appropriately publish on each copy an appropriate copyright notice and disclaimer of warranty ; keep intact al l the notices that refer to this License and to the absence of any warranty ; and give any other recipients of the Program a copy of this License along with the P rogram. Y ou may charge a fee for the physical act of transferring a copy , and you may at your option offer warranty protection in excha nge for a fee. 2. Y ou may modify your copy or copies of the Program or any portion of it, thus forming a work based on the P rogram, and copy an d distribute such modifications or work under the terms of Section 1 above, provided that you also meet all of these conditions: a) Y ou must cause the modified files to carr y prominent notices stating that you changed the files and the date of any change. b) Y ou must cause any work that you distribute or publish, that in whole or in part contains or is derived from the Program or a ny part thereof , to be licensed as a whole at no charge to all third parties under the terms of this License. c) If the modified program normally reads commands interactively when run , you must cause it, when started running for such interactive use in the most ordinar y way , to print or display an announcement including an appropriate copyright notice and a notice that there is no warranty (or else, saying that you provide a warranty) and that users may redistribute the program unde r these conditions, and telling the user how to view a copy of this License.
14 Appendix English 73 En (Exception: if the P rogram itself is interactive but does not normally print such an announcement, your work based on the P rogr am is not required to print an announcement.) These requirements apply to the modified work as a whole. If identifiable sections of that work are not derived from the P rogra m, and can be reasonably considered independent and separate works in themselves, then this License, and its terms, do not apply t o those sections when you distribute them as separate works. But when you distribute the same sections as part of a whole which i s a work based on the P rogram, the distribution of the whole must be on the terms of this License, whose permissions for other licensees extend to the entire whole, and thus to each and ever y part regardless of who wrote it. Thus, it is not the intent of this section to claim rights or contest your rights to work written entirely by you; rather , the intent is to exercise the right to control the distribution of derivative or collective works based on the P rogram. In addition, mere aggregation of another work not based on the P rogram with the P rogram (or with a work based on the P rogram) on a volume of a storage or distribution medium does not bring the other work under the scope of this License. 3. Y ou may copy and distribute the P rogram (or a work based on it, under Section 2) in object code or executable form under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above provided that you also do one of the following: a) Accompany it with the complete corresponding machine-readable source code, which must be distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a medium customarily used for software interchange; or , b) Accompany it with a written offer , valid for at least three years, to give any third party , for a charge no more than your cost of physically per forming source distribution, a complete machine-readable copy of the corresponding source code, to be distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a medium customarily used for software interchange; or , c) Accompany it with the information you received as to the offer to distribute corresponding source code. (This alternative is allowed only for noncommercial distribution and only if you received the program in object code or executable form with such an offer , in accord with Subsection b above.) The source code for a work means the preferred form of the work for making modifications to it. F or an executable work, complet e source code means all the source code for all modules it contains, plus any associated interface definition files, plus the scr ipts used to control compilation and installation of the executable. However , as a special exception, the source code distributed ne ed not include anything that is normally distributed (in either source or binary form) with the major components (compiler , kernel, and so on) of the operating system on which the executable runs, unless that component itself accompanies the executable. If distribution of executable or object code is made by offering access to copy from a designated place, then offering equivale nt access to copy the source code from the same place counts as distribution of the source code, even though third parties are not compelled to copy the source along with the object code. 4. Y ou may not copy , modif y , sublicense, or distribute the Program except as expressly provided under this License. Any attempt otherwise to copy , modif y , sublicense or distribute the Program is void, and will automatically terminate your rights under thi s License. However , parties who have received copies, or rights, from you under this License will not have their licenses terminated so long as such parties remain in full compliance. 5. Y ou are not required to accept this License, since you have not signed it. However , nothing else grants you permission to modif y or distribute the P rogram or its derivative works. These actions are prohibited by law if you do not accept this License. Therefore, by modifying or distributing the Program (or any work based on the P rogram), you indicate your acceptance of this License to do so , and all its terms and conditions for copying, distributing or modifying the P rogram or works based on it. 6. Each time you redistribute the P rogram (or any work based on the P rogram), the recipient automatically receives a license from the original licensor to copy , distribute or modif y the P rogram subject to these terms and conditions. Y ou may not impose any furth er restrictions on the recipientsâ exercise of the rights granted herein. Y ou are not responsible for enforcing compliance by thir d parties to this License. 7. If , as a consequence of a court judgment or allegation of patent infringement or for any other reason (not limited to patent issues), conditions are imposed on you (whether by court order , agreement or other wise) that contradict the conditions of this License, they do not excuse you from the conditions of this License. If you cannot distribute so as to satisfy simultaneously your obligation s under this License and any other pertinent obligations, then as a consequence you may not distribute the P rogram at all. For example, if a patent license would not permit royalty-free redistribution of the P rogram by all those who receive copies directly or indirectly through you, then the only way you could satisfy both it and this License would be to refrain entirely from distribution of the P rogram. If any portion of this section is held invalid or unenforceable under any particular circumstance, the balance of the section i s intended to apply and the section as a whole is intended to apply in other circumstances. It is not the purpose of this section to induce you to infringe any patents or other property right claims or to contest validity of any such claims; this section has the sole purpose of protecting the integrity of the free software distribution system, which is i mplemented by public license practices. Many people have made generous contributions to the wide range of software distributed through tha t system in reliance on consistent application of that system; it is up to the author/donor to decide if he or she is willing to distribute software through any other system and a licensee cannot impose that choice. This section is intended to make thoroughly clear what is believed to be a consequence of the rest of this License. 8. If the distribution and/or use of the P rogram is restricted in certain countries either by patents or by copyrighted inter faces, the original copyright holder who places the P rogram under this License may add an explicit geographical distribution limitation excluding those countries, so that distribution is permitted only in or among countries not thus excluded. In such case, this License incorporates the limitation as if written in the body of this License.
14 Appendix 74 En 9. The F ree Sof tware F oundation may publish revised and/or new versions of the General P ublic License from time to time. Such ne w versions will be similar in spirit to the present version, but may differ in detail to address new problems or concerns. Each version is given a distinguishing version number . If the Program specifies a version number of this License which applies to it and âÂÂany later versionâÂÂ, you have the option of following the terms and conditions either of that version or of any later ve rsion published by the F ree Sof tware F oundation. If the P rogram does not specif y a version number of this License, you may choose any version ever published by the F ree Sof tware F oundation. 10. If you wish to incorporate parts of the P rogram into other free programs whose distribution conditions are different, write to the author to ask for permission. F or sof tware which is copyrighted by the F ree Sof tware F oundation, write to the F ree Software Fou ndation; we sometimes make exceptions for this. Our decision will be guided by the two goals of preserving the free status of all deriva tives of our free software and of promoting the sharing and reuse of sof tware generally . NO WARRANTY 11. BECA USE THE PROGRAM IS LICENSED FREE OF CHARGE, THERE IS NO W ARRANTY FOR THE PROGRAM, TO THE EXTENT PERMIT TED BY APPLICABLE LAW . EXCEPT WHEN OTHERWISE ST A TED IN WRITING THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND/OR OTHER P ARTIES PROVIDE THE PROGRAM â AS ISâ WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCL UDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO , THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANT ABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A P ARTICUL AR PURPOSE. THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QU ALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE PROGRAM IS WITH YOU. SHOULD THE PROGRAM PROVE DEFECTIVE, YOU ASSUME THE COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING, REP AIR OR CORRECTION. 12. IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LA W OR AGREED TO IN WRITING WILL ANY COPYRIGHT HOLDER , OR ANY OTHER P ARTY WHO MA Y MODIFY AND/OR REDISTRIBUTE THE PROGRAM AS PERMIT TED ABOVE, BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR DAMAGES, INCL UDING ANY GENERAL, SPECIAL, INCIDENT AL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE PROGRAM (INCL UDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOSS OF DA T A OR DA T A BEING RENDERED INACCURA TE OR L OSSES SUST AINED BY YOU OR THIRD P ARTIES OR A FAIL URE OF THE PROGRAM TO OPERA TE WITH ANY OTHER PROGRAMS), EVEN IF SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER P ARTY HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS How to Apply These T erms to Y our New Programs If you develop a new program, and you want it to be of the greatest possible use to the public, the best way to achieve this is to make it free software which ever yone can redistribute and change under these terms. To do so, attach the following notices to the program. It is safest to attach them to the start of each source file to most eff ectively convey the exclusion of warranty ; and each file should have at least the âÂÂcopyrightâ line and a pointer to where the full notice is found. <one line to give the programâÂÂs name and an idea of what it does.> Copyright (C) yyyy name of author This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modif y it under the terms of the GNU General P ublic License as pu blished by the F ree Sof tware F oundation; either version 2 of the License, or (at your option) any later version. This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but WITHOUT ANY W ARRANTY ; without even the implied warranty of MERCHANT ABILITY or FITNESS FOR A P ARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU General Public License for more details. Y ou should have received a copy of the GNU General P ublic License along with this program; if not, write to the F ree Software F oundation, Inc., 59 T emple Place - Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307, USA. Also add information on how to contact you by electronic and paper mail. If the program is interactive, make it output a short notice like this when it starts in an interactive mode: Gnomovision version 69, Copyright (C) year name of author Gnomovision comes with ABSOL UTEL Y NO WARRANTY ; for details type âÂÂshow w âÂÂ. This is free software, and you are welcome to redistribute it under certain conditions; type âÂÂshow câ for details. The hypothetical commands âÂÂshow wâ and âÂÂshow câ should show the appropriate parts of the General P ublic License. Of course, the commands you use may be called something other than âÂÂshow wâ and âÂÂshow câÂÂ; they could even be mouse-clicks or menu itemsâ whatever suits your program. Y ou should also get your employer (if you work as a programmer) or your school, if any , to sign a âÂÂcopyright disclaimer â for th e program, if necessar y . Here is a sample; alter the names: Y oyodyne, Inc., hereby disclaims all copyright interest in the program âÂÂGnomovisionâ (which makes passes at compilers) written by James Hacker . signature of T y Coon, 1 April 1989 Ty Coon, P resident of Vice This General P ublic License does not permit incorporating your program into proprietar y programs. If your program is a subrouti ne librar y , you may consider it more useful to permit linking proprietar y applications with the librar y . If this is what you want to do, use the GNU Lesser General P ublic License instead of this License.
14 Appendix English 75 En GNU Lesser General Public License V ersion 2.1, February 1999 Copyright (C) 1991, 1999 F ree Sof tware F oundation, Inc. 59 T emple Place, Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307, USA Ever yone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies of this license document, but changing it is not allowed. [This is the first released version of the Lesser GPL. It also counts as the successor of the GNU Library Public License, version 2, hence the version number 2.1.] Preamble The licenses for most software are designed to take away your freedom to share and change it. By contrast, the GNU General P ubl ic Licenses are intended to guarantee your freedom to share and change free softwareâÂÂto make sure the software is free for all its users. This license, the Lesser General P ublic License, applies to some specially designated software packagesâÂÂtypically librariesâÂÂof the F ree Sof tware Foundation and other authors who decide to use it. Y ou can use it too, but we suggest you first think carefully a bout whether this license or the ordinar y General P ublic License is the better strategy to use in any particular case, based on the explanations below . When we speak of free software, we are referring to freedom of use, not price. Our General P ublic Licenses are designed to make sure that you have the freedom to distribute copies of free software (and charge for this ser vice if you wish); that you receive source code or can get it if you want it; that you can change the software and use pieces of it in new free programs; and that you are informed that you can do these things. To protect your rights, we need to make restrictions that forbid distributors to deny you these rights or to ask you to surrender these rights. These restrictions translate to certain responsibilities for you if you distribute copies of the library or if you modi fy it. F or example, if you distribute copies of the librar y , whether gratis or for a fee, you must give the recipients all the rights that we gave you. Y ou must make sure that they , too, receive or can get the source code. If you link other code with the library , you must p rovide complete object files to the recipients, so that they can relink them with the library af ter making changes to the librar y and recompiling it. And you must show them these terms so they know their rights. We protect your rights with a two-step method: (1) we copyright the librar y, and (2) we offer you this license, which gives you legal permission to copy , distribute and/or modif y the librar y . To protect each distributor , we want to make it ver y clear that there is no warranty for the free librar y . Also, if the library is modified by someone else and passed on, the recipients should know that what they have is not the original version , so that the original au thor âÂÂs reputation will not be affected by problems that might be introduced by others. F inally , software patents pose a constant threat to the existence of any free program. W e wish to make sure that a company cann ot effectively restrict the users of a free program by obtaining a restrictive license from a patent holder . Therefore, we insist that any patent license obtained for a version of the library must be consistent with the full freedom of use specified in this license. Most GNU software, including some libraries, is covered by the ordinar y GNU General P ublic License. This license, the GNU Lesse r General P ublic License, applies to certain designated libraries, and is quite different from the ordinary General Public License. W e use this license for certain libraries in order to permit linking those libraries into non-free programs. When a program is linked with a librar y , whether statically or using a shared librar y , the combination of the two is legally speaking a combined work, a derivative of the original library. The ordinary General Public License therefore permits such linking only if the entire combination fits its criteria of freedom. The Lesser General P ublic License permits more lax criteria for linking other code with the librar y . We call this license the âÂÂLesser â General P ublic License because it does Less to protect the user âÂÂs freedom than the ordinar y G eneral P ublic License. It also provides other free software developers Less of an advantage over competing non-free programs. These disadvantages are the reason we use the ordinar y General P ublic License for many libraries. However , the Lesser license provide s advantages in certain special circumstances. F or example, on rare occasions, there may be a special need to encourage the widest possible use of a certain library, so that it becomes a de-facto standard. T o achieve this, non-free programs must be allowed to use the librar y . A more frequent case is that a free librar y does the same job as widely used non-free libraries. In this case, there is little to gain by limiting the free librar y to free software only , so we use the Lesser General P ublic License. In other cases, permission to use a particular librar y in non-free programs enables a greater number of people to use a large body of free software. For example, permission to use the GNU C Library in non-free programs enables many more people to use the whole GNU operating system, as well as its variant, the GNU/Linux operating system. Although the Lesser General P ublic License is Less protective of the usersâ freedom, it does ensure that the user of a program that is linked with the Librar y has the freedom and the wherewithal to run that program using a modified version of the Librar y . The precise terms and conditions for copying, distribution and modification follow . P ay close attention to the difference between a â work based on the librar y â and a â work that uses the librar y âÂÂ. The former contains code derived from the library, whereas the latter must be combined with the librar y in order to run.
14 Appendix 76 En GNU Lesser General Public License TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR COPYING, DISTRIBUTION AND MODIFICA TION 0. This License Agreement applies to any software librar y or other program which contains a notice placed by the copyright holder or other authorized party saying it may be distributed under the terms of this Lesser General P ublic License (also called âÂÂthis Li censeâÂÂ). Each licensee is addressed as âÂÂyouâÂÂ. A âÂÂlibrar yâ means a collection of sof tware functions and/or data prepared so as to be conveniently linked with application prog rams (which use some of those functions and data) to form executables. The âÂÂLibrar yâÂÂ, below , refers to any such sof tware librar y or work which has been distributed under these terms. A âÂÂwork based on the Librar y â means either the Librar y or any derivative work under copyright law : that is to say , a work containing the Librar y or a portion of it, either verbatim or with modifications and/or translated straightforwardly into another language. (Hereinaf ter , t ranslation is included without limitation in the term âÂÂmodificationâÂÂ.) âÂÂSource codeâ for a work means the preferred form of the work for making modifications to it. F or a librar y , complete source co de means all the source code for all modules it contains, plus any associated interface definition files, plus the scripts used to control compilation and installation of the librar y . Activities other than copying, distribution and modification are not covered by this License; they are outside its scope. The act of running a program using the Librar y is not restricted, and output from such a program is covered only if its contents constitute a work based on the Librar y (independent of the use of the Librar y in a tool for writing it). Whether that is true depends on what the Librar y does and what the program that uses the Librar y does. 1. Y ou may copy and distribute verbatim copies of the Librar yâÂÂs complete source code as you receive it, in any medium, provided that you conspicuously and appropriately publish on each copy an appropriate copyright notice and disclaimer of warranty ; keep intac t all the notices that refer to this License and to the absence of any warranty ; and distribute a copy of this License along with the Librar y . Y ou may charge a fee for the physical act of transferring a copy , and you may at your option offer warranty protection in excha nge for a fee. 2. Y ou may modify your copy or copies of the Librar y or any portion of it, thus forming a work based on the Librar y , and copy an d distribute such modifications or work under the terms of Section 1 above, provided that you also meet all of these conditions: a) The modified work must itself be a sof tware librar y . b) Y ou must cause the files modified to carr y prominent notices stating that you changed the files and the date of any change. c) Y ou must cause the whole of the work to be licensed at no charge to all third parties under the terms of this License. d) If a facility in the modified Library refers to a function or a table of data to be supplied by an application program that uses the facility , other than as an argument passed when the facility is invoked, then you must make a good faith effort to ensure that, in the event an application does not supply such function or table, the facility still operates, and performs whatever part of its purpose remains meaningful. (F or example, a function in a librar y to compute square roots has a purpose that is entirely well-defined independent of the ap plication. Therefore, Subsection 2d requires that any application-supplied function or table used by this function must be optional: if th e application does not supply it, the square root function must still compute square roots.) These requirements apply to the modi fied work as a whole. If identifiable sections of that work are not derived from the Library , and can be reasonably considered indep endent and separate works in themselves, then this License, and its terms, do not apply to those sections when you distribute them as separate works. But when you distribute the same sections as part of a whole which is a work based on the Library , the distribu tion of the whole must be on the terms of this License, whose permissions for other licensees extend to the entire whole, and thus t o each and ever y part regardless of who wrote it. Thus, it is not the intent of this section to claim rights or contest your rights to work written entirely by you; rather , the intent is to exercise the right to control the distribution of derivative or collective works based on the Library . In addition, mere aggregation of another work not based on the Library with the Librar y (or with a work based on the Librar y) on a volume of a storage or distribution medium does not bring the other work under the scope of this License. 3. Y ou may opt to apply the terms of the ordinar y GNU General P ublic License instead of this License to a given copy of the Libr ar y . T o do this, you must alter all the notices that refer to this License, so that they refer to the ordinary GNU General Public Licen se, version 2, instead of to this License. (If a newer version than version 2 of the ordinary GNU General Public License has appear ed, then you can specify that version instead if you wish.) Do not make any other change in these notices. Once this change is made in a given copy , it is irreversible for that copy , so the ordinar y GNU General P ublic License applies to all subsequent copies and derivative works made from that copy . This option is useful when you wish to copy part of the code of the Librar y into a program that is not a librar y . 4. Y ou may copy and distribute the Librar y (or a portion or derivative of it, under Section 2) in object code or executable form under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above provided that you accompany it with the complete corresponding machine-readable source code, which must be distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a medium customarily used for software interchange. If distribution of object code is made by offering access to copy from a designated place, then offering equivalent access to c opy the source code from the same place satisfies the requirement to distribute the source code, even though third parties are not compelled to copy the source along with the object code. 5. A program that contains no derivative of any portion of the Librar y , but is designed to work with the Librar y by being compiled or linked with it, is called a âÂÂwork that uses the Librar y âÂÂ. Such a work, in isolation, is not a derivative work of the Library , and therefore falls outside the scope of this License. However , linking a â work that uses the Librar y â with the Librar y creates an executable that is a derivative of the Librar y (because it contains portions of the Librar y), rather than a âÂÂwork that uses the librar y âÂÂ. The executable is therefore covered by this License. Section 6 states terms for distribution of such executables.
14 Appendix English 77 En When a âÂÂwork that uses the Librar y â uses material from a header file that is part of the Librar y , the object code for the work may be a derivative work of the Librar y even though the source code is not. Whether this is true is especially significant if the work can be linked without the Librar y , or if the work is itself a librar y . The threshold for this to be true is not precisely defined by l aw . If such an object file uses only numerical parameters, data structure layouts and accessors, and small macros and small inline functions (ten lines or less in length), then the use of the object file is unrestricted, regardless of whether it is legally a derivative work. (Executables containing this object code plus portions of the Librar y will still fall under Section 6.) Otherwise, if the work is a derivative of the Librar y, you may distribute the object code for the work under the terms of Section 6. Any executables containing that work also fall under Section 6, whether or not they are linked directly with the Library itself . 6. As an exception to the Sections above, you may also combine or link a âÂÂwork that uses the Librar y â with the Librar y to produce a work containing portions of the Librar y , and distribute that work under terms of your choice, provided that the terms permit modification of the work for the customer âÂÂs own use and reverse engineering for debugging such modifications. Y ou must give prominent notice with each copy of the work that the Librar y is used in it and that the Librar y and its use are c overed by this License. Y ou must supply a copy of this License. If the work during execution displays copyright notices, you must incl ude the copyright notice for the Librar y among them, as well as a reference directing the user to the copy of this License. Also, you must do one of these things: a) Accompany the work with the complete corresponding machine-readable source code for the Library including whatever changes were used in the work (which must be distributed under Sections 1 and 2 above); and, if the work is an executable linked with the Librar y , with the complete machine-readable â work that uses the Librar y âÂÂ, as object code and/or source code, so that the user can modify the Librar y and then relink to produce a modified executable containing the modified Librar y . (It is understood that the user who changes the contents of definitions files in the Library will not necessarily be able to recompile the applic ation to use the modified definitions.) b) Use a suitable shared library mechanism for linking with the Librar y . A suitable mechanism is one that (1) uses at run time a copy of the librar y already present on the user âÂÂs computer system, rather than copying librar y functions into the executable, and (2) will operate properly with a modified version of the librar y , if the user installs one, as long as the modified version is inter face-compatible with the version that the work was made with. c) Accompany the work with a written offer , valid for at least three years, to give the same user the materials specified in Sub section 6a, above, for a charge no more than the cost of performing this distribution. d) If distribution of the work is made by offering access to copy from a designated place, offer equivalent access to copy the a bove specified materials from the same place. e) V erif y that the user has already received a copy of these materials or that you have already sent this user a copy . F or an executable, the required form of the âÂÂwork that uses the Librar y â must include any data and utility programs needed for reproducing the executable from it. However , as a special exception, the materials to be distributed need not include anything that is normally distributed (in either source or binar y form) with the major components (compiler , kernel, and so on) of the operat ing system on which the executable runs, unless that component itself accompanies the executable. It may happen that this requirement contradicts the license restrictions of other proprietar y libraries that do not normally ac company the operating system. Such a contradiction means you cannot use both them and the Library together in an executable that you distribute. 7. Y ou may place librar y facilities that are a work based on the Librar y side-by-side in a single librar y together with other li brar y facilities not covered by this License, and distribute such a combined library, provided that the separate distribution of the work based on the Librar y and of the other librar y facilities is otherwise permitted, and provided that you do these two things: a) Accompany the combined library with a copy of the same work based on the Librar y , uncombined with any other librar y facilities. This must be distributed under the terms of the Sections above. b) Give prominent notice with the combined library of the fact that part of it is a work based on the Librar y, and explaining wh ere to find the accompanying uncombined form of the same work. 8. Y ou may not copy , modif y , sublicense, link with, or distribute the Librar y except as expressly provided under this License. A ny attempt otherwise to copy , modif y , sublicense, link with, or distribute the Librar y is void, and will automatically terminate y our rights under this License. However , parties who have received copies, or rights, from you under this License will not have thei r licenses terminated so long as such parties remain in full compliance. 9. Y ou are not required to accept this License, since you have not signed it. However , nothing else grants you permission to modif y or distribute the Librar y or its derivative works. These actions are prohibited by law if you do not accept this License. Therefore, by modifying or distributing the Librar y (or any work based on the Librar y), you indicate your acceptance of this License to do so, and all its terms and conditions for copying, distributing or modifying the Librar y or works based on it. 10. Each time you redistribute the Librar y (or any work based on the Librar y), the recipient automatically receives a license from the original licensor to copy , distribute, link with or modify the Librar y subject to these terms and conditions. Y ou may not impose any further restrictions on the recipientsâ exercise of the rights granted herein . Y ou are not responsible for enforcing compliance by third parties with this License. 11. If , as a consequence of a court judgment or allegation of patent infringement or for any other reason (not limited to patent issues), conditions are imposed on you (whether by court order , agreement or other wise) that contradict the conditions of this License, they do not excuse you from the conditions of this License. If you cannot distribute so as to satisfy simultaneously your obligation s under this License and any other pertinent obligations, then as a consequence you may not distribute the Library at all. F or example, if a patent license would not permit royalty-free redistribution of the Librar y by all those who receive copies directly or indirectly through you, then the only way you could satisfy both it and this License would be to refrain entirely from distribution of the Librar y .
14 Appendix 78 En If any portion of this section is held invalid or unenforceable under any particular circumstance, the balance of the section i s intended to apply , and the section as a whole is intended to apply in other circumstances. It is not the purpose of this section to induce you to infringe any patents or other property right claims or to contest validity of any such claims; this section has the sole purpose of protecting the integrity of the free software distribution system which is im plemented by public license practices. Many people have made generous contributions to the wide range of software distributed through tha t system in reliance on consistent application of that system; it is up to the author/donor to decide if he or she is willing to distribute software through any other system and a licensee cannot impose that choice. This section is intended to make thoroughly clear what is believed to be a consequence of the rest of this License. 12. If the distribution and/or use of the Library is restricted in certain countries either by patents or by copyrighted inter faces, the original copyright holder who places the Librar y under this License may add an explicit geographical distribution limitation ex cluding those countries, so that distribution is permitted only in or among countries not thus excluded. In such case, this License inc orporates the limitation as if written in the body of this License. 13. The F ree Sof tware Foundation may publish revised and/or new versions of the Lesser General P ublic License from time to time. Such new versions will be similar in spirit to the present version, but may differ in detail to address new problems or concern s. Each version is given a distinguishing version number . If the Librar y specifies a version number of this License which applies to it and âÂÂany later versionâÂÂ, you have the option of following the terms and conditions either of that version or of any later versi on published by the F ree Sof tware F oundation. If the Library does not specif y a license version number , you may choose any version ever published by the F ree Sof tware F oundation. 14. If you wish to incorporate parts of the Library into other free programs whose distribution conditions are incompatible with these, write to the author to ask for permission. F or software which is copyrighted by the Free Software F oundation, write to the F ree Software Foundation; we sometimes make exceptions for this. Our decision will be guided by the two goals of preserving the free status of all derivatives of our free software and of promoting the sharing and reuse of software generally . NO WARRANTY 15. BECA USE THE LIBRARY IS LICENSED FREE OF CHARGE, THERE IS NO W ARRANTY FOR THE LIBRARY , TO THE EXTENT PERMIT TED BY APPLICABLE LAW . EXCEPT WHEN OTHERWISE ST A TED IN WRITING THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND/OR OTHER P ARTIES PROVIDE THE LIBRARY â AS ISâ WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCL UDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO , THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANT ABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A P ARTICUL AR PURPOSE. THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QU ALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE LIBRARY IS WITH YOU. SHOULD THE LIBRARY PROVE DEFECTIVE, Y OU ASSUME THE COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING, REP AIR OR CORRECTION. 16. IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LA W OR AGREED TO IN WRITING WILL ANY COPYRIGHT HOLDER , OR ANY OTHER P ARTY WHO MA Y MODIFY AND/OR REDISTRIBUTE THE LIBRARY AS PERMIT TED ABOVE, BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR DAMAGES, INCL UDING ANY GENERAL, SPECIAL, INCIDENT AL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE LIBRARY (INCL UDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOSS OF DA T A OR DA T A BEING RENDERED INACCURA TE OR L OSSES SUST AINED BY YOU OR THIRD P ARTIES OR A FAIL URE OF THE LIBRARY TO OPERA TE WITH ANY OTHER SOF TWARE), EVEN IF SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER P ARTY HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS How to Apply These T erms to Y our New Libraries If you develop a new librar y , and you want it to be of the greatest possible use to the public, we recommend making it free software that ever yone can redistribute and change. Y ou can do so by permitting redistribution under these terms (or , alternatively, under the terms of the ordinar y General P ublic License). To apply these terms, attach the following notices to the library . It is safest to attach them to the start of each source file to most effectively convey the exclusion of warranty ; and each file should have at least the âÂÂcopyrightâ line and a pointer to where the full notice is found. <one line to give the librar yâÂÂs name and an idea of what it does.> Copyright (C) year name of author This librar y is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modif y it under the terms of the GNU Lesser General P ublic License as published by the F ree Sof tware F oundation; either version 2.1 of the License, or (at your option) any later version. This librar y is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but WITHOUT ANY W ARRANTY ; without even the implied warranty of MERCHANT ABILITY or FITNESS FOR A P ARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU Lesser General Public License for more details. Y ou should have received a copy of the GNU Lesser General P ublic License along with this librar y ; if not, write to the F ree Sof tware F oundation, Inc., 59 T emple Place, Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307, USA Also add information on how to contact you by electronic and paper mail. Y ou should also get your employer (if you work as a programmer) or your school, if any , to sign a âÂÂcopyright disclaimer â for the librar y , if necessar y . Here is a sample; alter the names: Y oyodyne, Inc., hereby disclaims all copyright interest in the library âÂÂFrobâ (a library for tweaking knobs) written by James R andom Hacker . signature of T y Coon, 1 April 1990 Ty Coon, P resident of Vice ThatâÂÂs all there is to it!
14 Appendix English 79 En Specifications It em 5 0"Plasma Displa y , Model: PR O-5 0 5PU 4 3" Plasma Display , Model: PR O-4 3 5PU Number of Pix els 1 2 80 à7 6 8 pixels 1 0 2 4 à7 6 8 pixels Audio Amplifier 1 3 W 1 3 W (1 kHz, 1 0 %, 8 ⦠)1 3 W 1 3 W (1 kHz, 1 0 %, 8 ⦠) Surr ound Sy stem SR S/FOCUS/T ruBass SR S/FOCUS/T ruBass Po w er Requir ement 1 2 0 V AC, 6 0 Hz, 3 6 3 W (0.2 W Standb y) 1 2 0 V AC, 6 0 Hz, 2 98 W (0.2 W St andby) Dimensions 1 2 7 0 (W) à7 3 7 (H) à9 3 (D) mm 1 1 2 0 (W) à6 5 2 (H) à9 3 (D) mm (5 0 (W) à2 9 (H) à3 11 /1 6 (D) inches) (44 1 /8 (W) à25 11 /1 6 (H) à3 11 /1 6 (D) inches) W eight 3 2.8 kg (7 2.3 lbs.) 2 6.8 kg (5 9.1 lbs.) It em Media R eceiver , Model: PR O-R0 5U R ecep tion Syst em (Digital) A TSC Digit al TV sy stem Circuit t ype 8VSB/6 4QAM/2 5 6QAM/QPSK demodulation T uner VHF/UHF VHF 2âÂÂ1 3ch, UHF 1 4âÂÂ6 9ch CA TV 2âÂÂ1 3 5ch Audio format Dolb y Digital R ecep tion Syst em (Analog) American TV st andard NTSC s yst em Circuit t ype V ideo signal det ection PLL full synchr onous det ection, PLL digital s ynthesizer sys t em T uner VHF/UHF VHF 2âÂÂ1 3ch, UHF 1 4âÂÂ6 9ch CA TV ANTENNA/CABLE A IN: 1âÂÂ1 3 5ch Cable: 1âÂÂ1 2 5ch Audio multiple x BTSC s yst em T erminals Rear ANTENNA/CABLE A IN 7 5 ⦠UNB AL, F T ype for DTV/VHF/UHF/CA TV in ANTENNA B 7 5 ⦠UNB AL, F T ype for VHF/UHF/CA TV in Loop out i.LINK (TS) S4 00 (2) INPUT 1 COMPONENT VIDEO in, S- VIDEO in, VIDEO in, AUDIO in, HDMI in INPUT 2 S- VIDEO in, VIDEO in, AUDIO in INPUT 3 COMPONENT VIDEO in, A UDIO in, HDMI in Monit or Out S- VIDEO out, VIDEO out, A UDIO out Digital Audio Output Optical (1) VCR Control Output 1 CONTR OL IN 1 CONTR OL OUT 1 Cable CARD P oint of Deplo yment Fr ont INPUT 4 COMPONENT VIDEO in, S- VIDEO in, VIDEO in, AUDIO in PC Analog R GB in, AUDIO in OSD English/Fr ench/Spanish Po w er Requir ement 1 2 0 V A C, 6 0 Hz, 4 3.3 W (3 1 W Standb y) Dimensions 4 2 0 (W) à90 (H) à2 9 5 (D) mm (1 6 9 /1 6 (W) à3 9 /1 6 (H) à11 10 /1 6 (D) inches) W eight 5.8 kg (1 2.8 lbs.) ⢠Design and specifications are subject to change without notice.
14 Appendix 80 En T rademarks ⢠FOCUS, WOW , SRS and symbol are trademarks of SRS Labs, Inc. FOCUS and WOW technologies are incorporated under license from SRS Labs, Inc. ⢠Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. âÂÂDolbyâ and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories. ⢠HDMI, the HDMI logo and High-Definition Multimedia Interface are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC. ⢠This product includes F ontAvenue î fonts licensed by NEC Corporation . FontAvenue is a registered trademark of NEC Corporation . ⢠âÂÂi.LINKâ and the âÂÂi.LINKâ logo are trademarks. ⢠DDC is a registered trademark of V ideo Electronics Standards Association. ⢠CableCARD is a trademark of Cable T elevision Laboratories, Inc. ⢠The names of the companies or institutions are trademarks or registered trademarks of the respective companies or institutions. Copyright protection ⢠This product incorporates copyright protection technology that is protected by U.S. patents and other intellectual property rights. Use of this copyright protection technology must be authorized by Macrovision Corporation , and is intended for home and other limited consumer uses only unless otherwise authorized by Macrovision. Reverse engineering or disassembly is prohibited. Published by Pioneer Corporation. Copyright é 2004 Pioneer Corporation. All rights reserved.
PIONEER CORPORATION 4-1, Meguro 1-Chome, Meguro-ku, Tokyo 153-8654, Japan PIONEER ELECTRONICS (USA) INC. P.O. BOX 1540, Long Beach, California 90810-1540, U.S.A. TEL: (800) 421-1404 PIONEER ELECTRONICS OF CANADA, INC. 300 Allstate Parkway, Markham, Ontario L3R OP2, Canada TEL: 1-877-283-5901 PIONEER EUROPE NV Haven 1087, Keetberglaan 1, B-9120 Melsele, Belgium TEL: 03/570.05.11 PIONEER ELECTRONICS ASIACENTRE PTE. LTD. 253 Alexandra Road, #04-01, Singapore 159936 TEL: 65-6472-7555 PIONEER ELECTRONICS AUSTRALIA PTY. LTD. 178-184 Boundary Road, Braeside, Victoria 3195, Australia, TEL: (03) 9586-6300 PIONEER ELECTRONICS DE MEXICO S.A. DE C.V. Blvd.Manuel A vila Camacho 138 10 piso Col.Lomas de Chapultepec, Me xico,D .F . 11000 TEL: 55-9178-4270 Published by Pioneer Corporation. Copyright é 2004 Pioneer Corporation. All rights reserved. <04H00001> Printed in Japan / Imprimé au Japon <ARB1566-A> Printed on recycled paper Imprimé sur papier recyclé